DEC 10 OSCMA A D Decsystem10 Operating System Commands Manual

DEC-10-OSCMA-A-D decsystem10 Operating System Commands Manual DEC-10-OSCMA-A-D decsystem10 Operating System Commands Manual

User Manual: DEC-10-OSCMA-A-D decsystem10 Operating System Commands Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 520

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Operating System Command Manual

OPERATING SYSTEM
COMMANDS MANUAL
DEC-10-0SCMA-A-D

This manual reflects the software of the 5.07 and
6.01 releases of the monitor.

digital equipment corporation · maynard. massachusetts

The DECsystem-l0 Commands Manual was produced via RUNOFF (version 10) and converted
to Typeset-IO. Software enhancements will enable
us to attain even better formatting and typographical quality in the near future.

This document reflects the software associated with the
5.07 and 6.01 releases of the Monitor. For individual
system program numbers, refer to page v.
First Printing, May 1971
Revision:
Decem ber 1971
Revision:
June 1972
Revision:
April 1973
Revision:
May 197·4
The information in this document is subject to change
without notice and should not be construed as a
commitment by Digital Equipment Corporation. Digital
Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility for any
errors that may appear in this manual.
The software described in this document is furnished to
the purchaser under a license for use on a single
computer system and can be copied (with inclusion of
DIGITAL's copyright notice) only for use in such system,
except as may otherwise be provided in writing by
DIGITAL.
Digital Equipment Corporation assumes no responsibility
for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that
is not supplied by DIGITAL.

Copyright 01971, 1972, 1973, 1974,
by Digital Equipment Corporation
The postage prepaid READER's COMMENTS form on
the last page of this document requests the user's critical
evaluation to assist us in preparing future documentation.
The following are trademarks of Digital Equipment Corporation.
CDP
COMPUTER LAB
COMSYST
COMTEX
DDT
DEC
DECCOMM
DECTAPE
DIBOL

DIGITAL
·DNC
EDGRIN
EDUSYSTEM
FLIP CHIP
FOCAL
GLC-8
IDAC
IDACS

INDAC
KAIO
LAB-8
LAB-8/e
LAB-K
OMNIBUS
OS/8
PDP
PHA

PS/8
QUICK POINT
RAD-8
RSTS
RSX
RTM
RT-II
SABR
TYPESET-IO
UNIBUS

FOREWORD

DEo,ystem-IO Operating S)stem Commands is a complete reference document describing the
commands available in the DECsystem-1O operating system. The information presented in this
manual reflects the 6.01/5.07 release of the monitor and other related programs. Commands
to both the monitor command language interpreter and the programs in the Batch system are
grouped in alphabetical order for easy reference to the command repertoire.
DECsystem-lO Operating System Commands does not include reference material on assembly
language programming. This information can be found in DECsystem-lO Monitor Calls (DECIO-MRRD-D), which is intended for the experienced assembly language programmer.
Included in DEC!.ystem-lO Monitor Calls are discussions of the monitor programmed operators
and the various I/O devices connected to the system. The two manuals, DECsystem-IO
Operating System Commands and DEClystem-IO Monitor Calls, supersede the Timesharing
Monitors Programmer:~ Reference Manual (DEC-T9-MTZD-D) and all of its updates.
A third manual, Introduction to DECsystem-IO Sofiware (DEC-IO-MZDB-D), is a general
overview of the DECsystem-lO. It is written for the person, not necessarily a programmer,
who knows computers and computing concepts and who desires to know the relationship
between the various components of the DECsystem-lO. This manual is not intended to be a
programmer's reference manual, and therefore, it is recommended that it be read once before
reading the above-mentioned reference documents.

SYNOPSIS OF DECsystem-lO OPERATING SYSTEM COMMANDS
Chapter I presents all of the commands available to the user and introduces the various
components of the operating system that interface with the user. Chapter 2 is a detailed
description of the commands processed by the monitor command language interpreter.
Presented in Chapter 3 are the commands to the Batch system and a discussion of the
programs in this system. The DECsystem-1O system error messages and error codes are listed
in Chapter 4 along with descriptive information on how to correct the errors. The appendices
contain supplementary reference material and tables.

CONVENTIONS USED IN DECsystem-lO OPERATING SYSTEM COMMANDS
The following conventions have been used throughout this manual:
dev:

Any logical· or physical device name. The colon must be
included when a device is used as part of a file specification.

list

A single file specification or a string of file specifications. A
file specification consists of a filename (with or without a
filename extension), a device name if the file is not on disk,
a project-programmer number, if the file is not in the user's
disk area, and a protection code.

III

arg

A paIr of file specifications or a string of pairs of file
specifications.

jobn

Any job number assigned by the monitor.

file.ext

Any legal filename and filename extension.

core

Decimal number of I K blocks of core.

adr

An octal address.

C(adr)

The contents of an octal address.

[proj,prog]

Project-programmer numbers; the square brackets must be
included in the command string.

Any legal file structure name or abbreviation.

The symbol used to indicate an altmode.

A control character obtained by depressing the CTRL key
and then the character key x.

A back arrow used in command strings to separate the input
and output file specifications.

The system program response to a command string.
The monitor response to a command string.

)

The symbol used to indicate that the user should depress the
RETURN key. This key must be used to terminate every
command to the Monitor Command Language Interpreter.

Underscoring used to indicate computer typeout.

A decimal number.
An equal sign used in command strings to separate the
input and output file specifications.

SOFTWARE VERSION NUMBERS

ALCFIL

Version 7

KJOB

Version 50

BATCON

Version \0

LINED

Version 13A

COMPIL

Version 22A

LINK-IO

Version IA

COPY

Version 6A

Version 54

CREF

Version 47

Monitor

6.0115.07

DAEMON

Version 7

OMOUNT

Version 23

DIRECT

Version 3

OPSER

Version 5

DUMP

Version 4

PIP

Version 33

FAILSA

Version 77

PLEASE

Version II

FILCOM

Version 20A

QUEUE

Version 5

FILEX

Version IS

QUOLST

Version 4

FUDGE2

Version IS

REATTA

Version 3

GLOB

Version SA

SETSRC

Version 12

GRIPE

Version 3

SPRINT-IO

Version I

HELP

Version 4

SYSTAT

Version 471

INITIA

Version 3

TECO

Version 23

UMOUNT

Version 21

CONTENTS

Page

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.1.1
1.3.2
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.2.1
1.4.2.2
1.4.2.3
1.4.2.4
1.4.2.5
1.4.3
1.5
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.5.7
1.5.8
1.5.8.1
1.5.8.2

Jobs
............................... I - I
................. 1-2
Monitor Mode and User Mode ............................ .
Command Interpreters.
... 1-2
......................... 1-3
Monitor Command Language Interpreter ..
Special Characters.
.. 1-4
Batch Command Interpreter.
................................................... 1-5
Command Formats.
. ................... 1-6
Command Names.
... 1-6
Command Arguments .....
. ....................................................... 1-7
Project-Programmer Numbers.
............................................. 1-7
Device Names ..
'" 1-7
File Structure Names
............. 1-10
File Specifications.
. ...... 1-10
Date-Time Arguments
.... ... 1- 12
Option Files ...
........................................... 1-14
COMPIL-Class Commands.
. ...... 1-15
Indirect Commands(@ Construction)
.............. I-17
The + Construction . ............................................................... 1-17
The = Construction.
.1-17
The
C o n s t r u c t i o n . . ......... 1-18
Compile Switches..
. .................................... 1-18
Standard Processor
............. 1-19
Processor Switches.
. ....... 1-19
Switches to the Linking-Loaders ....................................................................... 1-24
Passing LOADER Switches.
............. 1-24
Passing LlNK-IO Switches.
...... 1-25

CHAPTER 2

SYSTEMS COMMANDS AND PROGRAMS

2.1
2.1.1

Commands by Functional Group . . . . . ................................. 2-1
Job Initialization Commands . . . . 2 - 1
Facility Allocation Commands ........................................................................ 2-1
Source File Preparation Commands...
. .. 2-3
File Manipulation Commands ............................................................................ 2-3
Object Program Preparation Commands. . ....... 2-4
Object Program Control Commands .................................................................. 2-5
Object Program Examination Commands. ............ 2-6
Multiple Job Control Commands.
.......................................................... 2-7
Job Termination Commands . . . 2 - 7
Sending Messages
....... 2-7
Job Information Commands.
....... 2-8
System Information Commands.
. .. 2-8
ALCFIL Program
.. 2-9
ASSIGN Command..
. ................................................................ 2-11
ATTACH Command.
. .. 2-13

2.1.2
2.1.3
2.1.4
2.1.5
2.1.6

2.1.7
2.1.8
2.1.9
2.1.10
2.1.11
2.1.12

VII

Page
BACKSPACE Command .................................................................................... 2-15
CLOSE Command ................................................................................................ 2-17
COMPILE Command .......................................................................................... 2-19
CONTINUE Command ...................................................................................... 2-26
COPY Command .................................................................................................. 2-27
CORE Command ................................................................................................. .2-29
CPUNCH Command .......................................................................................... 2-31
CREATE Command ............................................................................................ 2-37
CREF Command .................................................................................................. 2-38
CSTART Command ............................................................................................ 2-40
CCONTINUE Command .................................................................................... 2-40
D(eposit) Command ............................................................................................ 2-43
DAYTIME Command ........................................................................................ 2-45
DCORE Command .............................................................................................. 2-46
DDT Command .................................................................................................... 2-52
DEASSIGN Command ........................................................................................ 2-54
DELETE Command ............................................................................................ 2-61
DETACH Command ............................................................................................ 2-63
DIRECT Command ............................................................................................ 2-64
DISMOUNT Command ...................................................................................... 2-72
DSK Command .................................................................................................... 2-74
DTCOPY Command ............................................................................................ 2-76
DUMP Command ................................................................................................ 2-79
DUMP Program ................................................................................................... 2-81
E(xamine) Command .......................................................................................... 2-89
EDIT Command .................................................................................................. 2-90
EOF Command .................................................................................................... 2- 91
EXECUTE Command .......................................................................................... 2-92
FAILSAFE Command ........................................................................................ 2-99
FILCOM Program .......................................................................................... 2-106
FILE Command ............................................................................................... 2-115
FILEX Command ......................... " .................... " ............... " ......................... 2-119
FINISH Command ................................ " ....................................................... .2-122
FUDGE Command ................................... " .......... "" ............................ " ........ .2-124
FUDGE2 Command ...... "" .... " ............................. ,, ........................................ .2-126
GLOB Program .. "" ................................ " ...................................................... .2-134
GRIPE Program .................................................................................................. 2-138
HALT Program ......................... " .... " .............. " ............................................... 2-139
HELP Program .................................................................................................... 2-140
INITIA Command .............................................. " ........................ " .................. 2-144
JCONTINUE Command ............ " ...... " .............. " ................ " .......................... 2-145
KJOB Command ........................ " ........................................................ " ............ 2-146
LABEL Command ............................................................................................. 2-151
LIST Command .. " .................. """ .. ,, ........................................ " .......... " .......... 2-153
LOAD Command .............................................................................................. 2- 155
LOCATE Command ................ " .......................... " .. " ............................ " .......... 2-16I
LOGIN Command .................................... " ..................................................... 2- 162
MAKE Command ...... ". """"" .............................................................. " .......... 2-164
MOUNT Command ..................................................................................... 2-166
OPSER Program ............ " ............................................................................... 2-170
PJOB Command ........................ " ...................................... " .... " ........................ 2-174
PLEASE Command ........ "" .... " ............................................. " ........................ 2-175

viii

Page
PLOT Command ................................................................................................ 2-177
PRESERVE Command ...................................................................................... 2-183
PRINT Command .............................................................................................. 2-184
PROTECT Command ........................................................................................ 2-191
QUEUE Command ............................................................................................ 2-193
QUOLST Program .............................................................................................. 2-210
R Command ........................................................................................................ 2-212
REASSIGN Command ...................................................................................... 2-214
REATTA Program .............................................................................................. 2-216
REENTER Command ...................................................................................... 2-218
RENAME Command ........................................................................................ 2-219
RESOU RCES Command .................................................................................. 2-221
REWIND Command .......................................................................................... 2-222
RUN Command .................................................................................................. 2-223
SAVE Command .......................................... :..................................................... 2-225
SCHED Command ............................................................................................ 2-227
SEND Command ................................................................................................ 2-228
SET BLOCK SIZE Command .......................................................................... 2-230
SET BREAK Command .................................................................................... 2-231
SET CDR Command ........................................................................................ 2-234
SET CPU Command .......................................................................................... 2-235
SET DENSITY Command ............................................................................... 2-237
SET DSKFUL Command ............................................................................. 2-238
SET DSKPRI Command ...................
....................
........................... 2-239
SET HPQ Command
.......................................
...... 2-240
SET PHYSICAL LIMIT Command.
...............
............... 2-242
SET SPOOL Command .................................................................................. 2-244
SETSRC Command.......... ....................
..............................
.......... 2-246
SET TIME Command.................................
............ 2-250
SET TTY Command ........ .... .................. ...
......... ......
............ 2-252
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT Command...........
... 2-258
SET WATCH Command .... ...... .... ......... ...
............. 2-259
SKIP Command.......... .....................
............. ..............
..... 2-262
SSA VE Command ........................................................................................ 2-264
START Command ...............
....................
................... 2-266
SUBMIT Command ........
......................... ..............
.2-267
SYST A T Command ..... ......... .......
..... 2-273
TECO Command ........ ....... ...
.... .........
................ 2-280
TIME Command. ..................... ............
.............................. 2-282
TPUNCH Command.... ......................
....... 2-284
TYPE Command. . ......................................
.................
........ 2-290
UN LOAD Command .......................
...... ........ .......
" ........ 2-291
USEST AT Command ........................................ ..... ........
................... 2-292
VERSION Command .................................
........ .2-293
WHERE Command....................................................
........... 2-296
ZERO Command..... .. .................... ............. .... ... ...............
...... 2-297

CHAPTER 3

BATCH SYSTEM COMMANDS

3.1
3.1.1

Batch Commands .... .
SPRINT-IO .............. .

.............

............................................................. 3-1
.3-1

Page
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.1.1
3.2.1.2
3.2.1.3
3.2.1.4
3.2.1.5
3.2.1.6
3.2.2
3.2.2.1
3.2.2.2
3.2.2.3
3.2.2.4
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
3.3.9
3.3.10
3.3.11
3.3.12
3.3.13
3.3.14
3.3.15
3.3.16
3.3.17
3.3.18
3.3.19
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.4.8
3.4.9
3.4.10
3.4.11
3.5
3.5.1

The Queue Manager..
................ .3-2
The Batch Controller...
.... 3-2
The Output Spoolers..
............... .3-4
Submitting Jobs
........................................
..... 3-4
Submitting a Job with Cards..
............
.... .3-5
The $JOB Card ... ....... ....... ........... ....... ..................................................... 3-5
The $PASSWORD Card.
. . .......
..... 3-5
The $FORTRAN Card
.... 3-5
The $EXECUTE Card... ........ ....... .... ......... ..... ..........
'" .3-6
The $EOJ Card .. ............
...................................................... 3-6
Output .. ........................
.... .3-6
Submitting a Job with a File..
..... 3-6
Image of the $JOB C a r d . 3 - 6
Image of the $FORTRAN Card..
..................................................... .3-7
Image of the $EXECUTE Card ..................................................................... 3-7
Running SPRINT-IO ..........................
..3-7
Submitting a Job with a Control File to the Batch Controller ................... 3-8
Interjob Dependency..................
..3-8
SPRINT- IO Control Cards.
.... .3-9
$ALGOL Card..
................................................ 3- IO
$BLISS Card..
..3-12
SCOBOL Card ."
............... 3-14
$DATA Card.
..3-16
$DECK Card.
... 3-20
$DUMP Card..
....... 3-23
$EOD Card..
... 3-23
$EOJ Card .
. .. .3-24
$ERROR and $NOERROR Card
............. 3-24
$EXECUTE Card.
... 3-25
SFORTRAN and SF40 Cards.
... 3-25
$INCLUDE Card
.............. 3-27
$JOB Card . . 3 - 2 8
$MACRO Card.
... 3-32
$MODE Card.. .
.............. 3-34
$PASSWORD C a r d . 3 - 3 6
SRELOCATABLE Card.
............ 3-36
SSEQUENCE Card..
. .3-37
SSNOBOL Card.
... 3-37
Batch Control File Commands . . 3 - 3 9
.BACK TO Command. .
.............. 3-41
.CHKPNT Command.
... 3-41
.ERROR Command
. .3-42
.GOTO Command..
..3-42
.IF Command .....
... 3-43
.NOERROR Command.
............ 3-43
.NOOPERATOR Command. .
... 3-44
.OPERATOR Command
... 3-44
.REQUEUE Command..
... 3-45
.REVIVE Command.
............. 3-46
.SILENCE Command .....
..3-46
Job Output.
............... 3-46
The Log File..
... 3-47

Page
3.5.1.1
3.5.1.2
3.5.1.3
3.5.1.4
3.6

SPRINT-IO Messages ......................................................................................... 3-47
SPRINT-IO Error Reporting .............................................................................. 3-48
Batch Controller Messages .................................................................................. 3-48
Batch Controller Error Reporting ...................................................................... 3-49
Sample Jobs .......................................................................................................... 3-49

CHAPTER 4

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE AND ERROR CODES

APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
APPENDIX
INDEX

STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES
CARD CODES
TEMPORARY FILES
SAVE AND SSAVE COMMANDS
SWITCHES

A
B
C
D
E

CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION

The DECsystem-IO Operating System is the interface between the user and the actual
machine. The operating system, or monitor, has many functions, some of which are:

scheduling multiple and simultaneous use of the system,

protecting users of the system from one another.

allowing access to system resources including peripheral devices,

providing a comprehensive disk file system,

directing data flow between peripheral devices and the user's program,

controlling non-interactive jobs, and

overlapping input-output operations with computations for high system efficiency.

The user communicates with the operating system by means of the monitor command
language. With the command language he may access all available resources of the computing
system and obtain all the services provided by the operating system.

1.1 JOBS

The DECsystem-IO computing system is a multiprogramming system; that is, control is
transferred rapidly among a number of jobs in such a way that all jobs appear to be running
simultaneously. The term job refers to the entire sequence of steps, from beginning to end,
that the user initiates from his interactive terminal or card deck or that the operator initiates
from his operator's console. When a user initiates a job from his interactive terminal, the
beginning of the job is designated by the LOGIN command and the end by the KJOB
command. If a user initiates a job with a card deck. the beginning of the job is the 5JOB card
and the end is the SEOJ or the end-of-file card. Operator jobs usually begin when the system
is initialized and end when the system goes down.
Jobs, which may be timesharing. batch. or real-time in nature, may be initiated at the central
computer site or at remote locations connected by the telephone system. Once a user initiates
a job. it is possible for him to initiate another job without killing the first one. For example, a
user can initiate a timesharing job and by using the SUBMIT monitor command submit a
second job for batch processing (refer to Chapter 2). He may then wait for the results from
this batch job, or have the results automatically output while he continues his timesharing job.
In configuring and loading the DECsystem-lO, the system administrator sets the maximum
number of jobs that his system can simultaneously handle. This number may be up to 127

I-I

jobs if the system has enough memory, disk storage, processor capacity, and terminals to
handle this load.

1.2 MONITOR MODE AND USER MODE
From the timesharing user's point of view, his terminal is in either monitor mode or user
mode. In monitor mode, each line the user types in is sent to the monitor command language
interpreter. The execution of certain commands (as noted in the following examples) places
the terminal in user mode. When the terminal is in user mode, it becomes simply an 110
device for that user. In addition, user programs use the terminal for two purposes. The user
program will either accept user command strings from the terminal (user mode) or use the
terminal as a direct 110 device (data mode).
Example (terminal dialogue):
monitor mode
user mode
data mode

.:.R PIP)

monitor command

~DSK:PROG I.MAC TTY:) user command string

THIS IS FILE I

user program using terminal
as input device

~'C

monitor mode
user mode
data mode

.R MACRO..)
~,TTY: DSK:PROGI)

monitor command
user command string
user program using terminal
as an output device

assembly listing

The special character 'c (produced by typing C with the CONTROL key depressed) is used
by a timesharing user to stop a user program and return the terminal to monitor mode. If the
user program is waiting for input from the terminal, the user needs to type only one 'c to
return the terminal to monitor mode; otherwise, he must type two 'C's. Because of this
procedure, the user knows that his program is not waiting for input if there is not response
from the monitor after one 'c. Certain commands cause the user program to start running or
to continue (as noted in the following chapter) but leave the terminal in monitor mode.
When the system is started, each terminal is in monitor mode ready for users to log in.
However, if the system becomes fully loaded (i.e .. the maximum number of jobs that the
system is set to handle has been initiated). then any unused terminals from which access IS
requested will receive the message JOB CAPACITY EXCEEDED.
The card-oriented Batch user can think of his cards as being in input spooler mode, monitor
mode, or user mode. When the card is in input spooler mode, it contains a control command
beginning with a $ (refer to Chapter 3) and is sent to the Spooler, SPRINT. SPRINT
interprets these commands and performs various actions to create a control file for the Batch
Controller. When the card is in monitor mode, it contains a monitor command preceded by a
period and is copied by SPRINT into the control file. When the card is in user mode, it
contains a user-level program command preceded by an asterisk or an equal sign and is also
copied by SPRINT into the control file. As each line in the control file is executed, the Batch
Controller passes the monitor-level line to the monitor command language interpreter and the
user-level line to the user program.

\-2

Example (sample card deck):

INPUT SPOOLER MODE
USER MODE

$EOJ

*/X=SYS:LOADER.*

MONITOR MODE
MONITOR MODE

SPRINT-l~ COMMAND
TO SIGNAL END OF
CARD DECK

USER COMMAND STRING
MONITOR COMMAND

.QUEUE LPT:=PROG

INPUT SPOOLER MODE

MONITOR COMMAND
SPRINT-l~

CONTROL

COMMAND
DATA MODE
SPRINT-l~

INPUT SPOOLER MODE

CONTROL

COMMAND

1.3 COMMAND INTERPRETERS

1.3.1 Monitor Command Language Interpreter
When the terminal is in monitor mode. the user communicates with the monitor command
language interpreter. By means of commands to this interpreter. the user may initialize jobs.
allocate facilities. prepare source files. manipulate files. prepare. control. and examine object
programs. control job sequences and multiple jobs. terminate jobs. send messages. and obtain
job and system information. The commands described in Chapter 2 arc processed by this
interpreter.
Most commands are processed without delay. However. a command may be momentarily
delayed if a job is swapped out to the disk and the command requires that the job be resident
in core; the command is executed when the job is swapped into core. The completion of each
command is signaled by the output of a carriage return. line feed sequence. If the terminal is
left in monitor mode. a period follows the carriage return. line feed. If the terminal is left in
user mode. any response other than a carriage return. line feed comes from the user's
program. For example. most standard system programs immediately send an asterisk(*) to the
user's terminal to indicate their readiness to accept user command strings.
The type-ahead technique may be employed by the experienced timesharing user at a
terminal. This means that the user docs not have to wait for the completion of one command
before he can begin another. For example. if two operations are desired from the monitor. the

1-3

request for the second operation can be typed before receiving the period after completion of
the first.
The command interpreter makes several checks before processing commands from users. On
disk systems, if a user who has not logged in types a command that requires him to be logged
in, the system responds with
?LOG IN PLEASE
and the user's command is not executed. The commands discussed in Chapter 2 all require
login except where explicitly stated otherwise. When a command is recognized that requires
the job to have core and the job has no core allocated, the command interpreter responds
with
?NO CORE ASSIGNED
and the user's command is not executed.

1.3.1.1 Special Characters - There are several special characters recognized by the monitor
command language interpreter that causes specific functions to be performed. As noted
previously. control-C CC) interrupts the program that is currently running and returns the
terminal to monitor mode. This character causes the input line back to the last break
character (e.g .. carriage return. line feed) to be deleted (equivalent to the action of a AU). Two
control- AC'S are necessary if the user program is not requesting input from the terminal (i.e ..
the program is in the middle of execution).
The RU BOUT key on the terminal generates a character that causes the last character typed
to be deleted. This permits correction of typing errors. Depressing the RUBOUT key n times
causes the last n characters typed to be deleted. The deleted characters are echoed on the
terminal enclosed in backslashes (\). Characters beyond the last break character or characters
already processed by the user program are not deleted.
Control-U CU) causes the deletion of the current input line, back to the last break character.
The system responds with a carriage return. line feed so that the line may be typed again.
Once a break character has been typed, line-editing features CU and RUBOUT) can no
longer be used on that line. except when running TECO.
Control-O CO) temporarily suppresses output to the terminal. This action is useful when a
program begins output of a long message which does not interest the user. If he does not
want to wait for his terminal to finish printing the message. he can stop the output in one of
two ways. He can type two control-COs but this action will also stop execution of the program.
Alternatively. the user can type AO and the program continues to execute but its output is not
printed on the terminal. The system responds with a carriage ret.urn, line feed sequence.
Output is reinstated to the terminal when one of the following conditions occur:
I.

The executing program requests input from the terminal.

The program terminates and returns control to the monitor.

The user types AC to return to the monitor.

The user types another AO.

\-4

At remote stations, the effect of the '0 may be somewhat delayed.
Control - T CT) - causes the terminal to print status information pertaining to the current
user job. The status information returned is the same as the information returned for the
USEST AT command, namely:

incremental day
command.)

incremental run time (i.e .. CPU time used since last 'T. USESTAT or TIME.)

incremental disk reads (i.e., disk blocks read since last use of 'T. USESTAT or
DSK.)

incremental disk writes (i.e .. disk blocks written since last use of 'T. USEST AT or
DSK.)

program name

core size

job state

program counter (i.e .. the virtual address of the next instruction that the program
will execute.)

time (i.e., time since user last issued a

'T or USEST AT

Control-T is provided so that a user at a terminal can determine the progress of his job without
interrupting the execution of the job. Thus, a user whose terminal has not typed anything for a
minute or so can type a 1T to determine the state of his job without interfering with the job's
execution. Note that the Control-T character itself is not passed to the job as an input character.
However, some programs activate a special interrupt feature (see Paragraph 3.1.4 in the Monitor
Calls Manual). When a 1T is typed, control of such programs automatically transfers to a
routine used to output status information, in addition to the regular USEST AT printout. (For
example, a text editor in the midst of a search might print out information about the progress of
the search.)
Control-R C R) retypes the current input line after all rubout processing. For example, if a
user types in a line incorrectly. then makes corrections using the RUBOUT key, the corrected
line may be retyped in its entirety by typing 'R. An example of this is:
SET TTQ\Q\Y NO\O\O
SET TTY NO FILL

FILE\E\L

Control-R will issue a carriage return/line feed before printing the corrected input line.

1.3.2 Batch Command Interpreter
The monitor command language interpreter is used for all monitor commands submitted via
the Batch system. In addition. the Batch user. issues commands that arc only used by the
Batch programs: the input spooler (SPRINT) and the Batch Controller (BATCON). Control

1-5

September 1974

commands, discussed in Chapter 3, am processed by the input spooler and, by means of these
commands, the user can create a control file, a log file, and data files; can enter jobs into the
Batch input queue; and can insert monitor commands into the control file. An additional
interpretation is done by the Batch Controller. When the job is executed, the Batch Controller
processes the control file to pass monitor commands to the monitor command language
interpreter and user-level commands to the appropriate programs.

1.4 COMMAND FORMATS
Each command is a line of ASCII characters in upper and/or lower case. Spaces and TABs
preceding the command name are ignored. Comments may be typed on the same line as the
command by preceding the comment with a semicolon. The monitor and batch command
language interpreters do not interpret or execute a line of comments. Every command line to
the monitor command interpreter should be terminated by pressing the RETURN key on the
console. In examples in this manual, the symbol) is used to indicate that the user should
depress the RETURN key. If the command line is in error. all of the line preceding the error
is typed out by the monitor preceded and followed by a ?, and the terminal remains in
monitor mode.
The user can continue command lines to several system programs (e.g., DIRECT, DUMP.
QUEUE, and L1NK-lO) by placing a hyphen as the last nonblank, noncomment character
before the carriage return-linefeed (i.e., before pressing the RETURN key). Continuation lines
are treated as part of the current command line. which is not considered terminated until a
carriage return-linefeed is seen without a preceding hyphen. This allows command lines to the
above-mentioned programs to be indefinitely long.

1.4.1 Command Names
Commands to the monitor command interpreter are alphabetic strings of one to six characters:
characters after the sixth arc ignored. Only enough characters to uniquely identify the
command need be typed. It is recommended that a Batch job usc the full command name
since the number of characters required may change when new commands are added to the
monitor. Thus, a card deck or control file with abbreviated commands may no longer function
properly.
Installations choosing to implement additional commands arc advised
uniqueness of the first three letters of existing commands.

preserve the

Control commands to the Stacker in the multiprogramming batch system must have a dollar
sign ($) in the first column of the card or the line and an alphabetic character in the second
column. Only the first part of the command name need be specified: as long as the specified
command name is unique, it is accepted. The first three characters of the command name arc
generally sufficient to ensure uniqueness.

1-6

1.4.2 Command Arguments
Arguments follow the command name and are separated from it by a space or TAB. If the
monitor command interpreter recognizes a command name, but a necessary argument is
missing, the monitor responds with
?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS
Extra arguments are ignored.

1.4.2.1 Project-Programmer Numbers and Passwords - Access to the DECsystem-1O is limited
to authorized users. The system administrator provides each authorized user with a project
number, a programmer number. and a password. The project numbers range from I to 377777
octal (numbers I to 10 are reserved for DEC) and the programmer numbers range from I to
777777 octal (numbers I to 7 are reserved for DEC and numbers 400000 to 777777 are
reserved for special purposes)(l). These numbers identify the user and his file storage area on
a file structure. In a command string, the project and programmer numbers are separated with
a comma and must be enclosed in square brackets, e.g., [10.7].
The password is from one to SIX BIT characters and is only used when logging on the
computing system. To maintain password security, the monitor does not echo the password.
On terminals with local copy (refer to DECsystem-IO Monitor Calls), a mask is typed to make
the password unreadable.

1.4.2.2 Device Names - Associated with each system device controlled by the computing
system is a physical device name. This name consists of three letters, zero to three numerals
specifying the unit number, and a colon. Table I-I lists the generic physical device names
associated with the various system devices. Refer to Appendix A for the list of special disk
devices that are predefined in the DECsystem- 10.
The user may also associate a logical device name with a particular physical device. The
logical name is from one to six alphanumeric characters of the user's choice. followed by a
colon, and can be used synonymously with the physical device name in any reference to the
device. Logical device names allow the user. when writing his program, to use arbitrarily
selected device names, which he assigns to the most convenient physical devices at run time.
However, care should be exercised when assigning logical device names because these names
have priority over physical device names. For example, if a DECtape is assigned the logical
name DSK, then all of the user's programs attempting to use the disk via the device name
DSK will use the DECtape instead.
Except for disk devices. only one logical device name can be associated at anyone time with
a physical device. The same logical name can be used for a second physical device by
disassociating it from the first device and associating it with the second device via the
ASSIGN command. Logical device names are disassociated from devices with the DEASSIGN
command (refer to Chapter 2). Subsequent ASSIGN commands (refer to Chapter 2) to
devices except disk devices replace the old logical name with the new one.
When the programmer number is from I to 7. all project numbers are reserved for DEC.

1-7

Table I-I
System Devices

Device

Generic Physical Device Name

CDP:
CDR:
CTY:
DTx:+
DSK:
DPx:+
FHx:+
DIS:
LPT:
MTA:
OPR:
PTP:
PTR:
PLT:
PTY:
SYS:
TTY:

Card Punch
Card Reader
Console TTY
DECtape
Disk
Packs
Fixed-Head
Display
Line Printer
Magnetic Tape
Operator Terminal
Paper-tape Punch
Paper-tape Reader
Plotter
Pseudo-TTY
System Library
Terminal

X represents A.B .... , indicating the first controller, second controller, etc.

The following is an example of the use of physical and logical device names.

.ASSIGN DTA: ABC:

User requests a DEClape drive with the
logical name A Be.

DEVICE DTA6 ASSIGNED

Monitor has given the user drive DT A6.
The user mounts a DECtape on drive
DTA6.

.ASSIGN PTP: ABC:

User requests the paper-tape punch with
the logical name ABe.

% LOGICAL NAME WAS IN USE.
PTP ASSIGNED

Paper-tape punch is reserved, and ABC
now refers to the PTP.

.R PIP

User requests the system program PIP
(Peripheral Interchange program).

*ABC: DTA6:FILEA

User issues a command string to PIP
asking that file FILEA be transferred
from device DT A6 to logical device
ABC (physical device PTP: which is
assigned to the user).
(continued on next page)
1-8

September 1974

*AC

User returns to the monitor mode.

.ASSIGN DTA: DEF:

User requests another DECtape drive
with logical name DEF.

.ASSIGNED TO JOB N I,N2, ...

All drives are in . use by the specified
jobs. No DECtape drive is assigned, and
no logical assignment is made.

.ASSIGN DTA6: DEF:

User requests drive DTA6 (which he
already has) with logical name DEF.
The copy of the directory currently in
.
core is cleared.

DEVICE DTA6 ASSIGNED

User mounts a new DECtape on the
previously assigned drive. The new
DECtape directory is read into core
when next accessed.

.DEASSIGN PTP:

User deassigns PTP, thereby clearing the
logical name ABC.

.R PIP

User requests PIP .

*ABC:

User requests that file FILEB be
transferred from device DEF to device
ABC.

DEF:FILEB

?DEVICE ABC DOES NOT EXIST

The logical device name ABC
longer assigned.

*AC

User returns to monitor mode .

.ASSIGN DTA6: XYZ:

User requests drive DT A6 again with
logical name XYZ. The logical name
DEF is no longer associated with
DT A6. The old directory is cleared from
core.

DEVICE DTA6 ASSIGNED

User mounts a new DECtape. The new
directory is read into core when accessed.

1-9

1.4.2.3 File Structure Names - Disk devices are grouped according to file structures, which
are logical arrangements of 128-word blocks on one or more disk units of the same type.
Examples of types of disk units are: an RP02 disk pack or an RM lOB drum. Although a file
structure can exist on exactly one disk unit, it can be distributed over several disk units of the
same type and designated by a single name. However, two file structures cannot exist on the
same unit. Each file structure has a SIX BIT name specified by the operator at structure
definition time. This name can consist of five or less alphanumeric characters and must not
duplicate a physical device name, a unit name, or an existing file structure name. The
recommended names for public file structures are DSKA, DSKB, ... , DSKN in order of
decreasing speed.

1.4.2.4 File Specifications - All information (programs and data) in the system is stored as
named files. Each named file has associated with it a file specification which consists of
1.

the physical device name or file structure name,

the filename,

the filename extension,

the ordered list of directory names, and

the access protection code.

The first four items of the file specification are necessary to uniquely identify a disk file. File
specifications are ignored when given for devices other than DECtape or disk since these two
devices are the only directory-oriented devices. In addition, items 4 and 5 do not apply to
DECtapes.
The physical device name used for DECtape or the file structure name used for disk may be
any legal device name discussed in the foregoing sections. A colon should always follow the
device name; e.g., DTA3:. The filename is from one to six SIX BIT characters; all characters
after the sixth are ignored. The filename extension is a period followed by zero to three
characters and is used to indicate the type of information in the file. (Refer to Appendix A
for a list of standard filename extensions.) It is recommended that only the standard
extensions be used even though other extensions are valid. Most programs only recognize
filenames and extensions consisting of letters and digits. The ordered list of directory names
identifies the disk area in which the file is stored. This list can be a user file directory (U FD)
represented by the project-programmer number of the owner of the files in the directory or
can be a user file directory followed by one or more sub-file directories (SFDs). (Refer to the
DECsystem-lO Monitor Calls for a description of SFDs.) The directory name must be
enclosed in square brackets. The access protection of the file is a three-digit code designating
which users can read or write the file and must be enclosed in angle brackets. The protection
code is specified only for output files. For a given file, the users are divided into three groups:
the owner of the file, the users with the same project number as the owner, and the rest of
the users. The standard protection code is 057 which allows users in the owner's project to
read and execute the file and prevents access by all other users. (For a complete description
of access protection, refer to DECsystem-lO Monitor Calls.) The standard protection code can
be redefined by the various installations.

1-10

In command strings, the filename, the device name if the file is not on disk, and the directory
name if the file is not in the user's disk area, are required. The filename extension, the device
name if the file is on the disk, the directory name if the file is in the user's disk area, and the
protection code are· optional. The following are examples of file specifications:
filename and extension
device and filename
device, filename, extension, and directory name
complete file specification

TEXT.MAC
DTA3:FILEA
DSK:PROG2.CBL[10,16]
DSKA: MAIN .F4[27,235J

Command Format
COMPILE list
list = a single file specification, or a string of file specifications separated
by commas. A file specification consists of a device name, a filename with
or without an extension, and a directory name (refer to Paragraph
1.4.2.4).
The following switches can be used to modify the command string. These
switches can be temporary or permanent switches (refer to Paragraph
1.5.5). Note that all the switches allowed with the LOAD, EXECUTE,
and DEBUG commands can be used with the COMPILE command.
However, only the switches pertinent to COMPILE are listed below: the
others are ignored.
IALGOL

Compile the file with ALGOL. Assumed for
files with the extension of .ALG.

IBIN

Generate a binary file, for each file compiled.
The filename of the binary file follows the
standard convention for determining the filename of the output file (refer to Paragraphs
1.5.2 and 1.5.3). The extension is .REL. This is
the default action.

IBLIS (I)

Compile the file with BLISS 10. Assume for
files with the extension of .B 10 and .BLI.

ICOBOL

Compile the file with COBOL. Assumed for
files with the extension of .CBL.

ICOMPILE

Force a compilation on this file even if a
binary file exists with a newer date and time
than the source file. This switch is used to
obtain an extra compilation (e.g., in order to
obtain a listing of the compilation) since
normally compilation is not performed if the
binary file is newer than the source file.

BLIS 10 will be recognized as a translator only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However, this assembly
switch setting is not supported.

2-20

ICREF

Produce a cross-reference listing file on the
disk for each file compiled for later processing
by the CREF program. The filename of the
listing file follows the standard convention for
determining the filename of the output file
(refer to Paragraphs \.5.2 and \.5.3). The
extension is .CRF. The file can then be listed
with the CREF command. However, with
COBOL files, the cross-referenced listing is
always appended to the listing file. No
additional command need be given to obtain
the listing.

IFORTRAN

Compile the file with a FORTRAN compiler.
Assumed for files with the extension of .F4
and .FOR and all files with non-recognizable
translator extensions if FORTRAN is the
standard translator. This switch is needed if
the file has a non-recognizable translator
extension and FORTRAN is not the standard
translator or is not the current default (e.g.,
COMPILEI ALGOL FILA, FILB, FILCI
FORTRAN).

IFUDGE

Create a disk file containing the names of the
.REL files produced by the command string.
When the FUDGE command is given, PIP
reads this file in order to generate a library
REL file. (Refer to the FUDGE2 program
description.) Argument to this switch are:
IFUDGE:dev:file.ext [proj.prog]
dev: - the device on which to write the file. If
the device is omitted, DSK: is assumed.
file.ext - the name of the library file. The
filename is required. If the extension is
omitted, it is assumed to .REL.
[proj,prog] - the directory in which to place
the file. The user's directory is assumed if none
is given.
This switch IS permanent in the sense that it
pertains to all .REL files generated by the
command string.

IFlO

Use the FORTRAN-IO translator when compiling the associated FORTRAN file. This
should be used as a permanent switch (i.e.,
placed before any file specifications) if loading
or execution of the command string will be
requested because it is not possible to load F40
and FORTRAN-IO binary files together.
2-21

IF40

Use the F40 translator when compiling the
associated FORTRAN file. This is the current
default action. This should be used as a
permanent switch (i.e., placed before any file
specifications) if loading or execution of the
command string will be requested because it is
not possible to load F40 and FORTRAN-IO
binary files together.

IKAIO

Designate the machine on which the program
will execute once it has been loaded. These
switches are needed for FORTRAN-IO programs since the compiler generates different
codes for the KA 10 and KIlO processors. The
IKA 10 switch is the current default.

IKIIO

ILIST

Generate a disk listing file, for each file
compiled. The filename of the listing file
follows the standard conventions for determining the filename of the output file (refer to
Paragraphs 1.5.2 and 1.5.3). The extension is
.LST. These files can be listed later with the
LIST command. If the line printer is being
spooled for this job, the listing files are written
on device LPT and are automatically spooled
at LOGOUT time. Unless this switch IS
specified, listing files are not generated.

IMACRO

Assemble the file with MACRO. Assumed for
files with extension of .MAC.

IMACXII(l)

Assemble the file with MACX II. Assumed for
files with extension of .P II.

IMANTIS(2)

Compile the program with the MANTIS
debugging information. This switch affects
FORTRAN files only.

INEW

Run the appropriate language translator from
the experiinental system library (device NEW:)
area [1,5]. If the translator does not exist on
device NEW:, try to obtain it from device
SYS:. See the following NOTE.

MAC'X II (the PDP-II assembler for the PDP-IO) will be recognized as a translator only if the appropriate
assembly switch is set. However. this assembly switch setting is not supported.

MANTIS will be recognized as the debugging program only if the appropriate assemhly switch is set. However.
this switch setting is not supported.

2-22

INOBIN

Do not generate binary files. Unless this switch
is given, binary files are generated. This switch,
when combined with the ICREF or lUST
switch, is useful when compiling programs
solely for the purpose of generating listings.

INOCOMPIlE

Complement the ICOMPIlE switch by not
forcing a compilation on a source file whose
date is not as recent as the date on the binary
file. INOCOMPIlE is the defauit action.

INOUST

Do not generate listing files. This is the default
action.

INOMANTIS(l)

Compile the program without the MANTIS
debugging information. The switch affects
FORTRAN files only.

IOlD

Run the appropriate language translator from
the system library of old programs (device
OLD:) which resides on the disk area [1,3]. If
the translator does not exist on device OLD:,
try to obtain it from device SYS:. See the
following NOTE.

ISELF

Run the appropriate language translator from
device DSK: instead of from the system library
(device SYS:). This switch is useful for an
individual who keeps a private copy of a
translator in his own disk area. System
programmers occasionally keep experimental
versions of standard translators in their disk
areas in order to test new features. See the
following NOTE.

ISNOBOL(2)

Compile the file with SNOBOL. Assumed for
files with an extension of .SNO.

ISYS

Run the appropriate language translator from
the system library (device SYS:) area of [1,4].
This is the default action. See the following
NOTE.

MANTIS will be recognized as the debugging program only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However.
this switch setting is not supported.

SNOBOL will be recognized as a translator only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However, this
assembly switch setting is not supported.

2-23

NOTE
Once a language translator has been specified from a
particular area (e.g., INEW), it cannot be changed
within the same command string; i.e., the following is
illegal:
. COM PI L TESPRG.F4/NEW,SUBRTN.F4/SYS
However, the following is valid:
.COMPIL TESPRG.F4/NEW
.COMPIL SUBRTN.F4/SYS

Characteristics
The COMPILE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the appropriate language translators, thereby destroying the user's
original core image.

Restrictions
The wildcard construction cannot be used.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
~COMPILE

PROG,TEST.MAC,MANAGE/COBOL)

Compiles PROG (with null extension) with FORTRAN, TEST.MAC with
MACRO, and MANAGE (with null extension) with COBOL only if REL
files do not exist with later dates. A listing file is generated only for
MANAGE. The files generated are PROG.REL, TEST.REL, MANAGE.REL, and MANAGE.LST.

2-24

~COMPILE

ILIST SICN,MAC,TABLES/NOLIST,MULTI.ALC)

Compiles SIGN.MAC with MACRO, TABLES (with null extension) with
FORTRAN, and MULTI.ALG with ALGOL. Listing files are generated for
SIGN.MAC and MULTI.ALG.
~COMPILE/CRErICOMPILE

DIVIDE,SUBTRC,ADD)

Forces a compilation of the source files although current .REL files exist
and generates cross-referenced listing files. The files created are DIVIDE.CRF, DIVIDE.REL, SUBTRC.CRF, SUBTRC.REL, ADD.CRF, and
ADD.REL.
~CDMPILE IrUDGE,MONITR,RlL.LIBALL)

Compiles the files contained in the command file LIBALL and enters the
names of all the REL files generated in a temporary disk file. When the
FUDGE command is given, PIP generates the library REL file with name
MONITOR.REL. The library is created with the REL files in the same
order as they were specified in the command file.
~COMPILE OUTPUT8MTAO,(W,S,M)/L)

Rewinds the magnetic tape (W), compiles the first file with FORTRAN,
produces binary output for the KA IO(S), and includes the MACRO coding
in the output listing (M). These switches are processor switches (refer to
Paragraph 1.5.7). A listing file is generated with the name OUTPUT.LST,
along with the file OUTPUT.REL.

2-25

CONTINUE Command

Function
The CONTINUE command continues the program from the point at which it was
interrupted. The program is started at the saved program counter address stored
in .lBPC by a HALT command CC) or a HALT instruction. Refer to
DECsystem-1O Monitor Calls for a description of the job data area.
-C followed by CONTINUE has an unexpected action if the program running
attempts to rescan (TTCALL 10) the current typed-in line after the CONTINUE.
This action returns the CONTINUE instead of the original command. To
minimize the probability of this occurring, user programs which rescan the input
line should do so at the beginning of the program. to minimize the number of
times the user could type a -co

Command Format
CONTINUE

Characteristics
The CONTINUE command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Requires core.
Does not require LOGIN.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Example
• JlUN LOOP)

Run a program called LOOP in your disk
area .

.. c
·C

Stop the program.
Check the time of day.

I.DAYTIME)
23.'E8.7~

!.CONT)

16133110
Continue the program.

2-26

COpy Command (1)

Function
The COpy command transfers files from one standard 110 device to another.
The command string can contain one device output specification and any number
of input specifications. The equal sign separates the destination (output) side from
the source (input) side. This command runs PIP and performs the basic PIP
function of transferring files.

Command Format
COPY dev: Atape id Afile.ext[directoryJ

Command Format
DEBUG list
list
a single file specification, or a string of file specifications
separated by commas. A file specification consists of a device name. a
filename with or without an extension, and a directory name (refer to
Paragra ph 1.4.2.4).
I

This command runs the COMPIL program. which interprets the command before running the appropriate
language translator. the LOADER. and the appropriate debugger.
2

2-55

The following switches can be used to modify the command string. These
switches can be temporary or permanent unless stated otherwise (refer to
Paragraph 1.5.5).
IALGOL

Compile the file with ALGOL. Assumed for files with the
extension of .ALG.

IBIN

Generate a binary file for each file compiled. The filename
of the binary file follows the standard conventions for
determining the filename of the output file (refer to
Paragraphs 1.5.2 and 1.5.3). The extension is .REL. This is
the default action.

IBUSS(I)

Compile the file' with BUS 10. Assumed for files with the
extension of .B 10 and .BU.

ICOBOL

Compile the file with COBOL. Assumed for files with the
extension of .CBL.

ICOMPILE

Force a compilation on this file even if a binary file exists
with a newer date and time than the source file. This switch
is used to obtain an extra compilation (e.g., in order to
obtain a listing of the compilation) since normally compilation is not performed if the binary file is newer than the
source file.

ICREF

Produce a cross-reference listing file on the disk for each file
compiled for later processing by the CREF program. The
filename for the listing file follows the standard convention
for determining the name of the output file (refer to
Paragraphs 1.5.2 and 1.5.3). The extension is .CRF. The file
can then be listed with the CREF command. However, with
COBOL files, the cross-reference listing is always appended
to the listing file. No additional command need be given to
obtain the listing.

lOOT

Load DDT regardless of the extension of the first file in the
command string. This is a permanent switch and applies to
all subsequent files.

IFOROTS

Load the file with FOROTS (the new FORTRAN objecttime system).

IFORSE

Load the file with FORSE (the old FORTRAN object-time
system).

IFORTRAN

Compile the file with a FORTRAN compiler. Assumed for
files with the extension of .F4 and .FOR and all files with
nonrecognizable translator extensions if FORTRAN is the

BLIS 10 will he recognized as translator only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However. this assemhly
switch setting is not supported.

2-56

standard translator. This switch is needed if the file has a
non-recognizable translator extension and FORTRAN is not
the standard translator or is not the current default (e.g.,
DEBUG/COBOL TEST!, TEST2, TEST31 FORTRAN).
IFUDGE

Create a disk file containing the names of the .REL files
produced by the command string. When the FUDGE
command is given, PIP reads this file in order to generate a
library REL file (refer to the FUDGE2 program description). Arguments to this switch are:
IFUDGE:dev:file.ext [proj, prog]
dev: - the device on which to write the file. If the device is
omitted, DSK: is assumed.
file.ext - the name of the library file. The filename is
required. If the extension is omitted, it is assumed to be
.REL.
[proj, prog] - the directory in which to place the file. The
user's directory is assumed if none is given.
This switch is permanent in the sense that it pertains to all
REL files generated by the command string.

IFIO

Use the FORTRAN-IO compiler when compiling the
associated FORTRAN file. This should be used as a
permanent switch because it is not possible to load F40 and
FORTRAN-IO binary files together.

IF40

Use the F40 compiler when compiling the associated
FORTRAN file. This is the current default action. This
should be used as permanent switch because it is not
possible to load F40 and FORTRAN- 10 binary file~
together.

IKAIO
IKIIO

Designate the machine on which the
program will execute once it has been loaded. These
switches are needed for FORTRAN-IO programs since the
compiler generates different code for the KAIO and KIlO
processors. The IKAIO switch is the current default.

ILIBRARY

Load the files in library search mode. T nis mode causes a
program file in a special library file to be loaded only if one
or more of its declared entry symbols satisfies an undefined
global request in the source file. The system libraries are
always searched. Refer to the LOADER and L1NK-IO
documentation.

ILINK

Cause the file to be loaded by the LIN K- 10 linking loader.
If used, this switch should be placed before any file
specifications since the COMPIL program may have to
generate load-control switches.

2-57

ILIST

Generate a disk listing file, for each file compiled. The
filename for the listing file follows the standard conventions
for determining the name of the output file (refer to
Paragraphs 1.5.2 and 1.5.3). The extension is .LST. These
files can be listed later with the LIST command. If the line
printer is being spooled for this job, the listing files are
written on device LPT and are automatically spooled at
LOGOUT time. Unless this switch is specified, listing files
are not generated.

ILMAP

Produce a loader map during the loading process (same
action as IMAP) containing the local symbols.

ILOADER

Cause the file to be loaded by the LOADER program. This
is the current default action.

IMACRO

Assemble the file with MACRO. Assumed for files with
extensions of .MAC.

IMACXII(l)

Assemble the file with MACX II. Assumed for files with the
extension .PIL

IMANTIS(2)

Compile the file with the MANTIS debugging information.
This switch affects FORTRAN programs only.

IMAP

Produce a loader map during the loading process. When this
switch is encountered. a loader map is requested from the
loader. After the library search of the system libraries. the
map is written in the user's disk area with either the
filename specified by the user (e.g., IMAP:filc) or the
default filename MAP. MAP if loading is performed by
LOADER or nnnLNK.MAP if performed by LINK-IO. This
switch is an exception to the permanent switch rule in that it
causes only one map to be produced even though it may
appear as a permanent switch.

INEW

Run the appropriate language translator from the experImental system library (device NEW:) area [1,5]. If the
translator does not exist on device NEW:. try to obtain it
from device SYS:. See the following NOTE.

INOBIN

Do not generate binary files. Unless this switch is given,
binary files are generated. This switch, when combined with
the lUST or ICREF switch. is useful when compiling
programs solely for the purpose of generating listings.

MAC'XII (the PDP-II assembler for the PDP-IO) will be recognized as a language translator only if the
appropriate assembly switch is set. However. this assembly switch setting is not supported.

2
MANTIS will be recognized as a debugging program only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However.
this switch setting is not supported. If the switch is set and the first file in the command string is a FORTRAl'i
source file. MANTIS (the FORTRAN debugging program) is loaded instead of DDT.

2-58

INOCOMPILE

Complement the ICOMPILE switch by not forcing a
compilation on a source file whose date is not as recent as
the date on the binary file. Note that this switch is not the
same as the IREL switch, which turns off all compilation,
even if the source file is newer than the REL file.·
INOCOMPILE is the default action.

INOLIST

Do not generate listing files. This is the default action.

INOMANTIS(l)

Compile the file without the MANTIS debugging information. This switch affects FORTRAN programs only.

INOSEARCH

Loads all routines of the file whether the routines are
referenced or not. Since this is the default action, this switch
is used only to turn off library search mode (I LIBRAR Y).
This switch is not equivalent to the IP switch of the
LOADER, which does not search any libraries. The
INOSEARCH default is to search the system libraries.

IOLD

Run the appropriate language translator from the sy~tem
library of old programs (device OLD:) which resides on the
disk area [1.3]. If the translator does not exist on device
OLD:, try to obtain it from device SYS:. See the following
NOTE.

IREL

Use the existing REL files although newer source files may
be present.

ISEARCH

The action is identical to that of the ILIBRARY switch.

ISELF

Run the appropriate language translator from device DSK:
instead of from the system library (device SYS:). This switch
is useful for an individual who keeps a private copy of a
translator in his own disk area. System programmers
occasionally keep experimental versions of standard translators in their disk areas in order to test new features. See the
following NOTE.

ISNOBOL(2)

Compile the file with SNOBOL. Assumed for files with
extensions of .SNO.

ISYS

Run the appropriate processor from the system library
(device SYS:) area of [1.4]. This is the default action.

MANTIS will he recognized as a dehugging program only if the appropriate assemhly switch is set. However.
this switch setting is not supported. If the switch is set and the first file in the command string is a FORTRAN
souree file, MANTIS (the FORTRAN dehugging program) is loaded instead of DDT.
SNOBOL will be recognized as a language translator only if the appropriate assemhly switch is set. However.
this assemhly switch setting is not supported.

2-59

NOTE
Once a processor has been specified from a particular
area (e.g., ISELF), it cannot be called from a
different area within the same command string; i.e.,
the following is illegal:
.DEBUG MAIN.MAC/SELF,PARTI.MACIOLD
However. the following is valid:
.COMPIL MAIN.MAC/SELF
.COMPIL PARTI.MACIOLD
.DEBUG IREL MAIN,PART!

Characteristics
The DEBUG command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the appropriate processor, the LOADER, and th'e debugger, thereby
destroying the user's original core image.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
~DEBUG/L

FILEA,FILEB,FILEC/N,FILEO)
Generate listings for FILEA. FILEB,
and FILED

..tDEAUG TEST)
MACRO I TEST
LOADING

LOADEP 2K CORE
DDT EXECUTION
.1

BLT 15,0(16)

2-60

DELETE Command (1)

Function
The DELETE command deletes one or more files from disk or DECtape. Note
that the protection codes normally assigned to files prevent one user from deleting
files in another user's directory.

Command Format
DELETE list
list
a single file specification or a string of file specifications
separated by commas. The full wildcard construction (* and ?) can be
used. Refer to Paragraph IA.2A.
If a device or file structure name is specified. it remains in effect until
changed or until the end of command string is reached. When a directory
name is before the filename. it becomes the default for all succeeding
files. A directory name after a filename applies only to that file.

Characteristics
The DELETE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program. thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

This command runs the COMPIL program. which interprets the command before running I'll'.

2-61

Examples

,DEL *.MAC)
fILES DEL!:T!D'
Tl.MAC
T2,MAC
Tl, MAC
14 BLOCKS FREED
• DEL T!:STi. MAC)
fILES OEL!:TED.
TEST1.MAC
3 BLOCKS FREED
!

.DEL TESTU.F4)
rILES DELETED.
T[5T.r4
TEST5.F4
TEST03."4
TEST2.r4
23 BLOCKS FREED

2-62

DETACH Command

Function
The DETACH command disconnects the terminal from the user's job without
affecting the status of the job. The user terminal is now free to control another
job, either by initiating a new job or attaching to a currently running detached
job.

Command Format
DETACH

Characteristics
The DETACH command:
Detaches the terminal.
Depends on FTATTACH which is normally absent
1040.

Restrictions
This command is not available to Batch users.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Example
.DETACH)
FROM JOB 1
.!

2-63

the DECsystem-

DIRECT Command

Function
The DIRECT command lists the directory entries specified by the argument list.
The standard output consists of the following columns: filename. filename
extension. length in blocks written, protection, creation date, version number.
structure name. and directory name. Refer to the DIRECT specification in the
DECsystem-IO Software Notebooks for additional information on the DIRECT
program.

Command Format
DIRECT output specification

list of input specifications

list
A single file specification. or a string of file specifications separated by
commas or plus signs. The devices used on input can be DSK:. DTA:. MTA:.
and TMP: (TMPCOR). If the device is a magnetic tape, the tape is rewound
before and after the listing operation and analyzed to determine if it is a
FAILSAFE tape. The default input specification is DSK:*.*. and the user's
directories in all file structures defined by the job's search list are listed.
Generally. a device name. an extension. or a directory name that precedes the
filename becomes the default for all succeeding files in the list.
The full wildcard construction (* and/or ?) can be used on input specifications.
However. when a wildcard designation is used. the DIRECT program limits its
search for the tile to certain directories. When the user gives a wildcard
designation for a filename or extension. the program only searches the specified
directory or the user's default directory. No additional directories. such as LIB or
SYS. which may be in the user's default path are searched. (Refer to the SETSRC
program description in this manual and to the PATH. UUO description in
DECsystem-IO Monitor Calls. If the user has a wildcard designation for a
directory. only the directories implied by the wildcard construction are searched.
Again. no additional directories are searched. When the user gives a file
specification without any wildcard designations, the DIRECT program uses the
normal procedures for locating the tile. That is. the user's path. LIB, NEW. and
SYS as enabled by the user via the SETSRC program or the PATH. UUO are
searched.
output specification
This argument (and the equal sign) is optional. If the
entire output specification is omitted. the default is TTY:. If an output filename is
given. the default device is DSK:. If an output filename is not given. and one is
needed. the filename is generated from the time of day as hhmmss. The default
output extension is .DIR. The wildcard construction cannot be used in the output
specification.
The following switches may be used in the command string. In general. noncomplementary switches can be used together in the same command string.
Switches that precede the tilename become the default for all succeeding tiles.

2-64

Switch names can be truncated as long as the resulting abbreviation is unique.
Spaces are not permitted with a switch (i.e., between the slash at the beginning of
the switch and the argument at the end).
IACCESS:n

Update the access date to the current date for any
file of n blocks or less accessed (i.e., listed) by the
DIRECT program. Since some installations delete
files that have not been recently accessed, this switch
allows the user to prevent such deletion by updating
the date. n is interpreted as a decimal number and
refers to the number of blocks actually written in the
file unless the I ALLOC switch is also used. If IACCESS is omitted, the date is not changed. If I ACCESS is specified but :n is omitted, n = 5 is assumed.

IALLOC

List the allocated length of the file instead of the
written length. Space on a structure is sometimes
allocated in units of more than one block for
efficiency. Therefore,. the number of blocks allocated to a file may be greater than the number of blocks
actually written. The allocated length is used by
LOGOUT in checking quotas. The total allocated
length of all files is the same as the length output by
the QUOLST program under the USED column.
Complement of IWRITTEN. (Disk and magnetic
tape only.)

IBEFORE:date:time

List only those files created before the specified date
and time. Def~lUlt is + infinity. Refer to Paragraph
1.4.2.5.

IBLOCKS

Output the length of the file in blocks instead of
words. Complement of IWORDS. This is the default.

ICHECKSUM

Compute and print an 18-bit checksum for each file.
This checksum is computed by rotating the result left
one bit before adding each word. Complement of
INOCHECKSUM. (Disk and magnetic tape only.)

IDENSITY:n

Use the specified density when reading a magnetic
tape. N is 200.556, or 800 bpi. The default is
installation dependent and is modified by the SET
DENSITY command.

IDETAIL

Print all available information about a file except for
zero values (refer to the extended LOOKUP block in
DECsystem-1O Monitor Calls for a list of the values
which are printed). The protection and data mode are
also listed, even if they are zero. The author is not
listed if it is the same as the owner of the directory.
Numbers followed by a period are decimal numbers.
All other numbers are octal. (Disk and magnetic tape
only.)

2-65

IEOTS

Stop at the logical end of tape (two consecutive tape
marks) when reading a magnetic tape. Complement
of INOEOTS. This is the default.

IFAST

List short form of directory (i.e., filename, extension,
structure name, and directory name). Equivalent to
IF. Complement of INORMAL and ISLOW.

IFILES:n

Stop after n tape marks (files) when reading a
magnetic tape. If IFILES is specified but :n is
omitted, n = I is assumed. Note that the logical
EOT will also stop unless INOEOTS is specified.

IHELP

Help text which indicates some of the switches
available and how to use them. Equivalent to IH.

IHELP:S

List all switches (S) without their explanations. An
asterisk prefixes those switches which have a singleletter abbreviation.

lUST

List the output on device LPT:. Equivalent to IL.

IMARKS

Indicate each tape mark, including the final tape
mark, and UFO when reading a magnetic tape.
Complement of INOMARKS.

INOCHECKSUM

Do not compute and print the checksum. Complement of ICHECKSUM. This is the default.

INOOETAIL

Do not list the words in the LOOKUP block.
Complement of 10ETAIL. This is the default.

INOEOTS

Do not stop at the logical end of tape when reading a
magnetic tape. Complement of IEOTS.

INOMARKS

Do not indicate each tape mark and UFO when
reading a magnetic tape. Complement of IMARKS.
This is the default.

INORMAL

Output the normal directory listing. This listing
includes the filename, extension, length in blocks
written, protection, creation date, structure name,
non-zero version numbers, and directory name.
Complement of IFAST and ISLOW. This is the
default. The switch is used to override a IF AST or
ISLOW in the user's option file.

INOREWINOS

Do not rewind the tape before and after reading a
magnetic tape. Complement of IREWINOS.

INOSORT

Do not produce a file suitable for sorting. Complement of ISORT. This is the default.

2-66

INOSUMMARY

Do not use summary mode (i.e., output more than
just the summary line). Complement of ISUMMARY. This is the default.

INOTITLE

Do not output page headers. Complement of ITITLES. This is the default for output to the terminal.

INOUNITS

Do not list the name of the actual disk unit; instead,
just list the structure name. Complement of IUNITS.
This is the default.

10KNONE

Suppress the error message if no files match the
wildcard construction.

10PTION:name

Read the user s option
file
(DSK:SWITCH.INI[,]lPHYSICAL) to determine the
user's specified switch defaults for DIRECT. The
name appearing as the value of the switch is the
pointer to the line to read in the file. For example, if
the file contains the line
DIRECT:ALLIDETAIL
then the user references this line by typing the
command
DIRECT 10PTION:ALL
Refer to Paragraph IA.3 for additional information.

IPARITY:ODD
IPARITY:EVEN

Specify the parity to be used when
reading a magnetic tape. The default is ODD.

IPHYSICAL

Ignore logical names used for device names (refer to
the ASSIGN command for a description of logical
names).

IPROTECTION:nnn

Give the output file the protection nnn (octal).

IREWINDS

Rewind the magnetic tape before and after reading it.
Complement of INOREWINDS. This is the default.

IRUN:file spec

Run the specified program when this command is
finished.

IRUNOFFSET:n

Run the program specified with IRUN with an offset
of n. If the switch is omitted. the default is 0; if the
switch is given without a value. the default is I.

ISINCE:date:time

List only those files created after the specified date
and time. The default is January I, 1964. Refer to
Paragraph IA.2.S.

2-67

ISLOW

Output a full listing that includes the filename,
extension, length in blocks written, protection, creation date and time, access date, structure name, and
directory name. Equivalent to IS. Complement of
IFAST and /NORMAL. (Disk and magnetic tape
only.)

ISORT

List the file structure name, if there is more than one
or if the files are on magnetic tape, and directory
name, if a wildcard directory is given, on each line
instead of only on the first line in which they change.
Multiple spaces are output instead of TABs. Projectprogrammer numbers include leading zeroes; the date
is in ANSI format (e.g., 19721009 for Oct.9,1972).
This switch is used to prepare a file to be sorted by
the SORT program (refer to the DECsystem-IO
COBOL Programmer's Reference Manual). Complement of INOSORT.

ISUMMARY

Output only the summary line which indicates the
total number of blocks and files. Note a IFAST
ISUMMARY lists a IFAST listing followed by the
summary.

ITITLES

Cause a heading to be output on each page consisting
of a label for each column, date, time, and page
number. Standard output to the line printer has this
heading. Complement of INOTITLE.

IUNITS

List the name of the actual disk unit on which the
files are stored instead of the file structure name.
Complement of INOUNITS.

IWIDTH:n

Output several entries on a single line to make the
output n columns wide. For example, if IFAST is
specified for output to a terminal, four filenames
appear per line. The default for n is 64 columns.

IWORDS

Output the length of the file in words instead of
blocks. Complement of IBLOCKS.

IWRITTEN

Return the written length of the file rather than the
allocated length. Complement of I ALLOC. This is
the default.

Characteristics
The DIRECT command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the DIRECT program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

2-68

Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.
In this case, run the DIRECT program with the R command and input
the appropriate command strings following the asterisk response from
DIRECT.

Examples

.!.DIR OTA3.)

Lists all files on DT A3.
Lists all files with extension .MAC in all file
structures in the user's job search list.
Lists the directory entry for file TEST.F4
user area 27, 60.

The ordinary default directory .
• '1T')C"r:T
rr:p ,,,II"

<:,

"' "
rr:D"A"

,'"
,"

~'jfC::'V\l
n~-,

."-. ~.J

(

['1 .• t: ,; ?>

I.CI
,.
~L .

f"I

':"~..,

".~
'~0

":~"PLtl

'T"-'!TAL M'

0'1

<1"1';5>
d"'S5 >
<~c;c; >
<0'55 >

<"c,c, >
<"155 >

7-'V;Y-7t
7- "'r,v -74
.~"I- "'lAY -7 L!
) " - "(W -7 1.1
'l, I
"'A v -7 4
~I- "AY -7 t
) I - "'AV -H
~-J Ur.'-74

[?7,/j(,7'?J

<:'~5 >

Lrcvc I

')C'YC:

FIL 1;"("

r'l

"C'

y r: : [:::7,/:"'7 0 J

The same directory reporting blocks allocated instead of written .
• f'1T::C::CTlf'..U.GC
I (~
S
!5

r(l~) ~I'!.t~,~

FOD "'A"
T() >"C ," I

PLf'. "
PL!" '·1.)
F"1. ~

r:F"I1

':.'l,

D1
f\ '10
•
1_ 1"",
-, {

rr7°?LiI

<;:'55>
<~55>

0("

<"55>

!"
(")5
! '5

<~55 >

I 7 - ·'t· Y -7 4
! 7-¥,Ay-74
:',f'- "'f'; Y -7 -4
30- "t', Y -74
3 1-'~t,Y-7-4
~ ! - "A v -7 .1
~ 1- "~.v -7.'j
.)-J!l'J-74

<"c.,;;:.
././ >

<:'55 >
<~5: >
<

55>

p' r FILr.:c:::
The full detail directory for the same files.
TY;-r,1. r:F II" P1J1C V ('

FO P

r,O::"~1\

'TI

n~.'

t r, r,

'1~!.(C:

r: ~:

[ ? 7, 4"7?

)

[?7,4:-'7? J

,~ r, 3 • [ :- 7 ,4 7':'. 1
"r,:- r : I 7 - "'A Y - 7

TV r:

r. r: r, cC' C'

O~:

r:~

(7-

,p'r::,

pr; r: Te CTI

'~C':

'11\ TE:
'i~':

:31: 17- "'Av -74

"1'0~~:

nIT T~ \~: c, 1 r •
,6 L1. rc ATe!l:
I~ •
"1,":;1'. PLf'.r,v u: 'l1:?':rT0"Y: C:C;-!J7~.
I'" ":;n;>f' t. L r: P r.~, -:1 '").' 'Jr, F • -: I "!C: I 7 -..,,~ v -7 L!

\',: '! r' T')~

':'!_ ir v c

Q!!i

'."

!,",~_('Ir:Y

~~'l~;D,'7f?:

Q :

3 I!: I 7

~lQ~5.

Seplemher 1974

2-69

•

~\(C0: F'O~MA?[?7,4(l172]

.t>CCF:~~

!"JAIE: 17-MAY-74
F:.II II 0 'J II ~::, DA IE: I 4 : I Q

f,CCt::~c

PROIt::CIIO~·):

17 -

~A Y -74

055

~Of):::
I
'...lOP T)!=" ~JR I TIt:: '.J: 331) •
PU1CKS ALLOCATEI'): 5.
nATA !1LOCY n: !'1I P t:CTnRY: ~q47?1.
J N TE ~ ~.' AL CRF: AII (H,I ,)A T::, TI v r::: I 7 - "1.A v -74 I LJ: I Q
RIP o.l(1CY ,,!u""qrp: 401M.

T!")FCMI.[?7,4(l172]
Dr. TF.: .W- "lAY -74
CP~ATI()'! TINlE,
!')/lIE: 12:911)
M~C Fe; c: PP () IC:C II 'H·;: ~5 5

I 7

~VCf.ll:

flCC

~C"

""(F)".:

3'}_~·1AY-74

'1:8~T)~ \·!PITE~!: 14"5.
~LOCYC" ALLOCAFf'1: 15.

'iATA ~LI')CI( n: f'\I~t::CT~RY: i!; rz 47'i1.
H!TEPNfl.L CRF:ATII')'·! I)AIE,TI~c.:: 3?1- M f;Y-74 12:r6:42
PIP BLOr:;ll 'HJM~C:R: 5<:ir,I?I.

,!.DIRECT [40, ])

Lists the directory entries for user with project
number 40 and the user's programmer number.

Example of an incorrect specification in the IBEFORE switch.

,!.DIR

SY5NI*.SAV/5INCEI15-0CT-1972/BEFOREINOVEMBER~

MISSING DAY IN DATE/TIME

Example of using both IBEFORE and ISINCE to specify a range of dates.

,!.DIR SYSN.-.SAV/SINCEI15-0CT-1972/BErOREI1_NOV)
CRASH
P1402!
RU24H
FRI525
RI525C
FRI526
RI526C

SAY
SAY
SAY
SAY
SAY
SAY
SAY

PROTECTION FAILURE
<155>
438
1,-OCT-72
529
<155>
1,-OCT-72
<155>
209
18-0CT-72
<155>
528
20-0CT-72

212
25-0CT-72
<155>
535
30-0CT-72

2-70

DSJ(NI
(50402
(50524)
(34('0)
(50525)
14(70)
(50526)

t 1 ,4]

RI526D
RI527A

SAY
SAY...

5]5
5U

<155>
<155>

(5026)
(50527)

10-OCT-72
1-NOV-72

TOTAL or 3519 BeOCKS IN 8 rILES AND 1 LOOKUP ERROR ON
DSKNI [1,4]
Example of user [10,251] with LIB of [7,5062]
~DIR

*.MACC"*,*,,*.TXTC,,*,*,,LIBI*.MCO)

DUMP
rILUUO
G
R
·T
REMDLX
MICRO

MAC
MAC
MAC
MAC
MAC
MAC
MAC

200
109
16
16

1
62
26

<055>
<055>
<055>
<055>
<055>
<055>
<055>

U-AUG-72
20-0CT-72
20-0CT-72
20-0C1-72
20-0CT-72
20-0CT-72
30-0CT-72

·DSKB I

TOTAL or 630 BLOCKS IN ., rILES ON DSKBI
nLUUO
MONnR
506

MAC
TXT
Meo

309
1
97

<055>
C055>
<100>

20-0CT-72
2-NOY-72
1-NOV-72

GRAND TOTAL or 1037 BLOCKS IN 10 rILlS

2-71

[10,251]

C10,251'

C10,251,A]
C10,251,A,8]
BLKAI
C",5062]

DISMOUNT Command

Function
The DISMOUNT command allows a user to return devices to the monitor pool
of available resources and to remove a file structure from his search list.
Restricted devices are returned to the restricted pool and unrestricted devices to
the unrestricted pool. The command applied to non-file structures is identical to
the DEASSIGN command if the user waits for completion of the operator action.
If the user does not wait for completion (e.g., he types a control-C after the
message OPERATOR NOTIFIED), the device is not deassigned, but the request
to the operator is still queued for the purpose of removing the media. The user
must then issue the DEASSIGN command to release the device. This command
applied to file structures enforces logged-out quotas (if necessary), allows physical
removal of disk packs (if there are no other users of the pack). and removes the
file str':lcture name from the job's search list.
The UMOUNT program runs privileged in the user's core area when the
DISMOUNT command is typed. This program scans the user's command string,
checks its validity, and performs as much of the requested action as possible. The
UMOUNT program can complete all actions requested by the DISMOUNT command except for the action of physically removing packs, tapes, or cards. When
operator action is required, the UMOUNT program writes a command file on [3,3]
disk area and notifies the OMOUNT program (running on the operator's terminal)
to perform the action. When the operator action has been completed, OMOUNT
deletes the command file and notifies UMOUNT (if UMOUNT is waiting) to inform the user of completion.
To insure validity of any tape error analysis.MOUNT IDISMOUNT should be
used to acquire and release magtape units. This mechanism provides the basis for
all media-related error reporting.

Command Format
DISMOUNT dev:switches
dev:
any previously ASSIGNed or MOUNTed device or file
structure name. This argument is required.
switches
the following switches are optional and only enough
characters to make the switch unique are required.
ICHECK

Check and list pending requests.

IHELP

Type this list.

IPAUSE

Notify the user before requesting operator
action. The user can then abort the command
if desired.

2-72

September 1974

IREMOVE

Notify operator to physically remove disk
packs, tape, or cards. A file structure is
removed from the system only if no other
users are using it. A request to remove the
pack is queued to the operator and the
message WAITING .. .is typed to the user. If
the user does not want to wait for confirmation of the operator action, he may type
control-Co This switch must be specified to
notify the operator to remove the pack, even if
no other jobs are using it.

Characteristics
The DISMOUNT command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the UMOUNT program. thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX and FTMOUN which are normally absent in the
DECsystem- 1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

~nISMOUNT DSKAI)

DSKA DISMOllNTED
~DISMOUNT DTA41/R)

OPERATOP NOTIFIED
WAITING •••

The
user
dismounts
the
file
structure DSKA. This does not require an
operator action.
The user asks the operator to
deassign DTA4 and remove the tape.
The command is waiting for completion of the
operator action.
The user does not wish to wait for confirmation
of removal.

.DISMOUNT/CHECK)
NONE PENDING
O.COMMAND~ IN QUEUE

The user checks for completion and
determines that his request is
finished.

2-73

DSK Command

Function
The DSK command types disk usage for the combined structures of the job, since
the last DSK command, followed by the total disk usage since the job was
initialized (Jogged in). Disk usage is typed in the following format:
RD,WT
RD,WT

I,J
M,N

where I and J are the incremental number of 128-word blocks read and written
since the last DSK command, and M and N are the total number of 128-word
blocks read and written since the job was initialized.
NOTE
and J are kept modulo 4096. If automatic READ or
WRITE print outs have been enabled using the SET
WATCH command, I and J are usually zero, since
the SET WATCH output also resets these values.

Command Format
DSK job
job
the job number of the job for which the disk usage is desired. This
argument is optional.
If job is omitted, the job to which the terminal is attached is assumed.
If job is supplied (whether the job of this user or another user) the
incremental quantities are not reset to zero.

Characteristics
The DSK command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

2-74

Example
.DSJ( )

RD, Wh 12,0
RD,WT-475,2U
.!.

2-75

DTCOPY Program

Function
The DTCOPY program is a DECtape copy routine that allows the user to
l.

Copy the entire contents of an input DECtape to an output DECtape.

Zero all blocks on an output DECtape and clear the directory.

Perform a word-by-word comparison of two DECtapes.

Load a bootstrap loader and write it in blocks 0, I, and 2 of the output
DECtape.

Command Format
.R DTCOPY
*output DTA:

input DTA:/switches

Iswitches
one or more of the following switches. Switches are preceded
by a slash or enclosed in parentheses and can appear anywhere in the
command string.
IC

Copy all blocks from the input DECtape to the output DECtape.

Do not restart the program after a parity error. Output an error
message and continue the program.

Type the available switches and their meanings.

Load the bootstrap loader into a core buffer. COPY expects the
loader to be on logical device PTR in the file named
BSLDR.REL. Note that COpy must be SAVed if the loader is to
be preserved with the COPY core image.

Suppress the directory listing.

Write the bootstrap loader in blocks 0, I, and 2 of the output
DECtape. This switch accepts, as input from the terminal, a core
bank or offset. The loader is offset and then written on the tape.
core bank = nnnK (16K to 256K)
offset = 1000 to 777600 octal

Verify the similarities of the two DECtapes by performing a
word-by-word comparison and typing on the terminal the number
of discrepancies discovered.

2-76

Zero all blocks of the output DECtape and clear the directory.

Look for the directory in PDP-6 format (i.e., in block one instead
of block 144).

If no switches are specified, IC (copy) and IV (verify) are assumed by
default. Note that upon completion, the directory in core may not agree with
the directory of the output DECtape. The output DECtape should be
reassigned to guarantee that the directory in core is up-to-date.

Characteristics
The R DTCOPY command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the COpy program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
.!R DTCOPY)
~DTA71

•

Run DTCOPY
OTA31)

*DTA21/Z • )

Copy the contents of DT A3 to DT A7 and determine
if the two DECtapes are the same (default condition).
If the DECtapes disagree, the number of discrepancies is typed on the terminal.
Zero all blocks and clear the directory on DT A2.
Return to monitor mode.

~ASSIGN OSKIPTRI)

The bootstrap loader must be on logical device PTR .

.!RErAM! BSLDR.REL • DTBOOT.REL)
COpy expects the bootstrap loader to be named
BSLDR.
!oR OTCOPY)

Run DTCOPY

!.IL)

Load the bootstrap loader into a core buffer.

2-77

Return to monitor mode .
.!.SAVE DSJ( ICOPY)

Save DTCOPY so that the bootstrap loader is
preserved with the DTCOPY core image.

!,START)

Start the COPY program.

.!.DTA511T • )

Write the bootstrap loader
DTA5.

TYPE COR! BANK AND

orr SET

blocks 0, I, and 2 of

'01L]1~OOT

Respond with size of core bank or offset.
64K)

Size of core bank (64K core bank
top of core -1000)
Return to monitor mode.

2-78

177000 offset,

DUMP Command

Function
The DUMP command calls the DAEMON program to write a core image tile
(function of the DCORE command) and then invokes the DUMP program to
analyze the file written and to provide printable output. The core image file is
named nnnDAE.TMP where nnn is the user's job number. This file is described
in detail in the DCORE command description.

Command Formats
I.
2.
3.

DUMP Icommand/command/command ...
DUMP @ dev:file.ext [directory)
DUMP

The commands that appear in the DUMP command string are passed to the
DUMP program and therefore are described in the DL'MP program description.
A DUMP command using a command file can also specify these commands. A
DUMP command without any arguments prints a short dump of the user's core
area via the command file QUIKDM.CCL which resides on device SYS:.

Characteristics
The DUMP command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the DAEMON and DUMP programs, thereby destroying the user's
core Image.
Depends on FTDAEM which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

2-79

Examples
~DUMP/OUT'TTYI/MODEIASCII,SIXBtT/WIDTHI1,10/JUSTIL,R.~

IRIGHTMAI26/D [3000 , 3004
This command string writes a core image file named nnnDAE.TMP and
invokes the DUMP program to perform the output. The output goes to
the terminal and the modes used on output are ASCII and SIXBIT. The
ASCII field is 7 characters long, left justified and the SIXBIT field is 10
characters long, right justified. The right margin of the output in 26
characters. The dump consists of the contents of word 3000 to word 3004.
The hyphen is used to continue the command string onto the next line.

2-80

DUMP Program

Function
The DUMP program provides printable dumps of arbitrary data files in modes
and forms specified by the user. The DUMP program accepts any data file as
input and produces an ASCII file suitable for listing by PIP, the output spoolers,
or other listing programs. For example, the DUMP program takes core image files
prepared by the DAEMON program or SAVEd files produced by the monitor.
For a description of the DAEMON-written file, refer to the DCORE command.
Complete documentation on the DUMP program is contained in the DUMP
Specification and in the DUMP Reference Manual is the DECsystem-1O Software
Notebooks.

Command Formats
1.

R DUMP
/command

R DUMP
/@ dev:file.ext [directory]
NOTE
DUMP indicates its readiness by typing a slash (I)
instead of an asterisk.

The commands with their arguments are as follows. Lines can be continued by
typing a hyphen followed by a carriage return.
Command
ADDRESS

Argument

Meaning
Specifies if the address is to be dumped
along with its contents. The default is
ON.

ON or OFF

ALL

Dumps the entire file. If the file is a
DAEMON core image file, the entire
category is dumped.

APPEND

Appends the output to the output file.
The existing output file is not overwritten. This command is the default; its
complement is SUPERSEDE.

AUTOFORMAT ON or OFF

Attempts to format output with line
feeds, form feeds, and titles, if ON. If
OFF, the user is responsible for all
formatting. The default is ON.

2-81

Command

Argument

CATEGORY

mnemonic for name of
category Can be JOB,
CONFIGURATION,
DDB, CORE, or
FEATURES.

Meaning
Selects the category of the
DAEMON dump file to be used.
Addressing begins with 0 at
the beginning of each category.
The default category is CORE. If the
input file is not a DAEMON file, this
switch has no effect. Note that the
DUMP program does not display the
category header nor does it allow the
user to read past the end of one
category into the next category.

DUMP or D

Closes the output file. After this command is given, another OUT command
must be given before the next command
which .does any output or else a fatal
error message will result.
dump descriptor,
dump descriptor ....

Dumps the specified
the current modes.

bytes in

EJECT

Starts a new page in the output file.

EXIT

Closes all files and returns control to
the monitor C Z has the same effect).

HELP or H

Types the help text on the user's
terminal. To list the names of all the
switches,
the
user
types
HELP:
SWITCHES.

INPUT or I

file descriptor

Specifies the input file. The defaults
are: DSK:nnnDAE.TMP where nnn is
the job number; the user's directory. If
the filename is specified, it determines
the extension from the set .TMP, .DAE,
.SHR, .SAV, .HGH, .LOW, .xPN, and
.DMP in that order. If an extension is
specified with no filename, the extension determines the filename.

IRADIX

decimal number

Specifics radix for numbers for input.
This command uses decimal to compute
the argument. The default is \0 for decimal. The argument must be nu-meric.
If the argument is 0 or is missing, the
input radix is set back to its default
value.

2-82

Command

Argument

Meaning

JUSTIFY

LEFT, CENTER, 01'
RIGHT

Specifies the justification of the output
in the output field. If the output overflows the output field, the entire output
appears; it is not truncated. This switch
is used in a one-to-one relationship with
the MODE and WIDTH commands. If
there are more MODE commands, an
argument of LEFT is used. If there are
more JUSTIFY commands, they are ignored.

LEFTMARGIN

expression

Sets the left margin of the output file.
The default is O.

LINEPAGE

expression

Specifies the number of lines per output
page. This counts all lines including
blank lines and titles. The default is 50.

MODES or M

ALL, ASCII, DECIMAL,
NULL, NUMERIC, OCTAL,
RADIX50, SIX BIT, SOCTAL
or SYMBOLIC

Selects the type of output.
All dumps in all modes. ASCII
dumps the word as a single
right justified character if bits 0-28 are
zero or as 5 left justified ASCII characters if bits 0-28 are nonzero. Non
printing characters print as a space.
DECIMAL dumps as a signed decimal
number. NULL declares that nothing is
to be dumped. NUMERIC dumps as a
signed number in the current output
radix. OCTAL dumps as half-words
separated by a comma (default) and
takes 13 positions. RADIX50 dumps in
RADIX50. SIXBIT dumps as one right
justified SIX BIT character if bits 0-29
are zero, or 6 SIX BIT characters if bits
0-29 are nonzero. SOCTAL dumps as
signed octal and su ppresses leading
zeroes. SYMBOLIC dumps as a symbolic instruction.
Any mode specification can appear
more than once in the command string.
The output is in the same order as the
MODE list.

NUMPAGE

expression

Specifies that pages are to be numbered.
If expression is 0, page numbering is
turned off. If expression is not 0, page
numbering begins at page = [expression]. If command is omitted, numbering starts at the first page.

2-83

Command

Meaning

Argument

OPTION

:name

Reads the user's option file (DSK:
SWITCH.INI(,] IPHYSICAL) to determine the user's specified switch defaults
for this program. The option name
appearing as the value of the switch is
the pointer to the line to read in the
file. For example, if the file contains the
line
DUMP:OCT IIRADIX:8/0RADIX:8
then the user references this line by
typing to DUMP
IOPTION:OCT
If SWITCH.INI has a line of the form
DUMP Iswitch/switch
then the specified switches override the
normal DUMP defaults. For example, if
the user does not want the address
dumped, he can place the line
DUMPI ADDRESS:OFF
in the file. If he wants the addresses
dumped for a particular dump, he must
override the file by giving the command
I ADDRESS:ON

to DUMP
ORADIX

OUTPUT or

decimal number

Specifies radix for numbers for output.
The default is IO for decimal. If number
is 0, the standard is used. The argument
to this command is decimal and must
not be an expression.

file descriptor

Specifies the output file. The defaults
are: LPT:, the filename of the input
file; the extension .LSD; the user's
directory. If a filename is given, the
device DSK: is assumed.

RIGHTMARGIN expression

Sets the right margin of the output file.
A field may overflow the right margin if
it will not fit between the left and right
margins. If ADDRESS is ON, the new

2-84

Command

Meaning

Argument

line will have an address typed. If a
page overflow occurs, a title line may
also be printed.
RUN

Runs the specified program. This command is equivalent to the R monitor
command.

program

SUPERSEDE

Specifies that the output is to supersede
an existing file of the same name, if
there is one. The complement of this
command is APPEND, which is the
default.

SYFILE

file descriptor

Specifies the file to take symbols from if
XTRACT command is specified. Defaults are: DSK:, the filename of the
input file; one of the saved file extensions; the user's directory area.

TDUMP or T

dump descriptor,
dump descriptor, ...

Dumps specified bytes to both
output file and TTY.

TITLE

string of characters

Specifies a title to be included in the
subsequent page headings. If no argument is specified, titling is turned off.
After this command, an EJECT command should be given to skip to a new
page.

TYPE(I)

DAE,DAT,HGH,
LOW, SAY, SHR,
XPN

Specifies the format of the input or
symbol file. DAE specifies the file is
generated by DAEMON. OAT specifies
file is a data file (i.e., no special format;
therefore, no special processing is done).
HGH specifies file is in .HGH format.
LOW specifies file is in .LOW format.
SA V specifies file IS in .SA V format.
SHR specifies file is in .SHR format.
XPN specifies file is in .xPN format.

WIDTH

expression

Selects the width of each output mode
(see the MODE and JUSTIFY commands). If a MODE command is specified without. a corresponding WIDTH,

If TYPE is not specified. the extension of the input tile is used to determine the type of file being produced. If
the extension is not one recognized in the TYPE command. TYPE DAE is assumed.

2-85

Meaning

Argument

Command

the byte is dumped in exactly the
number of positions required followed
by 3 blanks. If a WIDTH command is
specified, no free blanks are output. If a
MODE
specification
overflows
its
WIDTH specification, the entire output
is given without justification. If expression is omitted, justification is turned
off.
Uses the file specified in the last
SYFILE command as a core image and
extracts the symbol table.

XTRACT

An expression is an octal or decimal number, arithmetic operations using
expressions (+, -, *, I,', and A grouped with parentheses), contents operator ([.\'
and @), or symbols. A symbol is a string of SIX BIT characters, or program:
symbol, where program defines the program containing symbol. The following
symbols are built into the DUMP program:
(the last byte typed out),
(the address of the last word dumped), and
% (the last expression evaluated).
$

A dump descriptor is any of the following:
I.

A text string enclosed in single quotes which contains alphanumeric characters and special patterns. The following patterns represent nongraphic
characters and are replaced in the output by the action represented.

where
WORD

the address of the word desired.

2-86

POS
the positIOn of the byte within the word. It specifies the
bit number of the leftmost bit in the byte.
SIZE
the number of bits in the byte. It may be any size and
can cross word or block boundaries.
3.

A byte descriptor limit specifying everything from the first byte descriptor
to the second. The format is as follows:

Command Format
EXECUTE list
list
a single file specification, or a string of file specifications
separated hy commas. A file specification consists of a device name, a
filename with or without an extension, and a directory name (rcfer to
Paragra ph 1.4.2.4).
The following switches can he used to modify the command string. These
switches can he temporary or permanent switches unless otherwise stated
(refer to Paragraph 1.5.5).
I ALGOL

Compile the file with ALGOL. Assumed for
files with the extension of .A LG.

IBIN

Generate a binary file for each file compiled.
The filename for the binary file follows the
standard conventions for determining the name
of the output file (refer to Paragraphs \.5.2
and 1.5.3). The extension is .REL. This is the
default action.

This command runs the COMPIL program. which interprets the command before running the appropriate
language translator for the LOADER.

2-92

IBUSS(l)

Compile the file with BUS 10. Assumed for
files with the extension of .B 10 or .BU.

ICOBOL

Compile the file with COBOL. Assumed for
files with the extension of .CBL.

ICOMPILE

Force a compilation on this file even if a
binary file exists with a newer date and time
than the source file. This switch is used to
obtain an extra compilation (e.g .. in order to
obtain a listing of the compilation) since
normally compilation is not performed if the
binary tile is newer than the source file.

ICREF

Produce a cross-reference listing file on the
disk for each file compiled for later processing
by the CREF program. The filename for the
listing file follows the standard conventions for
determining the name of the output file (refer
to Paragraphs 1.5.2 and 1.5.3). The extension is
.CRF. The files can then be listed with the
CREF command. However. with COBOL files.
the cross-referenced listing is appended to the
listing file. No additional command need be
given to obtain the listing.

IFOROTS

Load the file with FOROTS (the new FORTRAN object-time system).

IFORSE

Load the file with FORSE (the old FORTRAN object-time system).

IFORTRAN

Compile the file with a FORTRAN compiler.
Assumed for files with the extension of .F4
and .FOR and all files with nonrecognizable
translator extensions if FORTRAN is the
standard translator. This switch is needed if
the file has a nonrecognizable translator extension and FORTRAN is not the standard
translator or is not the current default (e.g ..
EXE/ALGOL FILLFIL2.FIL3/FORTRAN).

IFUDGE

Create a disk file containing the names of the
.REL files produced by the command string.
When the FU DG E command is given. PI P
reads this file in order to generate a library
REL file (refer to the FUDGE2 program
description). Arguments to this switch are:
IFUDGE:dev:file.ext [proj. progJ

BLIS 10 will be recognized as a language translator only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However. this
assembly switch setting is not supported.

2-93

dev: - the device on which to write the file. If
the device is omitted, DSK: is assumed.
file.ext - the name of the library file. The
filename is required. If the extension is
omitted, it is assumed to be .REL.
[proj, prog] - the directory in which to place
the file. The user's directory is assumed if none
is given.
This switch IS permanent in the sense that it
pertains to all REL files generated by the
.command string.
IFIO

Use the FORTRAN-IO compiler when compiling the associated FORTRAN file. This should
be used as a permanent switch because it is
not possible to load F40 and FORTRAN-IO
binary files .together.

IF40

Use the F40 compiler when compiling the
associated FORTRAN file. This is the current
default action. This should be used as a
permanent switch because it is not possible to
load F40 and FORTRAN-IO binary files
together.

IKAIO
IKIIO

Designate the machine on which the
program will execute once it has been loaded.
These switches are needed for FORTRAN-IO
programs since the compiler generates different
code for the KA 10 and KIlO processors. The
IKA 10 switch is the current default.

ILIBRARY

Load the files in library search mode. This
mode causes a program file in a special library
file to be loaded only if one or more of its
declared entry symbols satisfies an undefined
global request in the source file. The system
libraries are always searched. Refer to the
LOADER and L1NK-1O documentation.

ILINK

Cause the file to be loaded by the LIN K-IO
linking loader. If used, this switch should be
placed before any file specifications since the
COMPIL program may have to generate loadcontrol switches.

lUST

Generate a disk listing file, for each file
compiled. The filename for the listing file
follows the standard conventions for determining the name of the output file (refer to

2-94

Paragraphs 1.5.2 and 1.5.3). The extension is
.LST. These files can be listed later with the
LIST command. If the line printer is being
spooled for this job, the listing files are written
on device LPT and are automatically spooled
at LOGOUT time. Unless this switch IS
specified, listing files are not generated.
ILMAP

Produce a loader map during the loading
process (same action as IMAP) containing the
local symbols.

ILOADER

Cause the file to be loaded by the LOADER.
This is the current default action.

IMACRO

Assemble the file with MACRO. Assumed for
files with extensions of .MAC.

IMACXll(l)

Assemble the file with MACX II. Assumed for
files with extensions of .PII.

IMANTIS(2)

Compile the file with the MANTIS debugging
information. This switch affects fORTRAN
files only.

IMAP

Produce loader maps during the loading
process. When this switch is encountered, a
loader map is requested from the loader. After
the library search of the system libraries, the
map is written in the user's disk area with
either the filename specified by the user( e.g.,
IMAP:file) or the default filename MAP.MAP
if loading is performed by LOADER or
nnnLNK.MAP if performed by LINK-to. This
switch is an exception to the permanent switch
rule in that it causes only one map to be
produced even though it appears as a permanent switch.

INEW

Run the appropriate language translator from
the experimental system library (device NEW:)
area [1.5]. If the translator does not exist on
device NEW:, try to obtain it from device
SYS:. Refer to the following NOTE.

MACXII. the PDP-II assemhler for the PDP-H). will he recognized as a translator only if the appropriate
assemhly switch is set. H()\vever. this assemhly switch setting is not supported.
:vIAl\TIS will he recognized as a dehugging program only if the appropriate assemhly switch is set. However.
this switch setting is not supported.

2-95

INOBIN

Do not generate binary files. Unless this switch
is given. binary files are genl:rated. This switl:h.
when combined with the ICREF or lUST
switch. is useful when compiling programs
solely for the purpose of generating listings.

INOCOMPILE

Complement the ICOMPILE switch by not
forcing a compilation on a source file whose
date is not as recent as the date on the binary
file. Note that this switch is not the same as
thl: IREL switch. which turns off all compilation. even if the source file is newer than the
REL file. INOCOMPILE is the default action.

INOUST

Do not generate listing files. This is the default
action.

INOMANTIS( I)

Compile the file without the MANTIS debugging information. This switch affects FORTRAN programs only.

INOSEARCH

Loads all routines of the file whether the
routines arl: refl:renced or not. Since this is the
default action. this switch is used only to turn
off library search mode (I L113RAR Y). This is
not equivalcnt to the IP LO;\DER switch.
which does not sl:arch any libraries: thl:
INOSEARCH switch scans the system librar-

Ies.
IOLD

Run the appropriate language translator from
the system library of old programs (device
OLD:) which resides on the disk area l U]. If
the translator docs not exist on device OLD:.
try to obtain it from device SYS:. Refer to the
following NOTE.

IREL

Usc the existing REL filcs although newer
source files may be prl:sen t.

ISEARCH

The action is iden tical to that of thl: I LJBRAR Y switch.

ISELF

Run thl: appropriate languagl: translator from
device DSK: instead of from thl: system library
(device SYS:). This switch is useful for an
individual who keeps a private copy of a
translator 111 his own disk area. Svstem

MANTIS will he recognized as a dehugging program only if the appropriate assemhly switch is set. However.
this switch setting is not supported.

2-96

programmers occasionally keep experimental
versions of standard translators in their disk
areas in order to test new features. Refer to
the NOTE below.
ISNOBOL(l)

Compile the file with SNOBOL. Assumed for
files with an extension of .SNO.

ISYS

Run the appropriate language translator from
the system library (device SYS:) area [1,4].
This is the default action.
NOTE

Once a language translator has been specified from a
particular area within the same command string. i.e ..
the following is illegal:
.EXECUTE PARTA.F40/NEW. PARTB.F40/0LD
However. the following is valid:
.COMPIL PARTA.F40/NEW
.COMPIL PARTB.F4010LD
.EXECUTE/REL PARTA. PARTB

Characteristics
The EXECUTE command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the appropriate language translator and linking-loader. thereby
destroying the user's original core image.
Starts the execution of the compiled and loaded program.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

SNOBOL will be recognized as a language translator only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However.
this assembly switch setting is not supported.

2-97

Examples
.,LEXECUTE TEST..)
MACRO,
TEST

LOADING
LOADER 2K CORE
EXECUTION

2-98

FAILSAFE Program

Function
The FAILSAFE program is used by operators and users alike to save disk files on
magnetic tape and to later place all or some of these saved files back onto the
disk. Although this program is normally used by the system operator. the console
user can execute a subset of the FAILSAFE operations for his own disk area. He
can save his disk area on his own magnetic tape and later restore all his files or a
subset of his files back to his area. Or he may need to restore from the system
failsafe tape one of his tiles that he unintentionally deleted from his area. The
user can also use the program fOF moving his files from one system to another.
Complete documentation on the FAILSAFE program is contained in the
FAILSAFE specification in the DECsystem-IO Software Notebooks.
WARNING

Crucial to FAI LSAFE'S operation is the fact that the
magnetic tape used must be assigned the logical name
FAILSA.

Command Format
.R FAILSAFE

* Iswitch
FAI LSAFE switches with their explanations arc as follows. A carriage return
used to terminate all switches.
SWITCH

EXPLANATION

Advances the magnetic tape one physical tile.

Backspaces the magnetic tape one physical file.

Causes FAILSAFE to continue.

On disk-to-tape transfers. if the end of tape is
reached before all disk tiles have been saved,
FAILSAFE requests that the user mount a new
tape and type IC after the tape has been
mounted to direct FAILSAFE to continue.

On tape-to-disk transfers, after FAILSAFE has
typed out the number of the mounted tape
and its creation time and date, the user types
IC if this information is correct and he wishes
all files on the tape to be restored on disk.
This feature aids in preventing accidental
restoration of files from the wrong tape.
2-99

EXPLANATION

SWITCH

Transfers control of DDT if it is loaded.

Sets creation date and time word so old files can be
eliminated by not being transferred in either direction. The format is as follows:

* IE mm/dd/yy, tttt
There may be a possible pause between the time the
angle brackets are typed at the beginning and the end
of transfer. The IT switch takes effect on the file for
which it appears and ends when a IQ switch is given.

Saves, on the magnetic tape. the disk files in the
U FD of the user last named in a IG switch, or if no
IG switch has been given. of the user currently
logged in. Up to 16 arguments. separated by spaces
and lor tabs. can follow this switch. These arguments
are names of file structures or disk devices from
which the tiles are to be taken. and when used. only
those structures mentioned that have files for the
specified user. are saved. If no arguments are given.
all the user's files on all the structures are saved. The
user is informed if no files arc saved from a specified
structure.
2-102

SWITCH

EXPLANATION

Generates a request to lock the job in core, or resets
the request. Note that locking may not be accomplished even though the request is given. FAILSAFE
acknowledges if the lock is successful and does not
acknowledge if the lock is unsuccessful. This switch is
a toggle switch in the sense that the first occurrence
sets the request, the second resets the request, and so
forth. The user can consult SYSTAT or SYSDPY to
determine the state of the switch.

Rewinds the magnetic tape with the logical name
FAILSA to load point.

Extracts the project-programmer numbers from the
tape and reproduces output similar to the original
TTY output generated by FAILSAFE during a save.
The output contains the names and the projectprogrammer numbers on the tape. It is placed on
logical device LST, and if LST is assigned to the disk
or DECtape, the filename FAILSA.DIR is given to
the output.

Used to debug new features.

Sets the magnetic tape density to 200 bpi.

Sets the magnetic tape density to 556 bpi.

Sets the magnetic tape density to 800 bpi.

The user can be selective as to the files he saves or restores. Files are specified
either explicitly by giving the filename and extension or implicitly by giving the
wildcard construction.

Characteristics
The R FAILSAFE command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the FAILSAFE program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

2-103

Examples:
I.

Saving a user's disk area

.MOUNT MTAI FAILSA IVIDIFAILSAFE-TAPE
OPERATOR NOTIFIED
WAITING •• ,
FAILSA (MTAO) MOUNTED

REWINDS ARE NOT AUTOMATIC,
FAILSAFE VERSION 7700,13, FOR HELP, READ SYSIFAILSA,
HLP, OP
TYPE IH
*/W
*/U

10147150
03 AUG 72
TAPE • 01 ~ 9 CH iOO BPI
NO FILES SAVED FOR 20,1547
DSKC
20,1547
NO FILES SAVED FOR 20,1547

DSKA
DSKB

,SAVE COMPLETED WITH TAPE • 01
10,47,57
03 AUG 72

Restoring a user's disk area

,MOUNT MTAI FAILSA IVIDIFAILSAFE-TAPE
OPERATOR NOTIFIED
WAITING.,.
FAILSA (MTAO) MOUNTED
• R FAILSA
REWINDS ARE NOT AUTOMATIC,
FAILSAFE VERSION 7700,13, FOR HELP, READ SYS,FAILSA,
HLP, OR
TYPE IH

** .•

S-SERIES FAILSAFE TAPE RECORDED BY VERSION
77 AT 10147150 03 AUG 72
"TAPE • 01
SEARCHING FOR 20,1547
rOUND ON TAPE

DSKC 20,1547

2-\04

Listing a user's directory on the terminal

.MOUNT MTAI FAILSA /VIDIFAILSAFE-TAPE
OPERATOR NOTIFIED
WAITING",
'AILSA (MTAO) MOUNTED

REWINDS ARE NOT AUTOMATIC
'AILSAFE VERSION 7700,13, FOR HELP, READ SYSI'AIL5A,
HLP, OR
TYPE /H
*/W

*/L

S-SERIES 'AILSAFE TAPE RECORDED BY VERSION
77 AT 10147150 03 AUG 72
"TAPE • 01
SEARCHING 'OR 20,AS47
DIRECTORY FOR DSKC

20,1547

P'40
,CTL
DOTH ,MAC
CTL
• TEC
BASIC .CTL
COMMAND.CTL
FA ILSA .CT1
FAILSA.OLG
P"AILSA .CTL
FAILSA.LOG
F'ILEl .MAC
FILE2 .ceL
FILEl ,MAC
PPNTST.MAC
PPNTST.REL

2-105

FILCOM P ..g
A
First difference
FILE 8
A

2'
**************
1)1

D }

)oI~
_ _- - - -

Second difference

line
1)
p. 1~1)
G
1'd entlca
****
in both
2) 1
G
files
************~*

line
identical
in both
tiles
line
identical
. b ot h
10
files

1)1

1)
1)

L
M

1) 2

<****
2' 1

2)
2)

2)2

Third difference

1
2
3
N

**************
1) 2

****
2,2
2)

))004_----- Fourth difference

**************

Th;s column ;ndkates the page numb" of tbe file.
This column indicates either the first tile or the
second file.

To compare the two files and output the differences on the line printer, the
following commands are used. Note that in this example the number of successive lines that determines a match has been set to 4 with the 14L switch.

2-111

.l.R FILCOM)
!LPTI/4L • rILEA,rIL!S)

rILE 1)
FILE 2)
1)1
1)

DSKIP'ILEA
DSK I rILES

1456 17-JAN-1972
1456 17-JAN-1972

FILE A
A

1)
1)

D
E
P"

CREATEDI
CREATED I

These lines are listed as being
different because the 14L switch
specifies that 4
consecutive
lines must be found identical in
the two files before they are
considered as a match.

****
2)1
2)
2)

2)
2)

**************
1)1
1)
1)
1) 2

K
L
M
N

****
2'1

2)
2)

2
3

2)2

**************
1) 2

****
2) 2

2'
2'

5
W

**************
To compare the two files so that the second input file is output with vertical
bars in the left column next to the lines that differ from the first input file, use
the following command sequence .

• R P"ILCOM)

*LPTc/U = FILEA,FILEB)
FILE B
A
B

C
G
H
I

The lines with vertical bars
indicate the differences between
the two files.

J
1

2
3
N

2-112

T
U

The lines with vertical bars
indicate the differences between
the two files.

4
5
W
X

'l
Z
2.

To compare two binary files on the disk and output the
differences on the terminal. use the following command
sequence .

• R F'ILCOM)
!TT'lI_DSKIDIAL.REL,DIAL2)
F'ILE 1) DSKIDIAL,REL
CREATEDI 0000 23-DEC-1971
FILE 2) DSKIDIAL2,REL CREATEDI 0000 12-AUG-1971
000000
000002
000003
000004
3.

000004
000000
000006
000000

000001
054716
000001
000000

000004
000311
017573
017573

000060
372712
510354
513216

000057
000311 326004
017575 510355
01757:1 513216

To compare two high segment files. the command sequence
below is used. Note that the locations hegin at 400000 .

• R F'ILCOM)

~TT'lI_S'lSITABLE.5HR, TABLE,SHR)

rILE 1) SYSITABLE.SHR
rILE 2) DSKITABLE.SHR

CREATED I 2020 24-JAN-1972
CREATED I 1829 30-NOV-1971

400000
400003
400004
400005
400010
400011
400012
400013

001630
015024
004700
554143
260740
200000
202000
201000

001611
006675
005600
545741
634000
474000
402000
200040

400010
000000
000070
444562
000000
000000
000156
406354

407157
407670
000113
625700
403516
414036
000720
000472

To list a hinary file. use the following command
sequence .
• R F'ILCOM)
!TT'lI_SYSIDOT,REL)
000000 000004 000001
000001 000000 000000
000002 000000 054716
000003 000006 000001
000004 000000 000000
000005 000007 517116
000006 000001 0000002
000007 000000 000000

2-113

000021
013651
001100
011602
454740
674000
600000
001040

007147
407670
000163
261262
403516
414036
000676
406726

Note that the folIowing sequence will not work because of
the terminating comma.

!TTYI_SYSIDOT.REL,)
7COMMAND ERROR
5.

To compare two binary files between locations 150-160
(octal) .

• R P'ILCOM)
!TTY,/150/1 6 0U.SYS,SYSTAT.SAV,SYS,SYSDPY.SAV)
rILE 1) SYS,SY5TAT.SAY CREATEDI OB1B ]0-NOV-i911
FILE 2) SYSISYSDPY.SAV CREATEDI 1642 29-NOY-1911
000150
000151
000152
·00015]
000154
000155
000156
000157
000160
6.

200400
260140
260740
200040
260140
201041
047040
254000
476000

000137
004226
004253
005011
004063

777777
000042
000174
006'774

200740 00]211 000340 00]320
404500 004242 664240 000064
66 002000 401240 006253
260740 002123 060700 001732
200040 00424] 060100 000220
202040 003241 00]001 774536
200040 004241 247000 004203
251040 004142 005040 004036
211040 000144 66'7040 006630

To compare two .SA V files. Note that the files are
expanded before the comparison .
• R P'ILCOM)

*TTY I_SYS ITRY1. SAY, sn ITRY. SAY )
FILE 1) SYSITRY1.SAY
CREATEDI 2043 05-JAN-U72
FILE 2) SYSITRY.SAV
CREATED I 081 B 30-NOV-19'71
000114
000116
000117
000120
000121
000130
000133
00013'7
000140
000141
000142
000143
000144
000145
000146
000147
000150
000151
000152
000153

004000
'777536
000000
006000
000000
010000
003727
003400
264000
260040
201240
542240
260040
621000
200240
251240
402000
201040
200260
321240

000140
005536
005536
000140
006000
000005
005777
000010
001454
001773
001447
001634
002774
000010
003504
000012
003613
003730
003632
000164

2-114

000000
000000
000000
007222
000000
000000
00664)
046700
047000
200040
402000
251040
403000
476000
200740
051140
200400
260740
260740
200400

000000
000000
000000
000140
007222
000000
007777
000004
000000
0050'75
006644
007221
000015
006715
006606
0050'76
000137
004226
00425]
005011

004000 000140
777536 005536
005536
001222 000000
001222
010000 000005
005164 002000
045300 000074
223000 001454
060000 004706
603240 00720]
'713200 006416
663040 002761
257000 006705
000500 005302
200300 005064
602400 003'724
061700 00'7516
060520 007461
121200 005175

FILE Command

Function
The FILE command provides remote control of DECtape-to-disk and disk-toDECtape transfers on operator-handled DECtapes.

Command Formats

FILE C
Checks the queue of FILE commands to be read to determine if any of
the user's requests are still pending. No argument is required. Pending
req uests will be listed.

FILE D. id. file.ext. flle.ext. ...
Deletes the specified files from DECtape. Requires Tape 10 and list of
fIlenames as arguments. The tape 10 is any alphanumeric name of 6
characters or less that is used to identify the tape. Upon completion. an
automatic F[I.E L is performed.

FILE F. id. flle.ext. file.ext. ...
Files information onto a DECtape. Requires Tape [0 and list of
filenames as arguments. Upon completion. an automatic FILE L is
performed.

FILE L. id
Reads the directory of a DECtape and places it in the user's disk area
as an ASC[[ file with fIlename id.DIR. id is any alphanumeric name of
6 characters or less that is used to identify the tape. It is the only
argument. The user may then read the directory with a monitor
command string. (See Examples).

F[LE R. id. flle.ext. file.ext. ...
Recalls (transfers) information from the user's DECtape to the disk.
Requires Tape id and list of fIlenames as arguments. [I' the specifIed
files already exist. they are superseded with the ones from the DECtape.
[I' the specifIed files do not exist. they will he created on the first file
structure in the joh's search list for which creation is allowed. After the
files are transferred. an automatic F[LE L is performed.

F[LE W
Waits until all of the user's pending requests are processed before
continuing. [I' there are pending requests. the message WA[T[NG ... is

2-115

typed to the user. Control returns when all requests have been
processed. The user may type control-C if he decides not to wait.
7.

FILE Z, id, file.ext, file. ext, ...
Zeroes the directory of the DECtape before the files are copied and
then performs the same operations as the F option. Requires Tape id
and may have a list of filenames as arguments. After the files are
copied, an automatic FILE L is performed.

The C and W functions are the only requests that are performed whenever
possible. The user's terminal and job are free to proceed before the request is
completed. The function argument is optional. If the function argument is not
specified, a brief dialogue is performed.
In most cases the user does not need to specify which file structures the files are
on because UMOUNT determines this (with LOOKUPs) and passes the
information to aMOUNT.
However, file structure names may be specified in file descriptors. When no
structure name is explicitly typed, the default is initially the first file structure in
the user's search list (implied by DSK:) on which he is allowed to create files.
Refer to the description of the SETSRC program. When a file structure name is
typed or implied. it becomes the new default.
The asterisk construction may be used, but care should be taken when generic
DSK: is typed. Because DSK: may define many file structures, the single file
structure is chosen as follows:
When the asterisk construction is used for the filename or extension, the first
structure on which the user may create files in his search list is used. This is
called the user's standard file structure.
If the asterisk construction is not used and the file exists, the first file structure in
the search list that contains the specified file is used, unless overridden by a
default. (See Examples.) If the file does not exist, the standard structure is used.
WARNING
If the user has a search list with multiple file structures, the
asterisk construction when used with the FI LE R command
can cause files to be created rather than superseded.

Characteristics
The FILE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the UMOUNT program, thereby destroys the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

2-116

Restrictions
The project-programmer number may not be specified in file descriptors.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

REQUEST STORED
2.COMMANDS IN QUEUE

The files MAIN.F4 and SUBFIL.MAC are
taken from the user's DECtape labeled MINE
and placed on the first file structure in the
user's search list for which creation is allowed.
There are two commands in the queue (counting this one).

,FILE C.J

2. R JOB24 TTY5 27,235 MINE DSKBI,DSKBIMAIN,F4,SURFIL,MAC
3. COMMANDS IN QUEUE

The user checks to see if this request is still
waiting to be processed. The first line of the
output indicates that the user's request is
second in the queue (2.). that the request made
is a RECALL (R), that the user's job is 24
(JOB24), that the user is on terminal 5 (TTY5)
under the project-programmer number of [27.235) (27,235), that the tape is identified by the
name MINE (MINE), and that the files will be
written in the directory on DSKB: (DSKB:).
The second line indicates that there are 3
commands in the queue.
The user wants the directory on the DECtare
labeled 4 to be placed in his disk area as an
ASCII file.

,TYPE 4,DIR.J

The user then reads the directory file with the
TYPE command.

If the user's search list is as follows:
DSKA/N,DSKB,DSKC
with file A on DSKA, file B on DSKB, and file C on DSKC. the following
commands are equivalent:

2-117

The user types:

The user could have typed: The command as passed to
aMOUNT:

,FILE F,2,DSKIA,DSKIP,
DSKIC

,FILE F,2,DSKA.A,DSKBIB,
DSKCIC

The first file structure that contains each file is used.

,FILE R,A,DSKBIB,C

,rILE R,l,DSKIA,DSKBIB,
DSKBIC

,FILE R,3,DSKAtA,DSKBIB,
DSKBIC

The user changes the default to DSKB and even though file C exists on DSKC,
file C is created on DSKB; files A and B are superseded.

Because the asterisk convention was used, the first file structure on which the user
may create files (DSKB) is used.

,FILE R,2,A,C.*,
OSKCIB.*

,FILE R,2,OSKIA,
DSKBtC,*,DSKC,B,*

,rILE R,2,DSKAIA,
DSKBIC,*,DSKCIB.*

Because of the asterisk convention, DSK B is used for file C (even though file C
exists on DSKC). The user explicitly typed a structure name for file B; therefore,
DSKC is used even though file B is on DSKB. File A is superseded.

2-118

FILEX Program

Function
The FILEX program is a general file transfer program used to convert between
various core image formats, and to read and write various DECtape formats. Files
are transferred as 36-bit data. The only processing on the data is that necessary to
convert between various core image representation.

Command Format
.R FILEX
*dev:ofile.ext [directory] ,

DTA11P'4(~"

Replace modules EXP.3 and EXP.3C
located in file LIB4AA.REL on DTA2.
with modules EXP.3A and EXP.3B in
File F4.REL on DT A I: write out the
new LIB4AA file on disk and call it
LIB4BB.REL.

OTA3ITFILEACTA1,TA2>,
OTA4ITFILEBCTB1,TB2>/IS

Insert into MFILE the modules
T A I and T A2 from TFI LEA. and TB I
and TB2 from TFILEB. Create NFILE
with the following order:
TAI.MI.TA2.M2.
TB I.M3.TB2.M4
Insertion is on
there are more
than specified
they are to be
are ignored.

a one-to-one basis. If
modules to be inserted
modules before which
inserted. the extra files

*OTAlINFILE.OSK.MP'ILECM1,M2,Ml,M4>,
OTAlITFILlA,
However.
in
this example
OTA41 TFUEB/IS
(where TFILEA.REL and TFILEB.REL
contain the modules TAl and TA2 and
TB I and TB2 respectively) create an
NFILE.REL with the following order:
TALTA2.M I.TBI.
TB2.M2.M3.M4
2-130

!DTA2ITESTA.MTA1ICW~),MTA21

I(ZA)'
Clears the directory of DT A2; rewind
MT A I and advance the tape one file;
append the first two program files from
MT A2 to the second file on MT A I and
write out the resultant file on DTA2,
calling it TEST A.REL.

~OUTPUT=LIBAPy,DTA1ILI8ARYCrILEy,rILEZ>/A'

Append the modules FILEY and
FILEZ contained in the file LIBARY.REL on DTAI to the end of the
file LIBARY.REL on disk. Write the
new file on disk and call it OUTPUT.REL.
~NEWFIL=OLDrIL,BASFIL,SUBFIL

TYPE OUT=INPUT,INPUT, •••
IACCESS:N = ACCESS ALL LISTED FILES UNDER N BLOCKS LONG
IALLOCAT~D = GIVE ALLOCATED LENGTHS
IBEFOREIOAT~ITIME = JUST FILES CREATED BEFORE THIS DATE-TIME
IBLOCKS • GIVE LENGTHS IN BLOCKS (DEFAULT)
ICHECKSUM = COMPUTE CHECKSU~ OF EACH FILE
IDETAIL • EVERYTHING FROM EXTENDED LOOKUP
IF :I FAST MODE
IH = TIiIS TEXT
IL = OUT TO LPT
IN :; NOR~AL ~WDE
INOCHgCKSU~ = OMIT CHECKSUMS (DEFAULT)
INDDETAIL = DON-! USE nETAIL MODE (DEfAULT)
INQSOPT :I O~IT SORT nPTIONS (DEfAULT)
INOSUMMARY : DON'T USE ISUMMARY MODE (DEFAULT)
INOTITL~5 = O~IT TITLES (DEFAULT IF TTY.,
INOUNITS = DON·T USE IUNITS MODE (DEfAULT)
IS = S!..OW MODI::
ISINC!'ATE*TI~E = JUST FILES CREATED SINCE THIS DATE-TIME
ISORT = OUTPUT IN FORMAT AMENABLE TO SORTING
ISUMMARY = JUST PRI~T SUMMARY LI~E
ITITLES = INCLUDE TITLES )DEfAULT If TTYI)
IUNITS = GIV~ ACTUAL UNITS FOR STRUCTURgS
IW.N • TRY Tn fJLL PAPER ~IDTH Of N COLUMNS
IWORDS = GIVE LENGTHS I~ WORDS
IWRITTE~ = GIVE L~NGTHS WRITTEN (OEFAULT)

* IS ~ILn NA~E, ~TC.
? IS WILD LETTER nr NAME, ETC.
"OUT=" ~AY HE O~ITTED
DEFAULT IS TTr:.DIR=nSK~*.*[~~ DIRECTORY]
ON ~AGNfTIC TIPE,
IDENSITYr200 OR 556 OR 800 = SELECT THE DENSITY
I~OTS
STOP AT DQUHLE ~lLE ~ARK (DEFAULT)
IFILES:N = STOP AFTER DOING N FILES (TAPE MARKS)
I~ARKS = NOTE EACH F~O Of FILE MAPK
INOEOTS = DON'T STOP AT DOUBLE FILE MARK
INOMARKS = DO~'T ANNOTATE FILE MARKS (DEFAULT)
INOREvl~OS = DON'! RF~IND TAPE
IPARITY:EVFN = READ TAPE IN EVEN MODE
IPARITY:QDD = REID TAP~ IN ODD~ODE (DEfAULT)
IRE~I~~5 = ~f~l,n TAP~ 8EFORE ANO AFT~R (DEFAULT)

~HELP

NEW,FORTRA)

FILENAME I
DATEI
FUNCTION,

F'ORTRA,HLP
2 FEB 73
SUMMARY OF FORTRAN-l0 COMMAND STR%NG SWITCHES.

SWITCH

MEANING

ADVANCE,N

ADVANCE MTA PAST N EOF MARKS.

2-142

CAYTIM
SPOOL

BACKSPACE IN

BACKUP MTA UNTIL NTH [or MARK.

CROSSREF'

GENERATE CROSS REFERENCE LISTING.

DEBUG

COMPIL LINK! TO FORTRAN DEBUGGER.

EXPAND

ADD OBJECT fILE OUTPUT TO LISTING

INCLUDE

COMPILE AS IF 0 IN COLUMN 1 WERE SPACE.

MACPOCOOE

ADD MACHINE LANGUAGE TRANSLATION TO LISTING.

NOEPRORS

DON'T TYPE ERROR MESSAGES ON TTY.

OPTIMIZE

PERFORM GLOBAL OPTIMIZATION.

TAPE NO

ADVANCE MTA TO LOGICAL EDT.

WINO

REWIND MTA OR OTA TO LOAD POINT.

ZERO

CLEAR DTA DIRECTORY.

tEND

FORTRA.HLP]

2-143

INITIA Command

Function
The IN ITIA command performs standard system initialization for the terminal
issuing the command. This command is issued automatically at system startup and
at the 400 series restart at certain designated terminals, but may be re-issued at
any time by the user. This command is used to initiate specific system programs,
such as the operator service program, OPSER, on a particular console.
When INITIA runs, it finds the file with the name TTY.INI, which is an ASCII file
created by the user. TTY.INI contains user-specified options indicating the characteristics of the terminaJ(s) to be initialized. If TTY.INI cannot be found, INITIA
cannot initialize any devices and a start-up message is printed.

Command Format
INITIA

Characteristics
The INITIA command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs a specific system program
Docs not require LOGIN.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
.!..INITIA ~

16 & 22 ,44 TTY 1

SYSll':~M

JOB

.!..
2-144

September 1974

JCONTINUE Command

Function
The JCONTINUE command forces a continue of the specified job if the job was
in a 'C state because of a call to the device error message routine (HNGSTP).

Command Format
JCONTINUEn
n = the number of the job to be continued. This argument is required.

Characteristics
The JCONTINUE command:
Places the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.
Depends on FTJCON which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Example

.JeONT 14)

2-145

K.JOB Command

Function
In multiprogramming systems, the KJOB command:
Stops all assigned 110 devices and returns them to the monitor pool.
Returns all allocated core to the monitor pool.
Returns the job number to the pool.
Leaves the console in the monitor mode.
Performs an automatic TIME command.
In swapping systems, the KJOB command performs all the above procedures. In
addition, the command responds with
CONFIRM:
The user may type 'c to abort logout, or type an optional file structure name (or
list of file structure names) preceded by one of the following:
F) to logout immediately saving all files (including temporary files) as they
are. Identical to R LOGOUT, or RUN UUO to LOGOUT.
0) to delete all files on the specified file structures. Responds with ARE
YOU SURE? Type Y or 0 for YES, any other character for NO.
K) to delete all unprotected files (i.e., files with Oxx protection code) on
the specified file structures. If project I or other jobs are logged-in with
the same project-programmer number, responds with ARE YOU
SURE? Type Y or K for YES, any character for NO.
p) to save and protect (i.e., assign a protection code of I in the owner's
field) all but temporary files (TMP, CRF, LST) on the specified file
structures. If project I or other jobs are logged-in with the ~ame
project-programmer number, responds with ARE YOU SURE? Type Y
or P for YES, any other character for NO.
S) to save without protecting all but temporary files on the specified file
structures. If project I or other jobs are logged-in with the same
project-programmer number, responds with ARE YOU SURE? Type Y
or S for YES, any other character for NO.
L) to list the directories of the specified file structures.
I) to individually determine what to do with all files on the specified file
structure as follows:

2-146

After each filename is listed type
p) to protect the file.
S) to save the file.
K) to delete the file.
Q,) to learn if over logged-out quota on this file structure. If not over
quota, nothing is typed, and the same filename is repeated.
E) to skip to next file structure and save this file if below logged-out
quota for this file structure. If not below logged-out quota. a
message is typed and the same filename is repeated.
H) to list responses and meanings.
U.> to individually determine what to do with all but protected files.
Protected files are always preserved.
B,) to delete no files except when user is over the logged-out quota, then
delete enough files to be below quota. The files are deleted in the
following order: I) unprotected files according to the category of the
file. 2) spooled files not previously queued. and 3) protected files
according to the category of the file. The categories of files are as
follows: I) temporary files. 2) relocatable files, 3) backup files. 4) save
files. and 5) all other files.
Q) to learn if over logged-out quota on the specified file structures.
H) to list the KJOB options and their meanings.
W)

to list the names of the files that are deleted.

X) to turn off the listing of names of the files
Complement of W.

that are deleted.

I f no file structure names are specified. the responses are for all file structure
names in the job search list. If file structure, names are specified, the responses
apply to those file structures, and CONFIRM is retyped. The KJOB command
ignores all logical assignments.
The user has the option of going through the CONFIRM dialogue. even if other
jobs are logged-in under the same project-programmer number or if he is loggedin under project I. (However. if sufficient responses are included on the KJOB
command line or in a temporary file entered through an alternate entry point.
CONFIRM is not typed.) By responding to a CONFIRM message, the user has
an opportunity to organi7.e this disk area by deleting or preserving specific files.
The KJOB program calls the QUEUE program to perform the queuing of files
which have been deferred to logout time. This includes all spooled output unless
the use has specifically queued output spooling earlier. Queuing may be
suppressed with the IZ response (see below).

2-147

Command Formats

KJOB
CONFIRM:
When the CONFIRM: response is given, the user may type any of the
above-described letters followed by an optional fik structure name or list of
file structure names separated by commas. The user may type one of the
above-described letters, followed by optional file structure names, on the
same line as the KJOB command, and the CONFIRM: message will not be
typed.

KJO~og file descriptor)

/ etc.
505. aLKS I p)
Tll
.aAK C055>
5. eLKS I K)
T2
,eAK c055> 5. aLKS I K)
TS
.SAK c055> 5. eLKS I K)
TEST ,8AK C055> 5, aLKS I IC)
TEST .REL <055> 5, 8LKS I S)
TEST .MAC <055> 5. eLKS I p)
TEST ,SHR <055> 10, eLleS I 5)
JOB 5, USER (10,63] LOGGED o,r TTY24 AT 2]09 I1-MAY-71
DELETED 5 rILES
SAVED 4 rILES 2565 TOTAL BLOCKS USED
RUNTIME 0 MIN, 00,60 SEC
2.

An example of the user bypassing the CONFIRM dialogue.

,K/r)
9, USER [10,110] LOGGED orr TTY] 1349 le-MAR-'l
SAVED ALL 23 rILES (630, DISK BLOCKS)
RUNTIME 1 MIN, 51.52 SEC

~OB

12120151
12121102
12121102
12121102
12121102
4.

An example of the command when used in the Batch system. The output appears
in the log file.

MONTR
LGOUT
LGOUT
LGOUT
LGOUT

K DSKBOIMUM,LOG[10,110]-/W/B/VLI200
JOB 12, USER [10,110] LOGGED orr TTY50 1221 lS-MAR-'l
SAVED ALL 38 FILES (1275, DISK BLOCKS)
ANOTHER JOB STILL LOGGED IN UNDER [10,110]
RUNTIME 0 MIN, 00,65 SEC

An example of the user specifying two switches.

,K/W/B)
DELETED 1
MYYILE
JOB 14, USER [20,275] LOGGED o,r TTY)5
DELETED 1 rILES (1022. DISK BLOCKS)
SAVED 52 rILES (1735, DISK BLOCKS)
RUNTIME 0 MIN, 02,60 SEC

2-150

1454

13-APR-12

LABEL Command (1)

Function
The LABEL command allows the user to write an identifier onto a DECtape.
This command is implemented for the user's convenience. The identifier is stored
on the tape itself and is displayed when the user lists a directory of the tape with
the DIRECT command. The PIP and FILEX programs can also read and write
DECtape labels. Each user should assign a unique label to each of his DECtapes
in order to avoid confusing one tape with another.

Command Format
LABEL dev:

name

dev: = a physical or logical name

wt.:~·h

re;,r.::sents a DECtape.

the delimiter of the DECtape identifier, which may be any nonalphan umeric character.
name = a one-to-six character SIX BIT name to be used as the identifier.
Any characters can be used except the delimiter.
If the identifier consists entirely of alphanumeric characters, the delimiters
can be omitted.
The DECtape must be assigned to the user before this command
executed.

Characteristics
The LABEL command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-I040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

This command runs the COMPIL program. which interprets the command hefore running PIP.

2-151

~LABEL DTA7ICOBOL1)
~LABEL

DTAll-PIP.3l-)

~ASSIGN DTA2ILOGNAM)

.LABEL

LOGNAMI·TAPEID·~

2-152

LIST Command (1)

Function
The LIST command directs PIP to list the contents of named source file(s) on the
line printer (LPT). The output goes either to LPT immediately or to the disk to
be spooled to LPT if it is being spooled for this job. Refer to the QUEUE and
PRINT commands. If the LPT is being spooled, the QUEUE program should be
used instead of the LIST command since it saves time and disk accesses.

Command Format
LIST list
list = a single file specification or a string of file specifications separated
by commas. A file specification consists of a device name, a filename and
extension, and a directory name. This argument is required. When a
directory name precedes the filename, it becomes the default for all
succeeding files.
Switches can be passed to PIP by enclosing them in parentheses in the
LIST command string. When COMPIL interprets the command string, it
passes the switches on to PIP.

Characteristics
The LIST command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

This command runs the COM I'lL program. which interprets the command before running PIP.

2-153

Examples
.LIST TEST . - ;
-;LIST -.MAC~
:iLIST DTA4IA,B,C)

2-154

LOAD Command (1)

Function
The LOAD command translates the specified source files if necessary (function of
COMPILE command). runs the linking loader. and loads the .REL files
generated. The language translator used is determined by the source file extension
or by switches in the command string (refer to the COMPILE command). If a
REL file already exists with a more recent date than that of the source file
compilation is not performed (unless requested via a switch).
This command generates a core image but docs not begin execution. At this
point. the user can start his program or save the core image for future execution.
Each time the COMPILE. LOAD. EXECUTE. or DEBUG command is executed.
the command with its arguments is remembered in a temporary file on disk. or in
core if the monitor has the TMPCOR feature. Therefore. issuing one of these
commands without any arguments causes the arguments saved in the temporary
file to be reused (refer to Paragraph \.5).
The LOAD command accepts several command constructions: the (j/ construction
(indirect commands). the + construction. the = construction. and the
construction. Refer to Paragraph 1.5 for a complete description of each of these
constructions.

Command Format
LOAD list
list = a single file specification. or a string of file specifications separated
by commas. A file specification consists of a device name. a filename with
or without an extension. and a directory name (refer to Paragraph
1.4.2.4).
The following switches can be used to modify the command string. These
switches can be temporary or permanent switches unless stated otherwise
(refer to Paragraph 1.5.5).
/ALGOL

Compile the file with ALGOL. Assumed for files with the
extension of .ALG.

/BIN

Generate a binary file for each file compiled. The name for
the binary file follows the standard conventions for
determining the name of the output file (refer to Paragraphs
1.5.2 and 1.5.3). The extension is .REL. This is the default
action.

This command runs the COMPIL program. which inli:rprets the command he fore running the appropriate
language transla tor and linking loader.

2-155

IBUSS(l)

Compile the file with BUS 10.
extension of .B 10 and .BU.

ICOBOL

Compile the file with COBOL. Assumed for files with the
extension of .CBL.

ICOMPILE

Force a compilation of this file even if a binary file exists
with a newer date and time than the source file. This switch
is used to obtain an extra compilation (e.g., in order to
obtain a listing of the compilation) since normally compilation is not performed if the binary file is newer than the
source file.

ICREF

Produce a cross-reference listing file on the disk for each file
compiled for later processing by the CREF program. The
filename for the listing file follows the standard conventions
for determining the name of the output file (refer to
Paragraphs 1.5.2 and 1.5.3). The extension is .CRF. The files
can then be listed with the CREF command. However, with
COBOL files, the cross-referenced listing is always appended
to the listing file. No additional command need be given to
obtain the listing.

IFOROTS

Load the file with FOROTS (the new FORTRAN objecttime system).

IFORSE

Load the file with FORSE (the old FORTRAN object-time
system).

IFORTRAN

Compile the file with a FORTRAN compiler. Assumed for
files with the extension of .F4 and .FOR and all files with
nonrecognizable translator extensions if FORTRAN is the
standard translator. This switch is needed if the file has a
nonrecognizable translator extension and FORTRAN is not
the standard translator or is not the current default (e.g.,
LOAD/COBOL, TEXTI, TEXT2, TESTJ/FOR).

IFUDGE

Assumed for files with the

I FU DG E:dev:file.ext[proj,prog]

dev: - the device on which to write the file. If the device is
omitted, DSK: is assumed.
file.ext - the name of the library file. The filename is
required. If the extension is omitted, it is assumed to be
.REL.
BLiS IO will be recognized as a language translator only if the appropriate assembly switch is sct. However. this
assembly switch setting is not supported.

2-156

[proj, prog] - the directory in which to place the file. The
user's directory is assumed if none is given.
This switch is permanent in the sense that it pertains to all
REL files generated by the command string.
IFIO

Use the FORTRAN-IO compiler when compiling the
associated FORTRAN file. This should be used as a
permanent switch because it is not possible to load F40 and
FO RTRA N - 10 binary files together.

IF40

Use the F40 compiler when compiling the associated
FORTRAN file. This is the current default action. This
should be used as a permanent switch because it is not
possible to load F40 and FORTRAN-IO binary files
together.

IKAIO
IKIIO

Designate the machine on which the program
will execute once it has been loaded. These switches are
needed for FORTRAN- 10 programs since the compiler
generates different code for the KA 10 and KIlO processors.
The IKA 10 switch is the current default.

IUBRARY

Load the files in library search mode. This mode causes a
program file in a special library file to be loaded only if one
or more of its declared entry symbols satisfies an undefined
global request in the source file. The default libraries are
always searched. Refer to the LOADER and LINK-IO
documentation.

IUNK

Cause the file to be loaded by the L1NK-JO linking loader.
If used, this switch should be placed before any file
specifications since the COMPIL program may have to
generate load-control switches.

lUST

Generate a disk listing file, for each file compiled. The
filename for the listing file follows the standard conventions
for determining the name of the output file (refer to
Paragraphs 1.5.2 and 1.5.3). The extension is . LST. These
files can be listed later with the LIST command. If the line
printer is being spooled for this job, the listing files are
written on device LPT and are automatically spooled at
LOGOUT time. Unless this switch is specified. listing files
are not generated.

ILMAP

Produce a loader map during the loading process (same
action as IMAP) containing the local symbols.

ILOADER

Cause the file to be loaded bv the LOADER. This is the
current default action.

IMACRO

Assemble the file with MACRO. Assumed for files with
extensions of .MAC.

2-157

IMACXII(I)

Assemble the file with MACX II. Assumed for files with an
extension of .PI!.

IMANTIS(2)

Compile the file with the MANTIS debugging information.
This switch affects FORTRAN programs only.

IMAP

Produce a loader map during the loading process. When this
switch is encountered, a loader map is requested from the
loader. After the library search of the default libraries, the
map is written in the user's disk area with either the
filename specified by the user (e.g., IMAP:file) or with the
default filename MAP.MAP if loading is performed by
LOADER or nnnLNK.MAP if performed by LINK-IO. This
switch is an exception to the permanent compile switch rule
in that it causes only one map to be produced although it
may appear as a permanent switch.

INEW

Run the appropriate language translator from the expenmental system library (device NEW:) area [1,5]. If the
translator does not exist on device NEW:, try to obtain it
from device SYS:. Refer to the following NOTE.

INOBIN

Do not generate binary files. Unless this switch is given,
binary files are generated. This switch, when combined with
the ICREF or lUST switch, is useful when compiling
programs solely for the purpose of generating listings.

INOCOMPILE

Complement the ICOMPILE switch by not forcing a
compilation on a source file whose date is not as recent as
the date on the binary file. Note that this switch is not the
same as the IREL switch which turns off all compilation,
even if the source file is newer than the REL file.
INOCOMPILE is the default action.

INOUST

Do not generate listing files. This is the default action.

INOMANTIS(2)

Compile the file without the MANTIS debugging information. This switch affects FORTRAN programs only.

INOSEARCH

Load all routines of the file whether the routines are
referenced or not. Since this is the default action, this switch
is used only to turn off library search mode (/UBRARY).
This is not equivalent to the IP LOADER switch because
IP does not search any libraries where INOSEARCH will
scan the default libraries.

MACX II (the PDP-II assemhler for the PDP-IO) will be recognized as a language translator only if the
appropriate assemhly switch is set. However. this assemhly switch setting is not supported.

2
MANTIS will he recognized as the dehugging program only if the appropriate assembly switch is set. However.
this switch setting is not supported.

2-158

IOLD

Run the appropriate language translator from the
library of old programs (device OLD:) which resides
disk area [1,3]. If the translator does not exist on
OLD:, try to obtain it from device SYS:. Refer
following NOTE.

IREL

Use the existing .REL files although a newer source file may
be present.

ISEARCH

The action is identical to that of the ILIBRARY switch.

ISELF

Run the appropriate language translator from device DSK:
instead of from the system library (device SYS:). This switch
is useful for an individual who keeps a private copy of a
translator in his own disk area. System programmers
occasionally keep experimental versions of standard translators in their disk area in order to test new features. Refer to
the following NOTE.

ISNOBOL(l)

Compile the file with SNOBOL. Assumed for files \\itll an
extension of .SNO.

ISYS

Run the appropriate language translator from the system
library (device SYS:) area [1,4]. This is the default action.

system
on the
device
to the

NOTE
Once a language translator has been specified from a
particular area (e.g., ISELF), it cannot be called from
a different area within the same command string, i.e.,
the following is illegal:
.LOAD ITEM.CBLlSYS,ITEM02.CBLlSELF
However, the following is valid:
.COMPIL ITEM.CBLlSYS
.COMPIL ITEM02.CBLlSELF
.LOAD IREL ITEM, ITEM02

Characteristics
The LOAD command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the appropriate language translator and linking loader, thereby
destroying the user's original core image.'

SNOBOL will he recognized as a language translator only if the appropriate assemhly switch is set. However.
this assemhly switch setting is not supported.

2-159

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

J,LOAD, TEST)
MACRO lUST

LOADING
LOADER 21< CORE
EXIT
.!.

2-160

LOCATE Command

Function
The LOCATE command logically establishes the user's job at a specified station.
When the job is initiated, the user's logical station corresponds to his physical
station. Therefore, this command is needed only if the user desires to change his
logical station.

Command Format
LOCATE nn
nn = the station number.
An argument of 0 denotes the central station. A null argument implies the
station of the user's terminal, i.e., his physical station.

Characteristics
The LOCATE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Is valid only in systems with a remote station.

Restrictions
The LOCATE command must specify a station that is currently
the central station.

contact with

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
.!.LOCATE 2)

•

:;'LOC 0)
!.

2-161

September 1974

Function
The LOG IN command is used to gain access to the system. This command loads
a Monitor Support program which accepts the user's LOG IN data. The user types
in his project and programmer numbers followed by his password. To login
successfully, the project and programmer numbers and the password typed in by
the user must match the project and programmer numbers and password stored in
the system accounting file (SYS:ACCT.SYS).
Command Format
LOGIN proj,prog
proj,prog = the user's project-programmer number. The project and
programmer numbers may be separated by either a comma or a slash. If
a slash is used, the message of the day is not output to the user unless the
date on the file containing the message (NOTICE.TXT) is later than the
last time the user logged-in. If this is true, the message is typed only once,
whereas, when the comma is used, the message is output every time the
user logs in. This argument may be typed on the same line as the LOGIN
command, or on the following line after LOG IN types out the number
sign.

Characteristics
The LOGIN command:
Returns the terminal to monitor mode or starts a program running if
specified in
ACCT.SYS entry

t'(H

proj,prog.

Runs the LOGIN program.
Does not require LOGIN.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

2-162

Example
The following is the procedure used to gain access to the system.

J.LOGIN 27,235">
JOB 21
5S0417A TTY23

LOGIN types the job number assigned
to user (job number 21), followed by monitor
name, version number, and console line number. If the user does not type his projectprogrammer number on the same line as the
LOGIN command, LOGIN outputs a number
sign indicating that the user should type in his
project-programmer number.

PASSWORD I

System requests user to type his password.
User types password followed by carriage
return (refer to Paragraph 1.4.2.1). To maintain
password security, the monitor does not echo
the password. On terminals with local-copy
(refer to DECsystem-1O Monitor Calls), a mask
is typed to make the password unreadable.

1135 a-JUN-71 THUR
TYPE SYSISCHED FOR NEXT
WEEKS SCHEDULE

If user entries are correct, the
system responds with time, date,
day of the week, the message of the
day (if any), and a period, indicating readiness
to accept another command.

.!.

2-163

MAKE Command

Function
The MAKE command creates a new file on the disk with TECO (Text Editor and
Corrector). If a file already exists with the same name, a warning message is
given and the file will be superseded if the user continues in TECO. If the user
types two control-Cs to leave TECO, the original file will not be destroyed. Refer
to the TECO manual in Notebook 6 of the DECsystem-1O Software Notebooks.

Command Format
MAKE dev:file.ext [directory]
dev: = the device or file structure name on which the file is to be
created. If omitted, DSK: is assumed.
file.ext = any legal filename and filename extension. The filename is
required; the filename extension is optional.
[directory] = the directory in which the file is to be created. If omitted,
the user's default directory is assumed. Note that the default directory may
be an SFD or some other UFO.
Switches can be passed to TECO by preceding the switch with a slash in
the MAKE command string. When COMPIL interprets the command
string, it passes the switch on to TECO.

Characteristics
The MAKE command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the TECO program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLS which is normally absent in the DECsystem- 1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

This command runs the COMPIL program. which interprets the commands before running TECO.

2-164

Example
.!. MAKE TESTl. MAC)
~

2-165

MOUNT Command

Function
The MOUNT command allows the user to request assignment of a device via the
operator. This command is similar to the ASSIGN command, but, whereas the
ASSIGN command operates without operator communication, the MOUNT
command requests operator interaction when necessary. For example, if a Batch
user requests a DECtape drive and all drives are in use, then the operator can
free one for the user, if he wishes. With this command the user can request
devices from the restricted pool of devices, which he cannot do with the ASSIGN
command.
The MOUNT command gives the operator greater control over assignment of
devices on the system. When a user requests a device via this command. the
operator has the option of either selecting a specific unit (e.g .. DTA5) or
cancelling the request completely (all units of this type are in use and the
operator does not want to free one for this user). The operator may also mount
the media for the requested unit if the media is sufficiently identified (e.g .. a deck
of cards in the card reader or an identified DECtape on a specific drive).
When the MOUNT command is used to gain access to a file structure. it allows
the user to specify a particular drive. places the file structure name at the end of
the job's search list, and waits for completion of operator action. if desired. Each
file structure can have an administrative file. QUOTA.SYS. which contains a list
of quotas for all users allowed access to the structure. When the file structure is
mounted. a UFO is created for the user if he has an entry in QUOTA.SYS on
the file structure.
The MOUNT command runs the UMOUNT program in the user's core area.
UMOUNT scans the command string and completes as much of the command as
possible without operator intervention. When operator intervention is required,
UMOUNT queues a request to the OMOUNT program by writing a command file
on the [3,3] disk area. OMOUNT examines these command files and interacts with
the operator. When the command file is deleted, the operator action has been
completed. UMOUNT waits for this completion of operator action unless the user
types a control-C. When a control-C is typed, the user does not receive a message
of confirmation, but can later use the /CHECK switch to see if his request is still
pending (see Examples).
To insure validity of any tape error analysis, MOUNT IDISMOUNT should be
used to acquire and release magtape units. This mechanism provides the basis for
all media-related error reporting.

Command Format
MOUNT dev: logical-dev Iswitches (drives)
dev: = one of the following: (I) a physical device name (e.g ..
DTA3,CDR,MTA), (2) a logical name previously associated with a

2-166

September 1974

physical device by either a MOUNT or ASSIGN command, or (3) a file
structure name (one that is already mounted or one whose name appears
in STRLST.SYS). This argument is required.
logical-dev = any SIX BIT name that is not the same as dev:. In other
words, it may not be a physical device name or logical name that is
currently being used or has previously been used as dev:. This argument
is required when the device being mounted is a non-file structure device
and is ignored when the device is a file structure.
switches = The following switches are optional
characters to make the switch unique are required.

and

only

enough

ICHECK

Check and list pending requests.

IHELP

Type this list.

IMULTI

Multi-access. disk only. complement of ISINGLE, default condition.

IPAUSE

Notify the user before sending the message to
the operator for a request. The user can then
abort the command if desired.

IREELID

A reel identification to be used when mounting
a Magtape. The argument is a string of up to
6 characters which is used to uniquely identify
a reel of Magtape. This identification will be
included in any system generated error or
status reports about the drive while the reel is
mounted.

IRONLY

Read only, same as IWLOCK.

ISINGLE

Only this job can access files on the structure
(single access). file protection is enforced for
him. disk only.

IVID:name

A visual identification passed to the operator
as a comment to assist him in identifying a
particular unit to mount. The argument can be
in one of two forms:
1.

2-167

any string of up to 25 characters containing only letters, digits. periods. and
hyphens, or
any string of up to 25 characters enclosed
in single quotes. However. break characters and single quotes are not allowed in
the string. The naming and use of this
switch is relevant only to the extent that
the installation operator knows what it

September 1974

means. The PLEASE command should
be used for any complex procedures or
long communications with the operator.
IWENABL

Write enable for this job, complement of
IWLOCK, default condition.

IWLOCK

Write locked for this job. This job cannot write
on this file structure and the monitor will not
update BAT blocks or the access date. If
ISING LE is given, the operator may set
hardware write lock to ensure that nothing is
written.

(drives) = the physical drives on which the units are to be mounted. A
drive argument may be used only when mounting file structures. The
drives must be in the logical unit order within the file structure. Drive
names are separated by commas. Leading and embedded drives that arc
not specified must be represented by null names ( .. DPA3). Unspecified
trailing drives may be omitted. Drive names arc as follows:
Blank, null - unspecified. UMOUNT finds one of proper type.
Two letters - controller class (e.g., DP).
Three letters - specific controller (e.g., DPA). UMOUNT finds a drive on
that controller.
Three letters and one or two digits - specific drive (e.g., DPAD, DPAl).
The user, by specifying a drive list, may force the packs to be mounted
on specific drives or controllers. If no drive (or incomplete) specification
is given, an available drive of the proper type is found.

Characteristics
The MOUNT command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the UMOUNT program, thereby destroying the user's core image .

•
Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

2-168

September 1974

Examples

.I.MOUNT PRIV,)
PRIV MOUNTED

Asks the operator to mount the file
structure PRIV.

~MOUNT PAYICOPA"OPB)/S)

Requests that the first unit of file structure
PAY be mounted on Controller A, the second
unit on any controller, the third unit on
controller B, and any remaining units on any
drives. The structure will be single access (i.e.,
available only to this job).

~MOUNT

Mount the file structure MINE.
The request is queued to the operator.
UMOUNT is waiting for the request to be
completed.
The user does not wait for confirmation .

MINEI)
OPtRATOR NOTIFIED
WAITING! ,

•
.!.MOUNT/CHECK)

The user wants to know if his request has been
processed.

NONe; pENDING
.a.R snSRe.)
!T
DSKA,OSKP,PRIV,PAY,MINE,FENCE

The request has been processed.
The user wants to know if the file
structure is in his search list.
The file structure has been added
to his search list.
The user wants the operator to select a
DECtape drive and assign it with logical name
INPUT.

.!·C
J. MOUNT

OTA INPUT.)

OPERATOR NOTIFIED
WAITING •••
INPUT (OTA5) MOUNTED
.!.MOUNT INPUT/VIOll25.)

OPERATOR NOTIFIED
WAITING, ••
INPUT (OTA5) MOUNTEP
LMOUNT INPUT OUTPUT)
OUTPUT (OTA5) MOUNTED

The request is queued to the operator.
UMOUNT is waiting for the request to be
completed.
The operator has selected DT AS.
The user asks the operator to mount the
DECtape labeled 325. He may use either
DT AS or INPUT to refer to his device. For
example. the Batch user would use INPUT
since he would not know what DEClare drive
he is assigned.
The request is queued.
UMOUNT is waiting for confirmation.
The mount is successful.
The user changes the logical name to OUTPUT. The logical name INPUT is no longer
valid.
The mount is successful.

2-169

OPSER Program

Function
The OPSER program facilitates multiple job control from a single terminal by
allowing the user to run several jobs called subjobs from his terminal. The
OPSER program acts as the supervisor of the various subjobs by allowing monitor
level or user level commands to be passed to all of the subjobs or to selected
subjobs. Output from the various subjobs may be retrieved by OPSER.
The subjobs of OPSER run on pseudo-TTYs (refer to DECsystem-IO Monitor
Calls) and all initializations of the pseudo-TTYs are performed by OPSER. The
user needs only to provide the subjob name, either an OPSER-provided subjob
number or a user assigned name. System programs, as well as user-written
programs, that require a dedicated terminal can be run as subjobs of OPSER. By
running jobs on pseudo-TTYs, OPSER is able to maintain an I/O link between
the running jobs and the user. In addition, the output from the various subjobs is
concentrated on one terminal instead of many. as was the case when each
program required its own terminal.
The OPSER program is primarily intended for use by the system operator in
controlling the separate components of the muItiprogram batch facility. However.
all users can employ this program for their own purposes. Refer to the M PB
Operator's Manual in the DECsystem- IO Software Notebooks for complete
information on OPSER. Also. Edition 3 of OPRCOM (Operator-Privileged
Commands) contains a description of OPSER commands that are available only
to the operator.

Command Format
R OPSER
OPSER signifies its readiness to process commands by typing an asterisk
if no subjobs are in use or subjobs are in a wait for an operator action.
OPSER responds with an exclamation point when a subjob is running.
Commands may be entered whenever OPSER is operating. Each
command is preceded by a colon and must be typed to sufficient length
to make it unique.
OPSER Commands
:AUTO/hh:mm
filespec

Process
the
specified file as
an automatic startup file. The execution of the
file is terminated by an end-of-file or by the
operator typing on the console. This is the
normal way that the standard subjobs are
started by the operator. The time argument is
optional; when it is given. the AUTO file is
run at the specified time. Comments can he

2-170

included in an AUTO file by preceding the
comment with a semicolon. For example.
:SLOGI1\
:LOGIN A NEW SUB.lOB
:CLOSE

Close the disk log file without opening a new
one.

:CONTI]\;UE

Continue processing the AUTO file after it has
been interrupted by a Control-C. This allows
the operator to gain control of a subjob during
auto file processing.

:CURRENT

Type the number of the current subjob (the
last one typed into). Output from another
subjob does not affect current subjob.

:DAYTIME

Obtain the current date and time.

:DEFINE xxx=n

Associate the symbol xxx as the mnemonic for
subjob number n. The symbol B is reserved for
the subjob running BATCO]\;.

:DEVICE nam:log:n

Assign the device with the physical name nam
and logical name log to subjob n. The logical
name is optional but a null field must be
typed if the name is omitted. e.g .. :DEVICE
CDR::3.

:ERROR n.m.p

Report only error messages (that is. ignore
nonerror messages from su bjob n). Message
reporting is resumed with the :REVIVE command.

:EXIT

Exit to the monitor if no subjobs are in use:
otherwise give a list of those that are running.
This should be used instead of AC. since EXIT
does not return the job to monitor mode if
there arc any active su bjobs.

:FREE

Type the first free subjob number.

:HELP

Type a text which brief1y explains the commands.

:JCONT n

Continue the specified stopped job.

:KJOB. n.m.p

Kill the specified subjobs saving all files.
Causes /Z:O to be included to KJOB so
spooled files are not queued.

:KILL n.m.p

Kill .the specified subjobs. This is identical to
KJOB.

2-171

: KSYS

hhmm

Orerator-rrivileged
OPRCOM.

command.

Refer

: LOG IN rroj.rrog

:MSGLVL 0

Cause the resronse to the :WHAT command
to include the JOSSTS hits.

:MSGLVL I

Cause the resronse to :WH/\ T command to
eliminate the JOBSTS hits.

:QUEUE , file2 (nnn>, file3 (nnn>, ...
The protection can be specified before the filename in which case it is the
default for subsequent files until changed. The full wildcard construction
can be used for either the filename or the extension.
If the user has the required privileges, he can change the protection of
files not in his directory by specifying the desired directory name. If the
directory name is before the filename, it becomes the default for all
succeeding files.
If the protection code is omitted, the result of the PROTECT command is
the same as the PRESERVE command; that is, the standard protection
code inclusively ORed with 100 is given to the file.

--------------------

This command runs the COMPIL program. which interprets the command before running PIP.

2-191

Characteristics
The PROTECT command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

.PROTECT rORM.*<157»

~PRO MAIN.MAC<12», <456>EQUIL.CBL, ADD,ALG)

2-192

QUEUE Command (1)

Function
The QUEUE command allows the user to make entries in several system queues the input queue for the Batch system, and the output spooling queues for the
line printer, the card punch, the paper-tape punch. and the plotter. The QUEUE
command also provides the means of obtaining listings of the entries in the
queues.

Command Formats

QUEUE INP: jobname = control file specification. log file specification
To make an entry in the Batch input queue. INP:.

QUEUE output queue name: jobname =

list of input specifications

To make an entry in an output spooling queue.
3.

QUEUE listing file specifications/LIST =

list of queue names

To obtain a listing of the entries in a queue.
4.

The following six commands can be substituted for the various formats of the
QUEUE command:
a.

CPUNCH jobname = list of input specifications equivalent to
QUEUE COP: jobname = list

PLOT jobname
PL T: jobname

PRINT jobname = list of input
QUEUE LPT: jobname = list

PUNCH jobname = list of input specifications{ I) equivalent to
QUEUE PTP: jobname = list

SUBMIT jobname = control file name. log file name equivalent to
QUEUE INP: jobname = control file. log file

TPUNCH jobname = list
QUEUE PTP: jobname =

list of input specifications equivalent to QUEUE
list
specifications

equivalent

of input specifications equivalent to
list

'The PUNCH command can be redefined by the installation to he equivalent to QUEUE CDI': johname

2-193

lis!.

Queue names are taken from the following list:
INP: (I:)
LPT: (L:)
COP: (C:)
PTP: (PT:)
PLT: (PL:)

Batch input queue
line printer output queue, default condition
card punch output queue
paper-tape punch output queue
plotter output queue

Control file specification is the file specification, plus switches and keyword
parameters, for the control file being submitted to the Batch input queue. This
file can be on any file structure that the user has access to: the default is DSK:.
The filename is required, but the extension can be omitted: the default is .CTL.
The asterisk construction is legal for the filename or extension and is the only
way a user can submit multiple control files to Batch with a single QUEUE
command.
Log file specification is the file specification for the file that is to be used to
record action taken during the execution of the control file. This file can be in
any directory on any file structure in which the user can write. The default is the
same file structure in which the control file resides. If the filename is missing. the
log file is given the same name as the control file. If the extension is omitted. it is
.LOG.
lobname is the name of the job being entered into the queue. The default
jobname is the name of the first file in the request not the first file given. These
names arc different when the first file given does not yet exist.
Input specifications arc the file specifications for the disk files to be processed.
and the various switches and keyword parameters that aid in constructing the
queue entry. The files can be on any file structure that the queue processor has
access to: the default is DSK:. The files can be in any directory. provided that the
user has read-access to them: the default is the user's directory. The filename is
optional: the default is * for the first filename. The default for subsequent
filenames is the last filename used. Note that the asterisk construction is legal
only in the input specifications. The extension can be omitted because each queue
has a default extension for the files to be processed. These default extensions arc:
.CTL .LPT .CDP .PTP .PLT -

Batch input queue
line printer queue
card punch queue
paper-tape punch queue
plotter queue

The listing file specification is the description of the listing file. The default for
the listing file destination is TTY unless a filename is specified. In this case. the
listing goes to the disk. The default extension for the queue listing is .LSQ. If no
queue names arc specified. all queues for all the jobs of all users arc listed.
The user can obtain queue listings for specific project-programmer numbers by
following the queue name with the desired project-programmer numbers enclosed
in square brackets (e.g .. QUECE/LIST = INP: [27.235]. [10.47]). The wildcard
construction can be used for the project number or programmer number. If no
queue names are specified but a project-programmer number is given. all queues

2-194

for all jobs of the specified user are listed. For example. QUEUE/LIST
[27,400] lists the entries in all queues for the user [27.400].
Switches - Three categories of switches are provided. The first category contains
the switches that define the operation; the second contains the switches that can
appear only once because they affect the entire request; the third contains the
switches specific to each file. In general. switches that precede the filename
become the default for all succeeding files. This is true also for a device name. an
extension. or a directory name that precedes a filename.
Queue-Operation Switches - Only one of this type of switch can be placed m a
command string. because these switches define the type of queue request. This
switch may appear anywhere in the command string.
General Queue Switches - Each of these switches can appear only once in a
command string. They affect the entire request. generally in terms of scheduling.
These switches can appear anywhere in the command string.
File-Control Switches - These switches affect the individual files in a request and
must be adjacent to the filename in the command string. In order to change the
defaults for the rest of the files. however. these switches must appear before a
filename. For example. the command string
QUEUE FILEA,FILEB/DISP:REN.FILEC
indicates that the DISPOSE switch is only for FILEB. The command string
QUEUE IDlSP:REN FILEAFILEB.FILEC
indicates that the DISPOSE switch applies to all three files.
In the table of switches below. the following conventions have been used:
ALL

- Switches that can appear for both the Batch input queue
and the output queues.

INPUT

- Switches that can appear only for the Batch input queue.

LIST

- Switches that can appear only for the listing file specification.

OUTPUT - Switches that can appear only for the output queues.
Note that if an argument to a switch is omitted. the colon preceding the argument
must also be omitted. Otherwise the argument is assumed to be zero and not the
default value.

2-195

SWITCH

CATEGORY

QUEUES

MEANING

IAFTER:t

General

ALL

Process the request
after the specified
time. t is in the form
hhmm (time of day)
or + hhmm (time later ,than the current
time). A colon may
be used to separate
the hours from the
minutes
(e.g.,
hh:
mm). The resulting
AFTER time must be
less than the DEADLINE time. If the
switch, or the value
of the switch, is omitted, no AFTER constraints are assumed.

IBEFORE:t

General

OUTPUT

Queue only the files
with creation dates
before time t where
t = dd-mmm-yy
hhmm.

IBEGIN

File Control

OUTPUT

Start the output on
the nth page. card. or
foot. The default is to
begin output on the
first unit.

ICARDS:n

General

INPUT

Use n (decimal) as
the maximum number of cards that can
be punched by the
job. If the switch IS
omitted. no cards are
punched.
If the
switch IS given with
no value. 2000 cards
is assumed as the
maximum.

ICHARGE:a(1}

General

ALL

Charge the run to the
specified account.

Not yet implemented.

2-196

SWITCH

CATEGORY

QUEUES

MEANING

ICOPIES:n

File Control

OUTPUT

Repeat the output the
specified number of
times (n must be less
than 64). The default
is one copy. If more
than 63 copies are
desired, two requests
must be made.

ICORE:n

General

INPUT

Use n (in decimal K)
as the maximum amount of core memory
that the job can use.
If the switch is omitted, the maximum of
25K is assumed; if
the
value of the
switch is omitted, a
maximum of 40K is
assumed.

ICREATE

Queue Operation

ALL

Make a new entry In
the specified queue.
This switch is the default for the queueoperation switches.

IDEADLINE:t

General

ALL

Process the request
before the specified
time. t is in the form
hhmm (time of day)
or + hhmm (time later than the current
time). A colon may
be used to separate
the hours from the
minutes
(e.g.,
hh:
mm). The resulting
DEADLINE
time
must be greater than
the I AI-TER time. If
the switch, or the
value of the switch is
omitted, no DEADLINE constraints are
assumed.

2-197

SWITCH

CATEGORY

QUEUES

MEANING

IDEFER(l)

Queue Operation

ALL

Make a new entry in
the specified queue,
but the request is deferred
un ti I LOGOUT.

IDELETE

File Control

ALL

Same as IOISPOSE:
RENAME.

IDEPEND:n

General

INPUT

Specifies the initial
value of the dependency count in decimal. When used with
IMODIFY. this
switch changes the
dependency count of
another job. If n is a
signed number (+
or-). that number is
added to or subtracted from the dependent job's count.
If n is not a signed
number. the dependent job's count is
changed to n. If this
switch is omitted. no
dependency
IS
assumed.

File Control

ALL

Delete the file after
spooling.

IDISPOSE:PRESERVE File Control

ALL

Save the file after
spooling. This is the
def~lult for all files
except those with extensions
of
.LST.
.TMP. and if protection is Oxx. .CDP .
. LPT .. PLT.. PTP.

IDISPOSE:RENAME

ALL

Rename the file from
the specified directory
immediately. remove
it from the logged-out
quota. and delete it
after spooling. This is
the default for files

IDISPOSE:DELETE

File Control

Not yd implemented.

2-198

September 1974

SWITCH

CATEGORY

QUEUES

MEANING

with extensions of
.LST, .TMP, and if
Ox x,
protection
is
.CDP, .LPT, .PLT,
.PTP.

Queue Operation

LIST

List the entries in the
queue, but do not
update the queues.
Therefore,
the list
may not be an up-todate listing of th~
queues but the listing
will be faster than
with ILIST.

IFEET:n

General

INPUT

Use n (in decimal) as
the maximum number of feet of paper
tape that the job can
punch. If the switch
is omitted, no paper
tape is punched. If
the value is omitted,
the default IS 10*
B + 20 feet. where B
is the number of
blocks in the request.

IFILE:ASCII

File Control

OUTPUT

Specify that the input
file format is to be
interpreted as ASCII
text. This is assumed
for all files with extensions other than
.DAT.

IFILE:COBOL

File Control

OUTPUT

Specify that the input
file format IS to be
interpreted as COBOL SIXBIT text.

IFILE:ELEVEN

File Control

OUTPUT

Specify that the input
file format is to be
interpreted as four 8bit bytes in each 36bit word. These bytes
are arranged as follows: 1st byte is in
bits 10-17; 2nd byte.
in bits 2-9; 3rd byte,
in bits 28-35; 4th
byte, in bits 20-27.

2-199

SWITCH

CATEGORY

QUEUES

MEANING

IFILE:FORTRAN

File Control

OUTPUT

Specify that the input
file format is to be
interpreted as FORTRAN ASCII text
(obeys FORTRAN
control
characters).
This is assumed if the
user specifies the extension .OAT explicitly.

IFORMS:a

General

OUTPUT

Place the output on
the
named
forms.
The argument to the
switch must be six
alphanumeric characters. Normal forms
(14 x II) are used if
this switch is omitted.
Narrow forms are 8112 x II.

OUTPUT

Output block headers
at beginning of the
file if I (default); do
not output headers if

IHEADER:O or I

File Control

O.
IHELP

IKILL

Print a message givIng the general format of the command
string and explains
the dialogue that IS
entered if the user
needs additional help.
ALL

Queue Operation

2-200

Remove the specified
entry from the specified queue. This
switch requires an
output specification;
it does not default to
LPT:* The IKILL
switch can be used
for deleting a prevIously submitted request as long as the
request has not been
started.

SWITCH

CATEGORY

QUEUES

MEANING

ILIMIT:n

General

OUTPUT

limit the output to
the specified number
of pages, cards, feet,
or minutes.

ILIST

Queue Operation

LIST

list the specified entries in the queue;
the default entries are
those for queues for
all the jobs of all
users.

IlOG

File Control

OUTPUT (lPT)

Define the file that
the spoolers will use
to record their output. The default is
jobname. lOG.

IMODIFY

Queue Operation

All

Alter the specified
parameters
in
the
specified jobs; this
SWitch requires that
the user have access
rights to the job. It
also requires a queue
name; it does not default to the lPT. This
switch can be used to
modify a previously
submitted request as
long as the request
has not been started.

INEW

File Control

ALL

Accept request even
if file does not yet
exist. This is the default for the log file
of Batch input queue.

INOTE:a

File Control

OUTPUT

Output the specified
text (a) in the output.

INUll

General

OUTPUT

Do not output an error message if there
are no files III the
request and do not
create a queue entry.
This is assumed at
KJOB time.

2-201

SWITCH

CATEGORY

QUEUES

MEANING

/OKBINARY

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Print files whose extensions include binary information.
Normally files with
extensions .SAV,
.sHR. .LOW, .REL,
and .HGH will not
be in print queues.

/OKNONE

File Control

OUTPUT

Do not produce message if no files match
the wildcard construction. However, a totally null queue request produces a fatal
error message.

/OUTPUT:n

General

INPUT

Cause job to terminate with a /Z:n to
KJOB (n is from 0 to
4).
N=O
Suppress all
normal queuing performed
at
LOGOUT
time.
N=I
Queue only
the log file.
N=2
Queue
only
the
log
file
and spooled
output (e.g .. *
.LPT).
N=3
Queue the log
file. spooled
output. and *
.LST files.

2-202

SWITCH

QUEUES

CATEGORY

MEANING

N=4

Queue the log
file, spooled
output. *.LST
files, and any
reg uests deferred to LOGOUT time
(default).
IPAGE:n

General

INPUT

Use n (decimal) as
the maximum number of pages of output that the job can
print. If the switch is
omitted, the maxImum is 200 pages: if
only the value is omitted. a maximum of
2000 pages can be
printed.

IPAPER:x

File Control

OUTPUT

Identical
to
IPUNCH:x. IPRINT:
x.
ITAPE:x,
or
IPLOT:x.

IPHYSICAL

file Control

ALL

Suppress logical device names for the
specified device.

IPLOT:ASCII

File Control

OUTPUT (PL T)

Plot the file in ASCII
mode. If the IPLOT
switch is omitted. the
file is plotted in the
data mode specified
in the file.

IPLOT:BINARY

File Control

OUTPUT (PLT)

Plot the file in binary
mode. If the IPLOT
switch is omitted. the
file IS plotted In the
data mode specified
in the file.

IPLOT:IMAGE

File Control

OUTPUT(PL T)

Plot the file in image
mode. If the IPLOT
switch is omitted, the
file is plotted In the
data mode specified
in the fiJc.

2-203

SWITCH

QUEUES

CATEGORY

MEANING

IPRINT:ARROW

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Convert all control
characters to up-arrow format except
011-015 and 020-024.
This is the default.

IPRINT:ASCII

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Send the file to the
line printer with no
changes.

IPRINT:OCTAL

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Prin t th e file in octal.

IPRINT:SUPPRESS

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Suppress all character-control characters
except
for
ASCII
code characters LF
and CR; this switch
implies the use of the
IPRINT:ARROW.
Equivalent to operator command to
spooler (S U PPRESS).

IPRIORITY:n

General

ALL

Give the specified external priority (n =
o to 62) to the request. A larger number is greater priority.
The default is 10 if
no switch is given.
and 20 if a switch is
gIven
without
the
value.

IPROTECT:nnn

General

ALL

Specify a protection
nnn (in octal) for this
job or queue entry. If
the switch. or the
value of the switch. is
omitted. the standard
protection is assumed.

IPUNCH:026

File Control

OUTPUT (COP)

Punch files in 026
Hollerith code. If the
IPUNCH switch is
not given. the files
are punched according to the data mode
of the file.

2-204

SWITCH

CATEGORY

QUEUES

MEANING

IPUNCH:ASCII

File Control

OUTPUT (COP)

Punch files in ASCII
card code. If the
IPUNCH switch IS
not given, the files
are punched according to the data mode
of the file.

IPUNCH:BINARY

File Control

OUTPUT (COP)

Punch files 1D binary
card format. If the
IPUNCH switch IS
not given, the files
are punched according to the data mode
of the file.

IPUNCH:D029

File Control

OUTPUT (COP)

Punch files 1D the old
DEC 029 card code.
If the
IPUNCH
switch is not given,
the files are punched
according to the data
mode of the file.

IPUNCH:IMAGE

File Control

OUTPUT (COP)

Punch files 1D image
mode.
If
the
IPUNCH switch IS
not given, the files
are punched according to the data mode
of the file.

IREMOVE

File Control

OUTPUT

Remove the file from
the
queue.
This
switch IS valid only
with the IMODIFY
switch and can be
used to remove a previously submitted file
as long as the Batch
System
has
not
started processing the
job.

IREPORT:code

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Print the specified report within a COBOL
report file. Code can
be up to 12 characters in length.

2-205

SWITCH

CATEGORY

QUEUES

MEANING

IRESTART:O or I

General

INPUT

A value of 0 (default)
means the job cannot
be requeued or restarted by the operator
after a system crash.
A message is sent to
the job's log file. A
value of I means the
job will be requeued
or restarted. The job
should not be restarta ble if there are
changes to the permanent file directory.

ISEQ:n

General

ALL

Specify a sequence
number to aid In
identifying a request
to be modified or deleted.

ISINCE:t

General

OUTPUT

Queue only the files
with creation dates
after the specified
time t where t is in
the form dd-mmm-yy
hhmm.

ISPACING:DOUBLE

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Double-space the output lines.

ISPACING:SINGLE

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Single-space
printed
lines
fault).

ISPACING:TRIPLE

File Control

OUTPUT (LPT)

Triple-space
printed lines.

ISTART:n

File Control

ALL

Start on n line of the
file. If the switch. or
the value of the
switch. is omitted. the
Batch System starts
with the first line.

ISTRS

File Control

OUTPUT

Search for the file on
all structures In the
search list and take
each occurrence. The
default is to take just
the first occurrence of
the file.

2-206

the
(de-

the

SWITCH

CATEGORY

QUEUES

MEANING

ITAG:xxx

File Control

INPUT

Start at the statement
labelled xxx (up to 5
characters)
of the
control
file.
Equivalent to GOTOxxx
at the beginning of
the control file.

IT APE:ASCII

File Control

OUTPUT (PTP)

Punch the tape In
ASCII code. If the
ITAPE switch IS not
given, the files are
punched according to
the data mode of the
file.

ITAPE:BINARY

File Control

OUTPUT (PTP)

Punch the tape In
binary mode. If the
ITAPE switch IS not
given, the files are
punched according to
the data mode of the
file.

ITAPE:IBINARY

File Control

OUTPUT (PTP)

Punch the tape In
image-binary
mode.
If the IT APE switch
is not given, the files
are punched according to the data mode
of the file.

ITAPE:IMAGE

File Control

OUTPUT (PTP)

Punch the tape In
Image mode. If the
IT APE switch IS not
specified, the files are
punched according to
the data mode of the
file.

ITIME:hhmmss

General

INPUT

Specify the central
processor time limit
for the job. A colon
may
be
used
to
separate the hours,
minutes. and seconds.
If no switch is specified. the limit is 5
minutes; if the switch
is specified without a
value, the limit is I
hour.

2-207

CATEGORY

SWITCH

ITPLOT:n

General

IUNIQUE: 0 or I

General

QUEUES

INPUT

MEANING

Use n
(decimal
minutes) as the maximum amount of plotting time allowed for
the job. If the switch
is omitted, no plotter
time is allowed; if the
value is omitted but
the switch IS given,
the maximum plotter
time is 10 minutes.
Run any number of
Batch jobs under this
project-programmer
number at the same
time, if O. Runs only
one Batch job at any
one time, if I (default).

IUNPRESERVED

General

OUTPUT

Output file only
not preserved.

IZDEFER(I)

Queue Operation

ALL

Create a new entry in
a queue and defer it
until
LOGOUT;
however, the deferred
file is zeroed first so
that all previous
IDEFER requests
from the current job
are deleted.

Characteristics
The QUEUE command (and its associated variations):
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the QUEUE program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Does not require LOG IN when only queue listings are desired.
Depends on FTQCOM which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Not yet implemented.

2-208

Associated Messages
Re'fer to Chapter 4.

Examples

..!..QUEUE FILEA, FILES)

Enter file FILEA.LPT and FILEB.LPT
in the line-printer queue under the
jobname of FILEA.

~QUEUE INPt=TEST~

Enter file TEST.CTL in the Batch input
queue under jobname TEST and log file
with name TEST. LOG.
Enter file MAN.CTL in the Batch input
queue under jobname PA YR and log
file with name MAN.LOG .

..!..QUEUE DSICIA.h/t.IST)

Place a queue listing of all jobs into file
A.X in the user's disk area .

• QUEUE INPlrPEED=rILEA/CPEATE)
IPprOIUTy:4/TIMEI115
Place

file
FILEA.CTL
III
the
Batch input queue with the jobname
FREED. An external priority of 4 and
CPU time limit of one minute and five
seconds are set for the job. The log file
is named FILEA.LOG.

~QUEU~ INPITEST=/~rLL)

~QUEUE

Remove
the entry corresponding to
TEST.CTL from the Batch input queue.

INPIJ08NAM:/MODIFY/TIMEI200)
Alter the time parameter of the entry
corresponding to JOBNAM.CTL in the
Batch input queue.

£QUrUE INPI=JCB.CTL/PAGESISOO/TPLCTI20)

Establish a limit of 500 pages and 20
minutes of plotting on the output
generated by this job .

.J..0tJEUE PLTI=JOB.PLTILIMITI20)

2-209

Queue a file to PLTSPL with a limit of
20 minutes of plotting time.

QUOLST Program

Function
The QUOLST program informs the user of both the amount of disk space he has
used and the amount he has left on each file structure in his search list. This
program also returns the amount of free space that the system has left for all
users of the structure. Free system space on structures not in the user's search list
is not output. This information can be obtained by typing SYSTAT IF.
The output given for each file structure consists of 1) the structure name, 2) the
number of blocks allocated, and 3) the numbers of blocks left in the logged-in
quota, in the logged-out quota, and on the structure. The number of blocks
allocated is the same as the number output in the summary of the DIRECT
command when the I ALLOC switch is used.
Note that the QUOLST program does not return statistics for a user logged-in
under [1,2] since this project-programmer number has infinite quotas.

Command Format
R QUOLST

Characteristics
The R QUOLST command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the QUOLST program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Examples
.!.R QUOLST)
USE~t

D5KAt

DSKBI
DSKC'I

27,400 STR
to
491

1000
9509
10000

2-210

lISED

LEFTtCIN)

100
4509

4'703

4240

5000

396

(OUT)

(SYS)

The user is over quota on DSKA: and must delete
files before he can logout.

.R aUOLST)

llHf I
STR

31!5t'1
LEFTICIN)

DSKA:

USEO
1022

OSK~I

1735

DSKCI

78265
2000

-22

2-211

(OUT)
-922

(SYS)
4215

8265

1000

6378

RCommand

Function
The R command loads a core image from the system device and starts it at the
location specified within the file (.JBSA). It is equivalent to RUN SYS: file.ext
core and is the usual way to run a system program that does not have a direct
monitor command to run it.
This command
this action and
contain zeroes
programs to be
R command.

clears all of user core. However, programs should not count on
should explicitly clear those areas of core that are expected to
(i.e., programs should be self-initializing). This action allows
restarted by a 'C, START sequence without having to do another

On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missing, a null record is output
before the EOF for the missing segment so that two EOFs cannot occur
consecutively. Therefore, a saved null segment does not appear as a logical EOT
(2 EOFs in a row).

Command Format
R file.ext core
Arguments are the same as in the RUN command except that SYS: is
used as the default device. (In nondisk monitors, the default is the generic
name that matches the system device.) Refer to the RUN command for a
discussion of the core argument.
The extension applies to the low file, not the high file. An extension of
.SHR, then .HGH, is assumed for the high file. If the user types an
extension of .SHR or .HGH, the extension is treated as a null extension
since .SHR and .HGH are confusing as low file extensions.

Characteristics
The R command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs a system program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

2-212

Examples
.J.~ PIP)

*.1R
*

PIP 5)

2-213

REASSIGN Command

Function
The REASSIGN command allows one job to pass a device to a second job
without having the device go through the monitor device pool (restricted or
unrestricted). Both restricted and unrestricted devices can be reassigned. This
command, applied to DECtapes, clears the copy of the directory currently in core,
forcing the next directory reference to read a new copy from the tape, but does
not clear the logical name assignment. If a device is INITed, a RELEASE UUO
is performed unless the user issuing the command is reassigning the device to
himself.

Command Format
REASSIGN dev job
dev = the physical or logical name of the device to be reassigned. This
argument is required.
job = the number of the job to which the device is to be reassigned. If
no job is specified, the device is reassigned to the job issuing the
command. This is useful when the user wants to force the next directory
reference to come from the tape instead of core.
A logical name which is also a physical name can be reassigned only if
the job issuing the command and the job to which the device is to be
reassigned have the same project-programmer number. or the user issuing
the command has operator privileges (logged-in under [1,2] or logged-in
at aPR). However, a logical name cannot be duplicated; i.e., two devices
cannot have the same logical name.

Characteristics
The REASSIGN command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.
Does not operate when the device is currently transmitting data.

Restrictions
The job's controlling terminal cannot be reassigned.

2-214

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
.!.REASSIGN LPTt17.)

Reassign the line printer to job 17.
Reassign the card punch to job 4 .

2-215

REATTA Program

Function
The REA TTA program allows a user to transfer his job from one terminal to
another. Unlike the ATTACH command, REATTA does not require a password
or that the terminal be of the same type that LOGIN recognizes in order to run
the job. For example, usually a [l,2] job can run only on a local terminal.
However, the REATTA program can be used to attach a [l,2] job from a local
terminal to a remote terminal.
Before reattaching his job, the user should verify that the terminal to which he is
attaching is turned on and working properly. Otherwise, it might be difficult to
retrieve the job.

Command Format
.R REATTA
REA TTA responds by asking for the new terminal name.
TYPE NEW TTY NAME:
The user answers with either the new terminal name (e.g., CTY, TTY2)
OR NUMBER (E.G., 2). REATT A then responds with
FROM JOB n

on the old terminal, and
NOW ATTACHED TO JOB n

on the new terminal.

Characteristics
The R REATTA command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the REATTA program, thereby destroying the user's core image.

2-216

Restrictions
The R REA ITA command is not available to Batch users.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
,LR PEATTA)
TYPF: NTi:W TTY NAME I

fRO~ JO~

TTY27 )

;appears on old terminal

.!.

NOW ATTACHED TO JOB 7

;appears on TTY 27

.!.

2-217

REENTER Command

Function
The REENTER command restarts a program at a location pre-specified in the
program as an alternate entry point. Although the use of this alternate entry point
varies among programs, it is frequently used for a partial reinitialization of the
program. (The START command is used for a complete reinitialization and the
CONTINUE command is used for no reinitialization.) Note that the DDT
command resembles the REENTER command because it also restarts the
program at an alternate entry point. However, this point is fixed since it is the
beginning address of DDT.
The REENTER command copies the saved program counter value from .JBPC
into .JBOPC and starts the program at an alternate entry point specified in
.JBREN (must be set by the user or his program). If the job was executing a
UUO when it was interrupted (i.e., in exec mode but not in TTY input wait or
SLEEP mode), the monitor continues the job until the UUO is completed and
then traps to the REENTER address in .JBREN. If the job is in TTY input wait
or SLEEP mode, the trap to the REENTER address occurs immediately and
.JBOPC contains the address of the UUO. If the job is in user mode, the trap
also occurs immediately. Therefore, it is always possible to continue the
interrupted program after trapping by executing a JRSTF@.JBOPC.

Command Format
REENTER

Characteristics
The REENTER command:
Places the terminal in user mode.
Requires core.
Requires the user to have a job number.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Example

2-218

RENAME Command (1)

Function
The RENAME command changes one or more items of the file specification of
files on disk or DECtape.

Command Format
RENAME arg
arg = a pair of file specifications separated by an equal sign, or a string
of such pairs separated by commas:
RENAME newl = oldl,new2 = old2, ...
If the new filename is specified without an extension, the null extension is
assumed. Device or file structure names can be specified only with the
new filename and remain in effect until changed or until the end of the
command string is reached. In addition, a protection may be specified with
the new filename and remains in effect only for that filename. This command accepts the full wildcard construction.

Characteristics
The RENAME command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the PIP program, thereby destroying the user's core image .

•
Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

This command runs the COMPIL program. which interprets the command before running PIP.

2-219

September 1974

Example

.RE~AME Tl1. M AC=T1.MAC)
FILV,S PF.:N AMED ,
Tl.~AC

£RENA~E *.8AC=*.MAC)

FILES

RENA~FDI

T11."1AC
12. "1AC

T3. MIIC
AP~NAME TEST.MIIC<057>=TFXT.~AC)

FUrS Pf.NIIMEI:l1
TFST,MAC
!.

2-220

RESOURCES Command

Function
The RESOURCES command prints the names of all available devices (except
TTY's and PTY's), all file structures, and all physical units not in file structures
(unless they are down or nonexistent).

Command Format
RESOURCES

Characteristics
The RESOURCES command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.

Example
.PF~)
5SK~,DSKB,DSKC,DPRO,DP~1,CDRO,2,PTpn,LPTO,1,2,3,DT~O,3 ,4,5,6,

7,MT.O,1,2,PTPO,CDPO,PLTO,OISO
.!..

2-221

REWIND Command

Function
The REWIND command rewinds a magnetic tape or a DECtape. This command
is equivalent to the PIP command string:
dev: (MW)_

Command Format
REWIND dev:
dev: = a magnetic tape (MT An) or a DECtape (DTAn).

Characteristics
The REWIND command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Runs the COMPIL program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
Depends on FTCCLX which is normally absent in the DECsystem-1040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4

Examples

2-222

RUN Command

Function
The RUN command loads a core image from a retrievable storage device and
starts at the location specified within the file (.JBSA).
If the program has two segments, both the low and high segments are set up. If
the high file has extension .SHR (as opposed to .HGH), the high segment will be
shared. Therefore, if the user has RUN (or GET) the same program, 110 will not
usually be required for the high -segment. A two-segment program may have a
low file extension (.LOW).
The RUN command clears all of user core. However, programs should not count
on this action and should explicitly clear those areas of core that are expected to
contain zeroes (i.e., the programs should be self-initializing). This action allows
programs to be restarted by a 'C, START sequence without having to do another
RUN command.
On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missIng, a null record is output
before the EOF for the missing segment so that two EOFs cannot occur
consecutively. Therefore, a saved null segment does not appear as a logical EOT
(2 EOFs in a row).

Command Format
RUN dev:file.ext [directory] core
dev: = the logical or physical name of the device contaInIng the core
image. The default device name is DSK:. (In nondisk monitors, the
default is the generic name that matches the system device.)
file.ext = the name of the file containing the core image; .ext applies to
the low file, not the high file. An extension of .SHR, then .HGH, is assumed for the high file. If the user types an extension of .SHR or .HG H,
the extension is treated as a null extension since .SHR and .HGH are
confusing as low file extensions. The default filename is the job's current
name as set by the last R, RUN, GET, SAVE, or SSA VE command, the
last SETNAM UUO, or the last command which ran a program.
[directory] = the directory name; required only if core image file
located in a disk area other than the user's.

core = the amount of core to be assigned to the sum of the low and
high segments if different from minimum core needed to load the
program or from the core argument of the SAVE command which saved
the file.
If core

the minimum low segment size and the sum of the minimum low segment and the high segment size,
then the core assignment is the size of both the low and high segments to
be used.
Core arguments can be specified in units of 1024 words or 512 words (a
page) by following the number with K or P, respectively. For example, 2P
represents 2 pages or 1024 words. If K or P is not specified, K (1024
words) is assumed.
Note that on KA 10 based systems (DECsystem-1040, 1050, 1055), the
minimum unit of allocation is 1024 words. Therefore, all arguments are
rounded up to the nearest multiple of 1024 words (e.g., 3P is treated as
2K on a KA 10 based system).
Since previous core is returned, MTA must have the core argument
because there is no directory telling how much core is for the low
segment. Refer to Appendix D.

Characteristics
The R UN command:
Places the terminal in user mode.

Restrictions
On systems with a large amount of core memory, the user should not specify a
core argument that forces the high segment to start higher than 400000 (i.e., a
core argument of greater than 128K) unless the program's high segment is
location independent. If this is done, the ILLEGAL UUO error message is likely
to occur.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples

.!.RU~j

HIST!;T

.~W~i

nu..3:TFST1)

(10,63])

2-224

SAVE Command

Function
The SAVE command writes out a core image of the user's core area on the
specified device. It saves any user program (two-segment sharable, one-segment
nonsharable, or two-segment non sharable) as one or two files. Later, when the
program is loaded by a GET, R, or RUN command, it will be nonsharable. If
DDT was loaded with the program, the entire core area is written; if not, the area
starting from zero up through the program break (as specified by .JBFF) is
written. The save command stores JOBVER in .RBVER when saving .LOW and
.SAV files; and it stores JOBHVR in .RBVER when saving .HGH and .SHR files.
Refer to DECsystem-1O M~nitor Calls for a description of the job data area
locations referenced by this command.
The SAVE command should be used instead of the SSA VE command when
debugging a two-segment program. Refer to Appendix D for additional
information on the SAVE command.
On magnetic tape, if the low or high segment is missing, a null record is output
before the EOF for the missing segment so that two EOFs cannot occur
cons~cutively. Therefore, a saved null segment does not appear as a logical EaT
(2 EOFs in a row).
When running under a virtual memory system, DAEMON will be called on a
SA VE command if any pages are paged out or the job has a non-contiguous core
image.

Command Format
SA VE dev:file.ext [proj,prog] core
dev = the device on which the core image file is to be written. The
default device name is DSK:. In nondisk monitors, the default is the
generic name that matches the system device. The colon following the
device name is required if a device is specified.
file.ext = the name to be assigned to the core image file. The default
filename is the job's current name as set by the last R,RUN GET, SAVE,
or SSA VE command, the last command which ran a program (e.g.,
DIRECT), or the last SETNAM UUO.
ext applies to the file within the low segment, not within the high
segment.
[proj,prog]
the name of the disk area on which the core image file is
to be written.
core = the amount of core in which the program is to be run. This value
is stored in JOBDAT as the job's core area (.JBCOR) and is used by
subsequent RUN and GET commands. This argument is optional.
2-225

September 1974

Core arguments can be specified in units of 1024 words or 512 words (a
page) by following the number with K or P respectively. For example, 2P
represents 2 pages or 1024 words. If K or P is not specified, K (1024
words) is assumed.
Note that on KA 10 based systems (DECsystem-1040, 1050, 1055), the
minimum unit of allocation is 1024 words. Therefore, all arguments are
rounded up to the nearest multiple of 1024 words (e.g .. 3P is treated as
2K on a KA 10 based system).
If core is omitted, only the number of blocks required by the core image
area (as explained in the RUN command description) is assumed.

Characteristics
The SAVE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Requires core.
Does not operate when a device is currently transmitting data.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Example

,SAVE) ,
JOB SAVED
.l.5AVF: DTA3:TFST)
JOB SAVF:O

2-226

SCHED Command

Function
The SCHED command types out the schedule bits as set by the operator. This
information allows the user to determine the use of the system (e.g., regular
timesharing or batch jobs only) before he logs in. The schedule bits are as
follows:

o
I
2
4
100
200
400

regular timesharing.
no further logins allowed except from CTY.
no further logins from remote terminals, and no answering of data
sets.
batch jobs only.
device mounts can be done without operator intervention.
unspooling allowed.
no operator coverage.

Command Format
SCHED

Characteristics
The SCHED command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN.
Depends on output from the SET SCHED command which
absent in the DECsystem-1040.

normally

Example
• SC HEn,)
(\00(')400

Regular timesharing, but no operator
coverage .

.!.SCH.n,)
000003

No logins allowed from local or
remote terminals and data sets are
not answered .

.!.,SCHrT' )

Regular timesharing, but no operator
coverage. Device mounts can be done
without operator interventions.

0005()O

2-227

SEND Command

Function
The SEND command provides a mechanism for one-way interconsole communication. (This command replaces the TALK command.) A line of information is
transmitted from one terminal to another, with the identification of the terminal
sending the information. With remote communications capabilities, SEND is able
to differentiate between stations.
When the SEND command is sent from the central station operator's terminal
(OPR) or from a terminal logged in as [1,2], it allows a broadcast of a line of
information to all non-slaved terminals (including remote terminals) in the system.
This allows important information to be dispersed, such as system shutdown or
hardware problems. SEND ALL messages do not go to slaved terminals unless
the SET TTY NO GAG bit is set to permit reception when the terminal is busy.
A busy test is made on single-destination messages before the message is sent
unless the sender or the receiver of the message is OPR or a job logged-in as
[1,2]. The receiver of the message is considered busy if his terminal is not at
monitor command level. If the receiver is busy, the sender receives the message
BUSY and the information is not sent, unless the receiving terminal has the TTY
NO GAG bit set (refer to the SET TTY command). If the receiving terminal is
turned off, the information appears to have been sent, since the hardware cannot
detect this condition on hard-wired terminals.

Command Format
SEND dev:text
or
SEND JOB n text
dev = any physical terminal name (CTY included) or OPRnn. If OPRnn
is specified, the message is sent to the operator at station nn. If OPR (nn
is null) is specified, the message is sent to the operator at the user's
logical station. If the terminal sending the message is the operator's
terminal, the argument may be ALL to provide the broadcast operation.
n = the job number to which the message is to be sent.
the message printed on the receiving terminal appears as follows:
;;TTYn: - text
where
n is the TTY sending the message, and text is the message. A bell
sounds on the receiving terminal when the message is sent.

2-228

Characteristics
The SEND command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Does not require LOGIN .

•
Restrictions
The SEND command is not available to the Batch user.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
~5END

O~RI

PL~A5F.

WRITF.-ENABLE OTAl)

.!.

2-229

September 1974

SET BLOCKSIZE Command

Function
The SET BLOCKSIZE command sets a default blocksize (in words) for the
specified magnetic tape.

Command Format
SET BLOCK SIZE dev:nnnn
dev: = MT An: where n is the number of the magnetic tape drive for
which the blocksize is to be set, or a logical name associated with a
physical magnetic tape. The user must have the magnetic tape assigned to
him. This argument is required.
nnnn = a decimal number between 3 and 4094 designating the block size
for this magnetic tape. No additional checking is done for the legality of
the specified number besides the check for the maximum 4094 and a minimum of 3. This argument is required.

Characteristics
The SET BLOCKSIZE command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Depends on both FTSET and FTMTSET which are normally absent in
the DECsystem-l040.

Examples
~S~T 8LCCKSIZF, M,TA2:3956~
.~S5IGN ~TA4IN~MEI)

MTA4 ~SSIGNF.D
~SET RLOCKSIZE

NAM~12000)

2-230

September 1974

SET BREAK Command

Function
The SET BREAK command is used (KIlO processors only) primarily during the debugging process. It is primarily useful when the program which is being debugged:
will not fail when DDT has been loaded.
destroys DDT when DDT is loaded.
destroys the contents of a memory location at an unpredictable
point during program execution.
It is possible to break when the specified location is read from, written into,
and/or fetched. It is also possible to break on monitor references to item's in the
user's address space. This is useful when the monitor is storing or retrieving
arguments to/from unexpected locations in the user's address space because of
malformed UUO argument lists.
If the user is breaking on a WRITE condition. the write condition causing the
break will not yet have been executed. Therefore, the instruction located at PC and
all operands should be examined before continuing program execution.

Command Format
SET BREAK AT adr ON condition
SET BREAK NO condition
SET BREAK NONE
where:

AT and ON are optional portions of the command line.
adr is an octal number in the range 0-777777, representing a user
virtual address.
condition is one or more reason for allowing the break to occur.

Multiple conditions may be specified within one command; these conditions are
separated from one another by a comma. The possible conditions which may be
specified are:

2-231

September 1974

CONDITION

MEANING

READ

Break if the contents of adr are read by the program. Note
that this condition causes a break to occur on a read-modify
write as well as on a read.

WRITE

Break if the location specified by adr is written into.

EXECUTE

Break if an instruction is fetched from the location specified
by adr.

ALL

Break if the location specified by adr is read from (READ),
written into (WRITE), or fetched from (EXECUTE).

MUUO

Break on monitor references
WRITE, and/or EXECUTE.

qualified

READ,

If all three break conditions are to be specified, the user can include the word
ALL in the command line, replacing the command argument string: WRITE,
READ, EXECUTE. When desiring breaks on monitor references for all three
break conditions, the user can include one of the following command argument
strings in the command line: either MUUO, ALL or MUUO, READ, WRITE,
EXECUTE.
When issuing a SET BREAK command without specifying any break conditions,
the conditions specified in the previous SET BREAK command are still in effect.
If there was no previous SET BREAK command. ALL is assumed. When issuing a
SET BREAK command without specifying any address, the conditions included in
the command line are OR'ed with existing break conditions and the previously
specified address is used. If there are no existing break conditions, 0 is the default
address.
In summary, break addresses remain in effect until changed; and break conditions
remain in effect until removed.
If the user wishes to remove a break condition, the condition to be removed may
be specified in the following command:
SET BREAK NO condition
If all existing break conditions are to be removed, the following command line
may be issued:
SET BREAK NONE
This command will remove all existent break conditions, but will not remove a
previously specified address. An example setting a default break location is:
SET
SET
SET
SET

BREAK
BREAK
BREAK
BREAK

1000 ON READ, WRITE, EXECUTE
NO READ
NONE
EXECUTE ;1000 IS DEFAULT BREAK LOCATION

2-232

September 1974

When a break occurs, one of the messages:
%ADDRESS BREAK AT USER PC xxx xxx
%ADDRESS BREAK AT EXEC xxxxxx UUO AT USER xxxxxx
will be typed; and the terminal will be left in monitor mode. The second message
is produced when MUUO was included in the SET BREAK command line. If the
user types:
.CONTINUE
the program will continue execution at the instruction which caused the break.

Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
KI \0 processors only.

Error Messages
?NOT AVAILABLE
This message is typed on the user's terminal if the operator has restricted the use
of this feature. or if the console switches are set to disallow the use of
programmable address break.

Examples
.!.SET
.!.
.SST
.!.
.SET
.!.
.SET

BREAK AT 1000 ON READ, WRITE)
BREAK EXECUTE,)
BREAK NONE )
BRSAl<: 1000 MUUO, EXECUTE, WRITE,)

2-233

SET CDR Command

Function
The SET CDR command sets the filename for the next card-reader spooling
intercept (refer to DECsystem-1O Monitor Calls). This command is generally not
needed, even when the card reader is being simulated on the disk via the spooling
mechanism. It is included in case the user wishes to reset or change the spooling.
In addition, the Batch Controller uses this command to read spooled input card
decks.

Command Format
SET CDR filename
filename = one- to three-character filename to be used on next cardreader IN IT.

Characteristics
The SET CDR command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Depends on FTSET and FTSPL which are normally absent
DECsystem-1040.
Examples
.!SET

•

:;:SET

CDR A)
CDR MAS)

..!.

2-234

the

SET CPU Command

Function
The SET CPU command allows a privileged user to change the CPUs on which
his job can run. If is used in a multiprocessing system to specify whether the
programs run under the job can be processed on the primary CPU. the secondary
CPU, or either CPU. The job remains with the specified CPU until (I) another
SET CPU command with a different specification is given, (2) a KJOB command
is issued, or (3) the user's program overrides the SET CPU command by issuing
the SETUUO with a different specification. If the SETUUO overrides the
command, the specification given in the UUO remains in effect until a RESET or
EXIT UUO or another SETUUO with a different specification is executed. When
an EXIT or RESET UUO is executed, the job reverts back to the specification
given in the last SET CPU command. When the user logs in. the CPU
specification is usually set to ALL. The schedulers for each CPU compete for jobs
with the ALL specification so that the load is dynamically halanced hetween
CPUs. Therefore. this command is generally not needed but is provided in case
the user wishes to change the CPU specification.

Command Formats
I.

SET CPU CPxn
adds the specified CPU to the joh's CPU specification.

SET CPU NO CPxn
removes the specified CPU from the job's CPU specification.

SET CPU ALL
adds all of the CPUs to the job's CPU specification.

SET CPU ON L Y CPxn
changes the CPU specification so that it includes only the specified CPU.
x = either U designating a logical name or A or I designating physical
names for a KA 10 processor (DECsystem-1055) or a KIlO processor
(DECsystem-1077), respectively.
n = a decimal number from 0 to the numher of processors in the
system.

2-235

Characteristics
The SET CPU command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Depends on FTSET and FTMS which are normally absent
DECsystem-1040, 1050, and 1070.

III

the

Restrictions
The privileges required for using this command are determined by bit 5 (JP.CCC)
of the privilege word, .GTPR V.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
..!..SE'T CPU O'JT~Y Cput,)

•

~SE:T CPU CPAO,)

2-236

SET DENSITY Command

Function
The SET DENSITY command sets a default density for the specified magnetic
tape.

Command Format
SET DENSITY dev:nnn
dev: = MT An: where n is the number of the magnetic tape drive for
which the density is to be set, or a logical name associated with a physical
magnetic tape. The user must have the device assigned to him. This
argument is required.
nnn = 200 bpi
556 bpi
800 bpi
This argument is required.

Characteristics
The SET DENSITY command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Depends on both FTSET and FTMTSET which are normally absent
the DECsystem-1040.

Examples
~SET Df.NSITY MTA5: 55&)
.!..

2-237

SET DSKFUL Command

Function
The SET DSKFUL command controls the treatment of a user's job when it is
attempting output and either there is no space available on the file structure
being referenced or the user's quota for that structure is exceeded.

Command Formats
1. SET DSKFUL ERROR
Output stops and an error condition is passed to the program. Most
programs respond to the error condition by issuing an error message and
returning the job to monitor level without any opportunity for the user to
continue.
2.

SET DSKFUL PAUSE
Output stops and execution of the program is suspended. An error message
is printed on the user's terminal and control of the job is returned to the
monitor. Generally, the user should employ the SEND command to request
assistance from the operator. Execution of the program can be resumed with
the CONTINUE command as long as the user does not give a command
which destroys the core image of the interrupted program. However. the
program will again be stopped if the problem of insufficient disk space or
insufficient quota has not heen corrected in the interim.

The default setting is ERROR unless the user's accounting file entry specifies
PAUSE as his default.

Characteristics
The SET DSKFUL command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Depends on FTSET which is normally absent in the DECsystem-I040.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
.SI'T DSKFUL PAUSE ~

2-238

SET DSKPRI Command

Function
The SET DSKPRI command allows a privileged user to set the priority for his
job's disk operations (data transfers and head positionings). The standard priority
is 0, and the range of permissible values is -3 to + 3. This means that a priority
lower than the standard can be specified, as well as higher than the standard. The
priority specified applies to all disk I/O channels currently open or subsequently
opened whose priority has not been explicitly set with a DISK. UUO (refer to
DECsystem-1O Monitor Calls). The priority specified in the SET DSKPRI
command remains in effect until '(I) another SET DSKPRI command is given
with a different priority, (2) a KJOB command is issued, or (3) the user's program
overrides the SET DSKPRI command by issuing a DISK. UUO with a different
priority.

Command Format
SET DSKPRI n
n = a decimal number from -3 to + 3 indicating the priority to be
associated with the job's disk operations. When n = 0, the priority is the
normal timesharing priority.

Characteristics
The SET DSKPRI command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Depends on both FTSET and FTDPRI which are normally absent in the
D ECsystem-1 040.

Restrictions
The privileges required for using this command are determined by bits I and 2 of
the privilege word, ,GTPRV. These two bits specify an octal number from 0-3.
The user is always allowed a 0 priority,

Examples
.!.S~:T

T'lSKPKT

2-239

SET HPQ Command

Function
The SET HPQ command allows a privileged user to place his job in a highpriority scheduler run queue. With this command, the user obtains a faster
response and CPU time than in the normal timesharing queues. The job remains
in the specified high-priority queue until (I) another SET HPQ command to a
different high-priority queue is given, (2) a KJOB command is issued, or (3) the
user's program overrides the SET HPQ command by issuing an HPQ UUO with
a different value. If an HPQ UUO overrides the command, the level specified in
the UUO remains in effect until a RESET or EXIT UUO or another HPQ UUO
with a different value is executed. When an EXIT or RESET UUO is executed,
the job is returned to the high-priority queue specified in the SET HPQ
command.
Command Format
SET HPQ n
n = a decimal number from 0 to 15 indicating the high-priority queue to
be entered. When n = 0, the queue is the normal timesharing run
queue. Queue numbers from I to 15 are high-priority queues. The
number of high-priority queues is an installation parameter and may be
less than 15.

Characteristics
The SET HPQ command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Depends on both FTSET and FTHPQ which are normally absent in the
DECsystem-I040.

Restrictions
The privileges required for using this command are determined by bits 6 through
9 of the privilege word, .GTPRV. These four bits specify an octal number from 017, which is the highest priority queue attainable by the user.

2-240

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
.SET HPQ

.!.

2-241

SET PHYSICAL LIMIT Command

Function

The SET PHYSICAL LIMIT command is used to specify the maximum current
physical page limit (CPPL), by including the word LIMIT within the command
line. (CPPL is described in Chapter 1 of the Monitor Calls Manual). By including
the word GUIDELINE in the command line, the SET PHYSICAL command is
used to establish a guideline for the page fault handler. The page fault handler will
then use the specified figure as a guideline in determining the exact time a program will go virtual.

Command format
SET PHYSICAL

where:

LIMIT
lf GUIDELINE

LIMIT and GUIDELINE are alternative portions of the command line. If
both are omitted, GUIDELINE is assumed.
I K equals 1024 words. and I P equals a page of 512 words. If K and P
are omitted. K is assumed.
K may be specified within the range I to 256K; P may be specified
within the range I to 512P.
If the command SET PHYSICAL LIMIT is given with a 0 argument, the
job will never "go virtual".

Characteristics
Requires LOGIN.
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

2-242

September 1974

Example
.2..SET
.!.

PHYSICAL lOOP ,)

.SET PHYSICAL GUIDELINE 2K,)

.!.

.SET PHYSICAL LIMIT SOK,)

.!.

2-243

SET SPOOL Command

Function
The SET SPOOL command adds devices to or deletes devices from the current
list of devices being spooled for this job. Spooling is the mechanism by which 110
to or from slow-speed devices is simulated on disk. Devices capable of being
spooled are: the line printer, the card punch, the card reader, the paper tape
punch, and the plotter.

Command Formats
1.

SET SPOOL devl,dev2, ... devn
adds the specified devices to the job's spool list.

SET SPOOL ALL
places all spooling devices into the spool list.

SET SPOOL NONE
clears the entire spool list.

SET SPOOL NO devl,dev2, ... devn
removes the specified devices from the job's spool list.
devl, dev2, ... devn = physical device names of one or more devices to
be added to or deleted from the current spool list. These names are taken
from the following list: CDP, CDR, LPT, PLT, PTP.

Characteristics
The SET SPOOL command:
Leaves the terminal in monitor mode.
Depends on. both FTSET and FTSPL which are normally absent in the
DECsystem-1040.

Restrictions
To unspool devices, the job must have (I) the privilege bit set in .GTPRV, (2) bit
28 (200 octal) set in the STATES word by the operator SET SCHED command,
or (3) the user must be logged-in under [1,2].

2-244

Associated Messages
Refer to Chapter 4.

Examples
~SET SPOOL COP,)
~

~SET

spnor, '-10 LPT r ~

•

:;:SE1' 5P(1nL NOr'!)
.!.

2-245

SETSRC Program

Function
The SETSRC program is used to manipulate the job's search list or the system's
search list. A search list is defined to be the order of file structures that are to be
searched whenever generic device OSK: is explicitly or implicitly specified by the
user. This search list is originally defined by the system manager to include the
file structures which the user can access. With the SETSRC program, the user can
alter the search list defined for him by adding or deleting file structures.
The search list is in the form
fsllsls, fs2/s/s, ... ,

FENCE, .... , fs9/s/s

where fs is the name of the file structure and Is is a switch modifying the file
structure. The file structures on the left of the FENCE comprise the active search
list and represent the generic device OSK for this job. The files to the right of the
FENCE comprise the passive search list and represent file structures that were
once in the active search list. File structures are kept in the passive search list in
order that quotas can be checked on a DISMOUNT or KJOB command. The
FENCE represents the boundary between the active and passive search list.
Note that the MOUNT and DISMOUNT commands can also change the job's
search list by adding or deleting a file structure. Since the SETSRC program does
not create a UFO if one does not exist, the MOUNT command should be used to
create a UFO. The name of the new file structure is placed at the end of the
search list.
Refer to the SETSRC specification in the DECsystem- \0 Software Notebooks for
a complete description of the SETSRC program.

Command Format
R SETSRC
The user can then respond with any of the following commands:
Command
A

Explanation
Add one or more file structures to the existing search list. The file
structures (with any switches) are appended to the beginning or the
end of the active search list according to the following specifications:
I.

If no asterisk appears in the specification (e.g., fs I, fs2) or if
an asterisk appears before the file structure names (e.g., *
,fs I, fs2), the file structures are added to the end of the
search list.

2-246

Command

Explanation
2.

If the asterisk follows the file structure names (e.g., fs I, fs2,
~), the file structures are added to the beginning of the search
list.

If the asterisk appears in the middle of the file structures
(e.g., fs I, *, fs2), the file structures before the asterisk are
added to the beginning of the search list and the file
structures after the asterisk are added to the end.

If the specified file structure is currently in the search list, it is
removed and then added in the desired position. Therefore, this
command can be us.ed to reorder the search list.
C

Create a new search list for this job. Any file structures in the
current search list which are not in the new list are moved to the
passive search list.

Create a new default directory path.

Create a new system search list (i.e., the file structure search list for
device SYS:). The user must be logged in under [1,2) to use this
command.

Obtain information about the available commands.

Modify the current search list and DSK specification by altering
the switch settings for individual file structures. This command
does not add or remove file structures from the search list.

Remove file structures from the search list. They are placed on the
right side of the FENCE (passive search list) so that on subsequent
LOGOUTs or DISMOUNTs quota limits can be checked.

Type the search list of the job.

Type the default directory path.

Type the system search list.

The following switches can be used in the SETSRC command string. Switches
that modify file structures must appear immediately after the file structure that
they modify. Other switches can appear anywhere in the command string. The
switches can be abbreviated as long as the abbreviation is unique. The minimum
number of characters is underlined bcIow.
Switches that modify file structures.
ICREATE

Allow new files to he created on the file structure.

INOCREATE Do not allow new files to be created on the file structure when
DSK is specified, but allow files to be superseded. Files can be
created on the file structure if the user specifies the file structure
name explicitly.
2-247

INOWRITE

Do not allow writing on the file structure for this job (i.e., the file
structure is read only).

IWRITE

Allow writing on the file structure.

If no switches are specified, ICREATE and IWRITE are assumed. For
compatibility with previous versions of SETSRC, IN is equivalent to INOCREATE and IR equivalent to INOWRITE.
Switches that modify the directory path (used only with the CP command)
These switches can be typed in directly as commands by omitting the CP
command and the slash (i.e., ISCAN is equivalent to CP/SCAN).
INOSCAN

Cancel the scan switch for the directory path.

ISCAN

Set the scan switch for the directory path.

Switches that modify the DSK or SYS specification (used only with the C and M
commands)
These switches can be typed in directly as commands by omlttmg the CorM
command and the slash (i.e., NOSYS is equivalent to M/NOSYS).
Set the job's library directory to the UFD [proj,
prog] and add it to the user's DSK specification. This means that if
a file is not found in the user's directories in his search list, the
library directory will then be searched for the file.

ILlB:

[proj,prog]

INOLIB

Remove the library directory from the user's DSK specification.

INOSYS

Remove the SYS specification from the user's DSK specification.

INONEW

Remove the [1,5] directory from the user's SYS specification.

ISYS

Add the SYS specification to the user's DSK specification. This
means that if a file cannot be found in the user's directories in his
search list or in his library directory (if ILlB: [proj,prog] has been
specified), the system directory [1,4] will then be searched for the
file.

INEW

Add the directory [1,5] to the user's SYS specification. This means
that when the system directory is searched, the directory [1,5] will
be searched before the directory [1,4].

Characteristics
The R SETSRC command
Places the terminal in user mode.
Runs the SETSRC program, thereby destroying the user's core image.
2-248

Restrictions
The user must be logged in under [1,2] to create a new system search list. The
directory path commands (CP and TP) are meaningful only with the 5.04 and
later monitors and only if FTSFD is on.

Examples

DS'
SPRINT-IO checks to determine if wildcard programmer numbers are permissible for the
specified project. If they are, then SPRINT-IO creates a unique programmer number. If they
are not allowed, then SPRINT-tO issues an error message and the job is terminated.

Card Format
$JOB name [proj,prog] /S(l)/S(2) .. ./S(n)
name

= the user-assigned name for the job; if omitted,
SPRINT-IO creates the unique name JB???? (where?
represents a character arbitrarily chosen by SPRINTIO to produce a unique name) for the control and log
files.
3-28

Septem!Jer 1974

= the project-programmer number of the user who

[proj,prog]

submitted the job. This argument is required. A space
or comma can separate this argument from the jobname.

I
IS( I )/S(2) .. ./S(n)

Switch

I AFTER:dd-mmm-yy hh:mm

switches taken from
switches are optional.

the following group. These

Default

Meaning

None

The job cannot be run until after the
specified date and time. The resulting
AFTER time must be less than the
DEADLINE time.

None

The job cannot be run until after the
input time plus the amount of time
specified.

ICARDS:nn

The maximum number of cards (up to
10.000) that can be punched by the job
(in decimal).

ICORE:nnK

2SK

The maximum amount of core (in decimal) that can be used by the job up to
the maximum allowed by the installation. Specifying in K is optional.

ICORE:nnP

SOP

The maximum amount of core (in
pages) that can be used by the job up
to the maximum allowed by the installation.

IDEADLINE:dd-mmm-yy
hh:mm

None

The job must be completed by
the specified date and time. The resulting DEADLINE time must be greater
than the AFTER time.

None

The job must be started by the indicated amount of time after it is input.

I AFTER:

+ hh:mm

IDEADLINE:

+ hh:mm

3-29

Septemher 1974

Switch

IDEPEND:nn

Default

Meaning

Initial interjob dependency count (in
decimal).
Where:

IERROR:aa:bb:cc

aa represents the number of binary
checksum errors permitted before the
job is terminated.

bb represents the number of illegal
binary cards permitted before the job is
terminated.

100
cc represents the number of Hollerith
errors permitted before the job is terminated.
If only one argument IS specified,
SPRINT-IO assumes it to be the value
f()r cc. If two arguments are given. it is
assumed that they are the values for bb
and cc. The values not specified are
assumed to be zero. For example:

IERROR:20
means that the values for aa. bb and cc
are 00. 00 and 20 and:

tERROR: 15:20
means that the values for aa. bb and cc
are 00. 15 and 20. If the switch is not
specified then the default values given
above are in effect. However. if the
switch is specified but no arguments are
given. then aa. bb and cc are each
assumed to have a value of zero.

3-30

September 1974

Switch

Default

Meaning

IFEET:nn

The maximum number of feet of paper
tape that will be punched by the job.

IHOLLERITH:aa

ASCII

This switch specifies the default Hollerith code for interpreting cards following
a SDATA. SDECK or $-Ianguage card.
The legal values are ASCII and 026. On
each of the aforementioned control
cards. switches may be specified to
change the interpretation mode for that
deck. Unless a new mode of interpretation is specified. each subsequent control card encountered resets the input
mode to that specified on the Hollerith
switch.

ILOCATE:oo

The
station
where
the job
was
input

Specifics the remote station
(in octal) of the job and
where the output is to be sent.

INAME:aa

None

The user's name in up to 12 characters.
The job is not restartable. If this switch
is omitted, it is assumed that the job can
be restarted. (See IR EST ART below')

INORESTART

IPAGES:nn

200

The maximum number of pages (in decimal) to be printed by the job, including the log file and compilation listing.

IPRIORITY:nn

The external priority of the job: the
highest priority that can be specified is
62 (decimal).

In the event of a system crash, the job
may be restarted by the Batch system.
This is the default action.

IRESTART

ISEQUENCE:nn

The job's sequence number within the
input queue.

3-31

September /974

Switch

Default

Meaning

ITIME:hh:mm:ss

5.0(5
mins.)

The limit placed on the amount of CPU
time used by the job.

ITPLOT:mm

The maximum amount of plotter time
that the job will use (in minutes).

IUNIQUE:n

If 0 is specified. more than one Batch
job may be run concurrently using the
specified directory. If I is specified. only
one Batch job is run using the specified
directory. If 2 is specified. the job is run
in a unique SfD.

Requirements
The $JOB card must immediately follow the SSEQUENCE card. or be the first card if the
$SEQUENCE card is not required.

3.3.14 $MACRO
Function
This card precedes a MACRO source program and causes SPRINT-IO to copy the program
onto disk and to insert a COMPILE monitor command into the control file. The source
program is ended by any SPRINT-IO control card other than a $MODE.
When the job is run, the specified program is compiled and temporary relocatable binary and
listing files are created. The source, binary and listing files can be made permanent if the user
renames them to change their protection. (Refer to the RENAME command in Chapter 2.)
The listing file is printed as part of the job's output.
The $MACRO card does not cause execution of the program. Execution is initiated by an
EXECUTE monitor command or by a $DATA or a SEXECUTE card. (Refer to the
EXECUTE command in Chapter 2 or paragraphs 3.3.4 and 3.3. IO in this chapter.
respectively. )
Processor switches can be passed to the MACRO compiler by including them in the command
string. Refer to Paragraph \.5.7 for a description of the MACRO processor switch.

Card Format
SMACRO dev:name.ext [proj,progj (processor switches) IS(I)'/S(2) .. .IS(n)
3-32

SC'fllC'lIIhC'r 1974

dev:
name.ext

[proj,prog]

a file structure name. If omitted, DSK is assumed.
the name of the file to be created on disk. If
omitted, SPRINT-IO ·assigns the filename LN????
(where ? represents a character arbitrarily chosen by
SPRINT-IO to produce a unique i!!~name) with the
extension .MAC. However, when the user specifies
only a filename (with no extension),
SPRINT-IO
will not append any extension. The source and
relocatable binary files will be explicitly deleted at
the end of the job if no filename was specified.
Where the user has specified a filename, the
disposition of the files depends on the protection the
user has given them.

= a directory name other than that specified on the
SlOB card. If omitted, the project-programmer number on the $10B card is used.

(processor switches)

= the switches to be passed to the MACRO assembler.
They must be enclosed in parentheses and the slash
must not appear in connection with these switches.

I
IS( I )/S(2) .. ./S(n)

= the switches that control
interpretation
program.
Switch

and

the

the mode of input
listing of the assembled

Meaning

IAse11
The input is read in ASCII
modc. If no other card format
switch is specified. then the default is the mode indicated on
the IHOLLERITH switch on the
$10B card. Refer to Paragraph
3.3.13.
ICREF
;\
cross-referenced
listing
IS
created to be processed hy the
CREF program. The default is
no listing.
INOLIST
]'.'0 listing file of the program is
created. If this switch is not
specified. a listing file will be
created.

3-33

Switch

Meaning

INOSUPPRESS
Trailing blanks are not suppressed. The default is no suppression.
ISUPPRESS
Trailing blanks are su ppressed.
The default is no suppression.
IWIDTH:nn
Columns I through nn (inclusive)
arc read. Any remaining columns
are treated as if they contained
blanks. If this switch is not
specified or if no argument is
specified. then SPRINT-IO will
assume a value of 80.

1026
The card deck is read in 026 card
code. If no other card format
switch is specified. then the default is the mode indicated on
the IHOLLERITH switch on the
$JOB card. Refer to Paragraph
3.3.13. This switch applies only to
card-reader input. Input from
other devices must be read in
ASCII code: otherwise. an error
message is written in the log file
and the job is terminated.

3.3.15 $MODE
Function
This card causes
SPRINT-IO to change the mode in which it is interpreting the input
stream. The $MODE card can be placed anywhere after the $PASSWORD card in the
command sequence. All the switches take effect immediately after the $MODE card is read.
The 1ASCII and 1026 switches remain in effect until the next $-Ianguage card is read but the
effects of the INOSUPPRESS, ISUPPRESS and IWIDTH switches are not terminated until
either the end of the job or, until they are changed by another $MODE card. The $MODE

3-34

qud is the only control card that does not terminate the copying of input preceded by a
$DECK card.

Card Format
$MODE /S(l)/S(2) .. .IS(n)
/S( I )/S(2) .. .IS(n)

switches that control the mode of reading and
interpreting of the input media.
Switch

Meaning

/ ASCII
The input
mode.

read

ASCII

/]\;OSUPPRESS
Trailing
pressed.

blanks

arc

not

sup-

/SUPPRESS
Trailing blanks arc suppressed.
/WIDTH:nn
Columns I through nn (inclusive)
arc read. Any remaining columns
arc treated as if they contained
blanks.
/026
The card deck is read in 026 card
code.
NOTE
There arc no defaults for switches
on a $MODE card
because if a switch
is not specified. the
pre v i 0 u sly est a blished value remains
unchanged.

3-35

Restrictions
The mode switch 1026 can be used only for card input. Input from other devices is always
read as ASCII code. Thus, the only switches that can be used with the $MODE card for
devices other than the card reader are 1ASCII, INOSUPPRESS, SUPPRESS and IWIDTH.

3.3.16 $PASSWORD
Function
This card contains the password associated with the project-programmer number specified in
the $JOB card. If the password does not match the password stored in the system for the
specified project-programmer number, SPRINT- 10 does not create any files, issues an error
message on the log file, and aborts the job. Use of this command is an installation option.

Card Format
$PASSWORD password

password

= I to 6 character password. There must be exactly one
space between the end of the card name ($PASSWORD) and the first character of your password.

Requirements
If the $PASSWORD card is required, it must immediately follow the SJOB card.

3.3.17 $RELOCATABLE
Function

This is a File Card which causes SPRINT- 10 to copy a relocatable binary program from cards
to a file on the user's disk area. The cards are read in binary mode.

The difference between a SRELOCAT ABLE card and the $DECK card with the IBINARY
switch specified is that all files created by a $RELOCATABLE card are added to the list of
files maintained by SPRINT-IO to be included in the EXECUTE command generated by a
SDATA or $EXECUTE card. Refer to Paragraphs 3.3.4 and 3.3.10.

Card Format
•

$RELOCA TABLE name.ext

3-36

name.ext

the name of the file into which the program is
copied. If the filename is omitted, SPRINT-IO creates
the filename RL???? (where? represents a character
arbitrarily chosen by SPRINT-IO to produce a unique
filename). It is recommended that the user select a
distinct name for each job in the Batch system
simultaneously. If the extension is omitted. REL is
assumed.

Restrictions
Relocatable binary programs can only be read when the input is from cards.

3.3.18 $SEQUENCE
Function
This card specifies the job's unique sequence number. The use of this card depends on the
requirements of the particular installation.

Card Format
SSEQUENCE n
n

a decimal number

Requirements
If the installation requires this command. it must be the first card in the input stream.

3.3.19 $SNOBOL
Function
This card precedes a SNOBOL source program and causes SPRINT-IO to copy the program
onto disk and to insert a COMPILE monitor command into the control file. The source
program is ended by any SPRINT-IO control card other than a $MODE.
When the job is run. the specified program is compiled and temporary relocatable binary and
listing files are created. The source, binary and listing files can be made permanent if the user
renames them to change their protection. (Refer to the RENAME command in Chapter 2.)
The listing file is printed as part of the job's output.

3-37

Processor switches can be passed to the SNOBOL compiler by including them in the
command string.
Refer to the COMPILE command in Chapter 2 for

description of the processor switches.

Card Format
$SNOBOL dev:name.ext[proj,prog](processor switches)/S( I )/S(2) .. .lS(n)
dev.

a file structure name. If omitted, DSK is assumed.

name.ext

the name of the file to be created on disk. If
omitted, SPRINT-IO assigns the filename LN????
(where ? represents a character arbitrarily chosen by
SPRINT-IO to produce a unique filename) with the
extension .SNO. However, when the user specifics
only a filename (with no extension),
SPRINT-IO
will not append any extension. Then source and
relocatable binary files will be explicitly deleted at
the end of the job if no filename was specified.
Where the user has specified a filename, the
disposition of the files depends on the protection the
user has given them.

[proj,prog]

= a directory name other than that specified on the
$JOB card. If omitted, the project-programmer number on the $JOB card is used.

(processor switches)

IS( I )/S(2) .. .lS(n)

= the switches that control the mode of input

the switches to be passed to the SNOBOL compiler.
They must be enclosed in parentheses and the slash
must not appear in connection with these switches.

interpretation and the listing of the compiled program.
Switch

Meaning

IASCII

The input is read in ASCII
mode. If no other card format
switch is specified, then the default is the mode indicated on
the IHOLLERITH switch on the
$JOB card. Refer to Paragraph
3.3.13.

3-38

Switch

Meaning

INOSUPPRESS
Trailing blanks are not
suppressed. The default is no suppression.
ISUPPRESS
Trailing blanks are not
suppressed. The default is no su ppression.
IWIOTH:nn
Columns I through nn (inc.:lusive)
are read. Any remaining columns
are treated as if they contained
blanks. If this switch is not specified or if no argument is specified, then SPRINT-IO will assume a value of 80.
1026

The card deck is read in 026 card
code. If no other card format
switch is specified, then the default is the mode indicated on
the IHOLLERITH switch on the
$JOB card. Refer to Paragraph
3.3.13. This switch applies only to
card-reader input. Input from
other devices must be read in
ASCII code: otherwise. an error
message is written in the. log file
and the job is terminated.

The $SNOBOL card is the only S-Ianguage card that does not generate an EXECUTE command
through a SOA T A or $EXECUTE card.

3.4 BATCH CONTROL FILE COMMANDS
Ordinarily, the Batch Controller reads the control file in a sequential manner. The commands
described in this section can appear in the control file to interrupt the sequential processing of
the control file in order to specify error recovery. If an error occurs in the job, the Batch
Controller examines the next monitor level line in the control file for an .IF command to
determine what action to take on the error. It does not search past the next executable

3-39

monitor line in the control file for the .IF command; therefore, if this command
must be the next monitor command in the control file.

used, it

If the user does not wish to include an .IF command, he may include two types of error
recovery routines in the control file, one type labeled %ERR (error processing for non-system
programs) and the other labeled %CERR (error processing for compilers and system
programs). A system program is one found on a device ~pecified in the SYS search list. If
SYS is assigned as a logical device name, the programs are considered user programs, not
system programs. After an error occurs in the job and the next executable monitor line in the
control file is not an .IF statement, the Batch Controller searches for the labeled error
recovery control lines and processes the statements following these labels. These routines may
be placed anywhere in the control file. Once the Batch Controller has processed the routine, it
continues from that point in the control file; it does not read backwards over sections of the
control file skipped in searching for error routines. The following example shows the use of a
%ERR error recovery routine .
.COMPILE SAMPLE lUST
.MOUNT MTA:3 IVID:42936
.EXECUTE
.DISMOUNT 3
.R SORT
*MUMP.SRT= FOR04.DAT IR80/K 1.10
.QUEUE MUMP.SRT
%ERR: :.CLOSE
.DUMP
.DISMOUNT 3
%FIN::.DELETE FOR04.DAT
Depending on the type of error found, the following operations are performed. If a
compilation error occurs, only the compilation and the listing result. No tape is mounted. If
an execution error results,

I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

the program is compiled,
the tape is mounted,
the program begins execution,
the output is closed,
a quick dump of core is taken,
the tape is dismounted, and
the file FOR04.DAT is deleted.

If a SORT error occurs, the program compiles, the tape is mounted, the program is executed,
and the file FOR04.DAT is deleted. Finally, if no errors result,

I.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

the program is compiled,
the tape is mounted,
the program is executed,
the tape is dismounted,
the sort is performed,
MUMP.SRT is printed, and
the file FOR04.DAT is deleted.

When the user is bypassing SPRINT-IO and creating his own control file, he may place
a
%FIN at the end of the control file. SPRINT-IO, in creating the control file, automatically
places a %FIN at the end. This label is used for cleanup purposes; e.g., deleting the input

3-40

files. In creating the control file, the user may place other %FIN's at various points in the file
for periodic cleanup of his job. For example, this label is used in a special kind of error
recovery. If the time allocated to the job runs to the maximum limit specified in the $JOB
command (refer to Paragraph 3.3.13) or by the Batch system, the user is given an additional
10% of his allocated time to clean up his job before it is aborted. Because the user includes a
%FIN, cleanup is performed and the results of the job's processing are not lost when the job
is aborted. The user should be careful in using the %FIN in the control file because if the
Batch Controller is searching for an error recovery routine and %FIN is placed before a %
ERR or %CERR, the %FIN is executed and the Batch Controller assumes the error recovery
routine has been satisfied and does not search any longer for %ERR or %CERR.
Furthermore, a .GOTO label cannot bypass a %FIN label. Therefore, the best place to put a
%FIN is as the last line in the control file.
If an error occurs in the job and the user either was not running a system program or has not
included an .IF command or error recovery control lines, the Batch Controller initiates a
standard quick dump of the user's core area and terminates the job (refer to the DUMP
command in Chapter 2). The Batch Controller also initiates a dump if it is searching for a %
ERR and reads a %FIN instead.

3.4.1 .BACKTO
Function
The .BACK TO command is used by Batch users to interrupt the sequential reading of the
control file by the Batch Controller. Control is transferred in a backward direction. This
command can be used with a .IF command to specify transfer of control to an error routine.

Command Format
.BACKTO label
label

label of a statement in the control file. This label is
from one to six alphanumeric characters terminated
with a double colon (::) and must not begin with a %
character.

When the .BACK TO command is encountered, the Batch Controller searches for the labeled
statement and transfers control to it. If the statement is not found, the job is terminated.

3.4.2 .CHKPNT
Function
The .CHKPNT command is used to aid in error recovery when a Batch job is terminated
abnormally be a system failure. As many .CHKPNT commands as desired can be placed in
the control file. When the job is restarted after the failure, the program begins at the location
of the last .CHKPNT command instead of at the beginning of the program.

3-41

Command Format
.CHKPNT label
label

label of the statement in the control file where
processing is to resume when the job is restarted. This
argument is required. The label is from one to five
alphanumeric characters. When the label appears
with the statement in the control file, it must be
followed by a double colon (::).

3.4.3 .ERROR
Function
The .ERROR command causes the Hatch Controller to recoglllze a message beginning with
the specified character as an error in the job.

Command Format
.ERROR character
character

the beginning character of the line that is to be
recognized as an error (e.g., %). If this argument is
not specified, a ? at the beginning of a line is
considered as an error.

3.4.4 .GOTO
Function
The .GOTO command is used by Batch users to interrupt the sequential reading of the
control file by the Batch Controller. Control is transferred in a forward direction. This
command may be used with a .IF command to specify transfer of control to an error routine.

Command Format
.GOTO label
label

label of a statement in the control file. The label
appearing in the control file is from one to six
alphanumeric characters terminated with a double
colon (::) and must not begin with a % character.

3-42

When the .GOTO command is encountered, the Batch Controller searches for the labeled
statement and transfers control to it. If the statement is not found before the end of the
control file is reached, the job is terminated.

Examples
.EX TEST.MAC/L
.IF (ERROR) .GOTO A
.GOTO B
A::.QUEUE LPT: =TEST.MAC
.GOTO B
B::;

3.4.5 .IF
Function
The .IF command is used by Batch users to aid the Batch Controller in processing errors. The
Batch Controller recognizes the existence of an error when it encounters a line beginning with
a question mark that is output from the job to the log file or a line that begins with the
character specified in the .ERROR command. When the error occurs, this command must be
the next monitor level in the control file.

Command Format
.IF (condition) statement
(condition)

statement

..
ERROR or NOERROR. The parentheses must be
included ..
= an executable monitor or batch command preceded
by a period.

If the specified condition is true, the statement is executed. If the specified condition is not
true, the Batch Controller processes the next line in the control file.

3.4.6.NOERROR
Function
The .NOERROR command instructs the Batch Controller to ignore all errors (including
messages beginning with a question mark) in the job. This is especially useful in TECO
searches. However, the message

3-43

Seprember 1974

?TIME LIMIT EXCEEDED
always indicates that an error exists.

Command Format
.NOERROR

3.4.7 .NOOPERATOR

Function
.NOOPERATOR is the command to leave dialogue mode (Paragraph 3.1.3); it designates that
no messages from the job are to be output to the controlling terminal. There is only one
command that functions differently in dialogue mode; it is the .IF command. When in
dialogue mode, upon encountering an .IF command, control is transferred to %ERR:: or %
CERR:: if they exist or %FlN:: if it exists. If none of these are present, the job is
automatically terminated. This action is taken in order to minimize output to the operator in
case of an unexpected transfer of control. Therefore, in order to test for error conditions, it is
necessary to issue a .NOOPERATOR command to leave dialogue mode before issuing an .IF
command. For example:
.OPERATOR
.RUN PRGTST
.NOOPERATOR
.IF(ERROR) .GOTO A

Command Format
.NOOPERATOR

3.4.8 .OPERATOR

Function
The .OPERATOR command enters dialogue mode (Paragraph 3.1.3) and makes it possible for
the job, or a program within the job, to communicate with the operator. Any message from
the job, starting with the specified character (refer to Chapter 4), is typed on the controlling
terminal. In addition, all subsequent lines, regardless of their initial character, are also copied
to the operator. This process continues until the job requests input. At this point, rather than
reading from the control file, the operator is notified of the input request and the job is
suspended until the operator has responded. When the operator responds, the job is resumed
and the response is sent to the job as if it had appeared in the control file. Also, copying is
discontinued for all further output until another line beginning with the character specified is
output. Then the process described is repeated.

3-44

When the .OPERATOR command is in effect, the Batch Controller ignores an .IF statement
unless the .NOOPERATOR command is given first, and proceeds to search for an error
recovery routine labeled with either %ERR:: or %CERR:: (refer to Paragraph 3.4). This action
is taken in order to minimize output to the operator in case of an unexpected transfer of
control. However, when an error occurs, the Batch Controller preserves the error status across
the .NOOPERATOR command and looks for the .IF statement as the next monitor-level
command. In other words, an .IF statement following a .NOOPERATOR command will be
executed. Refer to the following examples.
In the example below, the .IF statement will be ignored .
.OPERATOR %
.RUN TESPRG
.IF (ERROR) .GOTO TAG
However, in the following example, the .IF statement will be executed .
.OPERATOR %
.RUN TESPRG
.NOOPERATOR
.IF (ERROR) .GOTO TAG

Command Format
.OPERATOR character
character

= the beginning character of the line that is to be sent
to the operator (e.g., %). If this argument is not
specified, $ at the beginning of the line is assumed.

3.4.9 .REQUEUE
Function
The .REQUEUE command indicates to the Batch Controller that the job is to be requeued. It
is normally used with the .if (error) command (e.g., .IF (ERROR) .REQUEUE). The job IS
restarted after a default requeue time at the specified label in the control file.

Command Format
.REQUEUE label
label

= label of a statement in the control file where
processing is to resume when the job is restarted. This
label is from one to five alphanumeric characters. If
this argument is omitted, the job is restarted at the
beginning of the control file.

3-45

3.4.10 .REVIVE
Function
The .REVIVE command causes all output from the job to be placed in the log file.

Command Format
.REVIVE

3.4.11 .SILENCE
Function
The .SILENCE command suppresses all output from the job except error messages to the log
file. This means that only the lines appearing in the log file will be those that begin with a
question mark.

Command Format
.SILENCE

3.5 JOB OUTPUT
The output from a user's job is normally in the form of printed listings containing the user's
job output, compilation listings, any memory dumps requested by the user or initiated by the
Batch Controller, and the log file indicating the processing performed by the programs in the
Batch system. The results from the job and the log file are automatically placed in the queue
for the line printer spooler, LPTSPL, unless the job was submitted with the /OUTPUT:O
switch. However, the user can output to any device in the system. When a user program
specifics a slow-speed spooling device, the Batch system places the output into a queue for the
appropriate spooler. If the user wishes specific files to be output to particular spooled devices
outside of his programs, he can so indicate on his $DECK card (Paragraph 3.3.5) or he can
include the QUEUE monitor commands in his control file to specify the output device and
any additional parameters that he wishes.
Compilation listings arc produced from the $Ianguage control cards unless the user specifics
otherwise. These listings are automatically spooled to the line printer. The user can also
include the COMPILE monitor command in his job with switches to produce listings.

The user can include any of the monitor DUMP commands or the SPRINT-IO card $DUMP
to request memory dumps during program testing. Under normal error conditions, the Batch
Controller performs an automatic two-page dump for the user (refer to Paragraph 3.4).

3-46

3.. 5.1 The Log File

As part of its processing, SPRINT-1O creates a log file for each job so that the user can
examine the processing performed by the Batch system. The log file contains a record of
SPRINT-IO's processing, control cards, any errors detected and any operator interventions.
When the job is run, the Batch Controller places additional messages into the log file,
including each line of the control file as it is passed to the job, any error conditions, and any
operator actions. The LOGOUT program appends an accounting summary message to the log
file when the job terminates. This message is similar to the message received when an
interactive user logs off the system (refer to the KJOB command in Chapter 2). Note that the
log file is appended to for jobs of the same name; thus it may be necessary to delete this file
before running another job with the same name.

3.5.1.1 SPRINT-tO Messages - SPRINT-1O places six kinds of messages into the log file. The
fi'rst part of each message contains the time of day that SPRINT-1O placed the message into
the file in columns I through 8 and an identifying word in columns 10 through 14. The body
of the message is in columns 17 through 132. The identifier for each kind of message is taken
from the following group:
STOAT -- gives the date, system name, SPRINT-1O version and the input device.
STMSG -- identifies any SPRINT-1O non-error message.
STERR -- identifies any SPRINT-1O error message.
STCRO

identifies SPRINT-1O control cards.

STSUM

identifies the summary message at the end of the job.

STOPR -- identifies any operator actions that occurred during SPRINT-IO's processmg.
The first entry in the log file always contains the identifier, STOAT and a message giving the
date, the system name, the current version of SPRINT-IO, and the input device; for example:
14: 17:32

STOAT

23-Jan-74

5S06 SYS 40 SPRINT-1O Version I running on CORO

The STOAT entry is followed by two STCRO lines containing the $SEQUENCE and the
$JOB cards, respectively. The $PASSWORO card is never printed for security reasons.
Each SPRINT-1O control card is written into the log on an STCRO line and, if it is a File
Card, the line immediately following contains a message of the form:
14: 17:40

STMSG file.ext Created - nn Cards read - nn Blocks written

When the $EOJ card is read, SPRINT-1O prints a summary message giving the number of
cards read, the number of files and blocks written, and the number of each type or error that
occurred. The summary is also placed in the system accounting file. An example of the job
summary is given below.

3-47

14:17:42
14: 17:42
14: 17:43

STSUM End-of-file after 423 cards
STSUM 4 Hollerith errors
STSUM Batch Input Request Created

Between the beginning and ending messages, SPRINT-IO prints any operator actions as they
occur, some nonerror messages, and reports of errors it has detected. The following are
examples of non error messages from SPRINT-IO.

14:17:33
14: 17:33
14: 17:33

STCRD $JOB TESTA, [10,225]
STOPR [SPTSBO Job Stopped by Operator]
STOPR [SPTCBO Job Continued by Operator]

3.5.1.2 SPRINT-I0 ERROR Reporting - SPRINT-IO places messages in the log file that
describe errors that have occurred during its processing. The following errors are detected, and
their degree of severity is as specified:
Fatal Errors
1.

2.
3.
4.

Errors on the $JOB or $PASSWORD card.
Too many Hollerith errors.
Too many illegal binary cards.
Too many binary checksum errors.

}

Refer
to
the
IERROR
switch on the $JOB card Paragraph 3.3.9.

Non-fatal Errors
I.
2.
3.

Hollerith errors.
Missing $EOJ or end-of-file card.
Unrecognizable or illegal switch on a control card.

All SPRINT-IO error messages are preceded by the identifier STERR. The job is terminated
upon encountering the first fatal error message. Any number of non-fatal errors are allowed
unless limits are set by the user through the use of the IERROR switch on the $JOB card.
(Refer to Paragraph 3.3.9.)
Refer to Chapter 4

for a complete list of SPRINT-IO error messages.

3.5.1.3 Batch Controller Messages - The times followed by an identifying notation are placed
in columns I through 16 of the first line of each message. The identifiers for the Batch
Controller messages are described in the list below:
BYERS -- denotes the version of BA TCON.
BDATE -- identifies the date BATCON processed the job.
BA TCH -- identifies any Batch Controller non-error message.
BAOPR -- describes any operator action.
BAERR -- denotes any Batch Controller error message.

3-48

MONTR -- identifies a line input or output at monitor level.
USER

-- describes any line input or output at user level.

BASUM -- gives the Batch Controller summary message.
The first line in the log file printed by the Batch Controller is the version number. As each
line in the control file is read, it is printed in the log file as well as being passed to the user
program or to the monitor. Any time that the operator performs some action that affects the
job, the Batch Controller records it in the log file. The BATCON program enters a message in
the log file every time it generates a monitor command. For example, if a fatal error occurs in
the job and the user has not included an .IF statement, a %ERR routine or a %CERR routine
in the control file, the Batch Controller generates a DUMP command. It also generates a
LOGIN and a KJOB monitor command for each job.
Any errors in the input that are detected by the Batch Controller are printed in the log file.

The Batch Controller places the identifier
3.5.1.4 Batch Controller Error Reporting BAERR on any line that it detects as being an error. The errors that are detected are listed
below; the first three are fatal errors.

Missing condition (ERROR or NOERROR) or missing statement
statement.

Missing statement label in the .GOTO or .BACKTO command.

The labeled statement in a .GOTO command cannot be found after the .GOTO or
before the .BACK TO command in the control file.

Use of the
commands.

ATTACH,

DETACH,

an .IF

SEND, CCONT, and CSTART monitor

Most user error conditions are not flagged by the Batch Controller, they are passed to the
monitor where they are flagged as errors.

3.6 SAMPLE JOBS
The following sample job setups illustrate the versatility of the Batch system.
The first example, Figure 3-2, shows a setup to list a card deck.

3-49

TEST1 [15,27]J • JONFS

Figure 3-2

Sample Job # I

The second example, Figure 3-3, produces a CREF listing of a MACRO deck whether or not
errors occur in the program.

OUT1 [30,1411 /NA!1E ,J. G .GIII1>:T

Figure 3-3

Sample Job #2

3-50

The third example, Figure 3-4, illustrates the use of error processing commands.

SF.OJ
A: : ; OR ANYTHING
.GOTO A

.GOTO A
.IF(ERROR) .GQTO B
.COMPILE TRIALl.MAC/CREF

SEOD

SDECK TRIALl. MAC
SPAS SWORD

~!.OICK

SJOB ERROR[4C,32]/NAMF.:A.WHALE

Figure 3-4

Sample Job #3

3-51

Figure 3-5 illustrates a MACRO assembly, two FORTRAN compilations, and execution of all
three programs, and shows how monitor commands are entered along with the programs and
the SPRINT-IO control cards.

SEOJ
.DIRECTORY
*RUN

BASIC SOt.:RCE PROGRAM

*NEW
• R BASIC

$F:XECUTE

FORTRAN SOURCE PROGRA....1

$FORTRAN PROG3.FOR

FORTRA:-J SOl"Rer.: PROGRAM

$PASSh'ORD VIKIKG

SJOB TEST4 [17,1231 /CORE: 20K
$SEQUENCE 9999

Figure 3-5

Sample Job #4

3-52

Figure 3-6 shows a simple SOUP update. Three
base files
are copied from cards to disk.
The user files are on DECtape and the correction from DEC is on paper tape.

SEOJ
.DISMOUNT DTA,PTR

: [l1,128J ,LPT:=DSK: ,DSK: [l1,127J

[l1,127J ,LPT:=DSK: ,FOO: ,PTR:

BASEl.MAC SOURCE PROGRAl1

.MOUNT PTR: :PAPERTAPE
.MOUNT DTA:FOO/VID:S152
~~l'~~WUI!C(JBREL» or to small «C(J BPFI»; in other words, the address lies
outside the bounds of the user program

The SAVed file is too large for the core assigned, or the file IS not a core
image file. (GET).

?ALREADY ASSIGNED TO JOB n
The device is already assigned to another user's job (job n).

4-2

?AMBIGUOUS ABBREVIATION
A command or switch has been abbreviated to the point that it is not unique.
(COMPIL).

?ARGS ARE: DAY, RUN, WAIT, READ, WRITE, VERSION, ALL, NONE
The user either did not type an argument or typed an illegal argument in the SET
WATCH command string.

dev:ASSIGNED
The device has been successfully assigned to the user's job.

?ASSIGNED TO JOB n(1), n(2), ...
If there is more than one device of the type specified, the numbers of the other
jobs that have the same type of device are output, unless the user assigning the
device has all the devices of the specified type. In this case, ?DEVICE
ASSIGNED TO JOB is output.

?ATTACH TO USER JOB FAILED
DAEMON could not attach to the user's job. (DAEMON).

?BAD DIRECTORY FOR DEVICE DTAn
The system cannot read or write the DECtape directory without getting some kind
of error. This error often occurs when the user tries to write on a write-locked
tape or use a DECtape that has never been written on.

?BATCH ONLY
The command issued can only be given by a batch job.

BLOCK NOT FREE
M specifies a unit or file structure logical block that is not free. (ALCFIL).

n BLOCKS ALREADY ALLOCATED
The file already exists. The new specification replaces, rather than updates, the
old specification. (ALCFIL).

4-3

?nlK BLOCKS OF CORE NEEDED
The user's current core allocation is less than the contents of .JBFF.

?BOMB OUT
The location within INITIA that detected the error will be in AC 15 and the
console lights. (INITIA).

?BOOTSTRAP LOADER IS NOT IN COPY; TRY IL
An attempt was made to write- the bootstrap loader onto a DECtape via the IT
switch before the loader was loaded into a core buffer and preserved with the
COpy core image. (COPY program).

?BOOTSTRAP LOADER WILL NOT FIT IN 3 BLOCKS
The user's bootstrap loader is too big to fit into blocks 0, l. and 2 of the output
DECtape. (COPY program).

?BUFFER CAPACITY EXCEEDED AND NO CORE AVAILABLE
The buffer is not large enough to handle the number of lines required for looking
ahead for matches, and additional core is not available. (FILCOM).

?BUSY
The terminal addressed is not communicating with the monitor (i.e., it is
accepting a command or returning output from a command). The operator's
terminal is never busy. (SEND, JCONT).

?CANNOT DO I/O AS REQUESTED
Input (or output) cannot be performed on one of the devices specified for input
(output). For example, input may have been requested for a device that can only
do output. (FUDGE2).

?CANNOT DO OUTPUT TO DEVICE dev
Output was attempted to a device that can only do input, or to a device assigned
a logical name. (QUEUE).

?CANNOT PROCESS EXTERNAL SYMBOLS
External symbols were encountered while loading the bootstrap loader with the
IL switch. (COPY program).

4-4

?CANNOT PROCESS HIGH SEG'S
While loading the bootstrap loader with the /L switch, high segment code was
encountered. (COPY program).

?CANNOT REATTACH FROM A BATCH SUBJOB
Batch jobs are not allowed to reattach their jobs. (REATT A).

?CANT ACCESS SYSTEM FILES
ACCT.SYS could not be read. Only the operator may LOGIN until ACCT.SYS is
ready. Consult the operator. (LOGIN).

?CANT ADD TO YOUR FILE STRUCTURE SEARCH LIST n
n is the error code from STRUUO when trying to add a file structure to search
list. (LOG IN).

?CANT ATT TO JOB
The project-programmer number specified is not that of the owner of the desired
job, the project-programmer number was not given when it was required, or the
PASSWORD given was incorrect. (ATTACH).

?dev CANT BE REASSIGNED
I.

The job's controlling terminal cannot be reassigned. or

the logical name would be duplicated, or

the logical name is a physical device name in the system and the job reassigning
the device is either logged-in under a different project-programmer number or
does not have operator privileges. (REASSIGN).

?CANT CONTINUE
The job was terminated due to
I.

all ERROR IN JOB messages (except for HALT),

the EXIT UUO,

the CLOSE command, or

the REA command when the device was INITed, and the user
attempted to continue his program at the point at which I/O was
terminated. The job cannot be continued.

4-5

CANT CREATE NEW FILE STRUCTURE SEARCH LIST
The monitor cannot create a new file structure search list.

?CANT DECIPHER THAT
There is a syntax error in the command string. (MOUNT, DISMOUNT, FILE).

?CANT DET DEY
The user is not logged-in under [1,2].

?CANT ENTER OUTPUT FILE n file descriptor
The ENTER to write the output file failed; n is the disk error code. (DUMP).

?CANT EXPAND TABLE xxxx
The DUMP program ran out of core in attempting to expand the indicated table.
(DUMP).

?CANT FIND INPUT FILE n file descriptor
DUMP cannot locate the file specified as the input file; n is the disk error code.
(DUMP).

?CANT FIND FILE file.ext
The specified file could not be found.

?CANT GET SWAPPING PARAMETERS
DAEMON tried to obtain the job's swapping parameters and failed. (DAEMON).

?CANT GET SWAPPING POINTER FOR JOB
DAEMON tried to obtain the pointer to the user's job on the swapping space and
could not because the GETTAB UUO failed. (DAEMON).

?CANT GET USERS PPN
DAEMON tried to obtain the user's project-programmer number and could not
because a GETTAB UUO failed. (DAEMON).

4-6

?CANT OPEN file structure name
The file structure is mounted but cannot be opened. No UFD is created, though
one may already exist. (LOGIN).

?CANT OPEN DEVICE dev
The specified device does not exist or it is assigned to another user. (DAEMON).

?CANT OPEN SWAP UNIT abc
DAEMON attempted to use the indicated swapping unit and failed. (DAEMON).

?CANT RENAME-FILE PRESERVED
An attempt was made via the IDISPOSE:RENAME switch to delete a preserved
file (i.e., a file whose owner's field is greater than 0). (QUEUE).

?CANT SET OUR SEARCH LIST
DAEMON tried to set its search list and failed in its attempt. (DAEMON).

?CANT SET SEARCH LIST

USER'S

DAEMON attempted to set its file structure search list to be the same as the
user's search list. (DAEMON).

?COMMAND ERROR
General catch-all error response for most commands. The syntax of the command
is in error, and the command cannot be deciphered.
In FILCOM, one of the following errors occurred
typed.
.

the last command string

There is no separator ( __ or =) between the output and input
specifications.

The input specification is completely null.

The two input files are not separated by a comma.

A file descriptor consists of characters other than alphanumeric
characters.

FILCOM does not recognize the specified switch.

4-7

The project-programmer number is not in standard format, i.e.,
[proj,prog].

The value of the specified switch is not octal.

The first input file is followed by a comma but the second input file
is null.

?COMMAND SWITCH REQUIRED
The given command string requires a FUDGE2 command code. (FUDGE2).

?COMMAND SYNTAX ERROR
TYPE IH FOR HELP
An illegal command string was entered. (GLOB).

?COMMA REQUIRED IN DIRECTORY
A project-programmer number has been specified without the separating comma.
(DUMP, QUEUE).

CONT BY OPR
The job has been continued by the operator. This message appears on the console
of the job being continued. (JCONT).

?CONTROL AND LOG FILES MUST BE DISTINCT
The control file cannot be the same file as the log file. (QUEUE).

?2K CORE NEEDED AND NOT A VAJ.LABLE
FILCOM needs 2K of core to initialize 110 devices and this core is not available
from the monitor. (FILCOM).

%CPUn OPR I ACTION REQUESTED
The Job's CPU specification includes a CPU which is not running or is not
scheduling jobs. The monitor remembers the specification 'and uses the CPU as
soon as it is started. If at least one CPU is running, the message is printed only
once, since the job can run on another CPU.

?DAEMON FILE MUST BE WRITTEN ON A DISK
The device specified was a nondisk device. (DAEMON).
4-8

?DAEMON NOT RUNNING
The DAEMON program has not been initialized. It must be started by the
operator to allow the DUMP and DCORE commands to operate. (DUMP,
DCORE).

?DETACH UUO FAILED
DAEMON could not detach itself from the TTY. Note that DAEMON does not
detach itself if it is loaded with DDT. (DAEMON).

?DATA ERROR ON DEVICE PTR
A read error has occurred on the paper-tape reader.

?DESTlNATION DEVICE ERROR
An I/O error occurred on the output device. (GLOB).

?DEVICE CANT BE REASSIGNED
I.

The job's controlling terminal cannot be reassigned,

the logical name would be duplicated, or

the logical name is a physical device name and the job reassigning the device is
either logged in under a different project-programmer number or is not the
operator.

?DEVICE ERROR ON OUTPUT DEVICE
A write error has occurred on the output file. (FUDGE2).

?DEVICE INIT FAILURE
The specified device has been assigned to another job or does not exist.

?DEVICE MUST BE A DECTAPE
The only device that can be specified
DECtape.

4-9

the COpy command string

the

?DEVICE NOT ASSIGNABLE
A non-privileged user cannot assign the requested device because it belongs to the
restricted pool of devices. The user should try to assign the device with the
MOUNT command. (ASSIGN).

?DEVICE NOT A VAILABLE
Specified device cannot be initialized because another user is using it or because
it does not exist.

?DEVICE WILDCARD ILLEGAL
The wildcard construction cannot be used
QUEUE).

the device specification. (DUMP,

?DIALOG MODE NOT SUPPORTED
The capability of interactive dialogue with the user has not been implemented.
(QUEUE).

?DIRECTORY FULL ON OUTPUT DEVICE
There is no room in the file directory on the output device to add the updated
file (nondisk devices only). (FUDGE2).

device name DISMOUNTED
The DISMOUNT command has completed.

?device name DISMOUNT INCOMPLETE
The DISMOUNT command was unsuccessful. In most cases, the reasons for
failure have already been listed by nonerror messages.

DONT KNOW CTY LINE NUMBER
The DCORE command cannot be typed on CTY. (DAEMON).

?DOUBLE DEVICE ILLEGAL
Two device names appeared in a row without an intervening filename, or two
colons appeared in a row, e.g., LPT:PTP: or DSKA ::FILEX. (DUMP, QUEUE).

4-10

?DOUBLE DIRECTORY ILLEGAL
Two directory names cannot appear without an intervening filename. (DUMP,
QUEUE).

?DOUBLE EXTENSION ILLEGAL
Two extensions cannot appear without an intervening filename or comma.
(DUMP, QUEUE).

?DOUBLE FILENAME ILLEGAL
Two filenames appeared in a row, or two periods appeared in a row; e.g., Q
TESTI TEST2 or TEXTX .. MAC. (DUMP, QUEUE).

DPAn NO DRIVE AVAILABLE ON THIS CONTROLLER
The drives on the specified controller are all in use. (MOUNT).

?DSK CANT BE REASSIGNED
An attempt was made to reassign the prototype disk device data block (DDB).

?DSKCHR FAILURE n ON UNIT abc
The DSKCHR UUO gave an unexpected error return; n is the disk error code.
Notify the operator. (DAEMON, KJOB).

?ENTER ERROR n
?DIRECTORY FULL
No additional files can be added to the directory of the output device; n is the
disk error code. (GLOB).

?ENTER FAILURE
The DECtape directory is full (i.e., there is no room for the file to be written on
the DECtape).

?ENTER FAILURE n
The output filename is null; n is the error code for an illegal filename (nondisk
devices only). (FUDGE2).

4-11

?ENTER FAILURE IN QUEUE MANAGER
QUEUE was unable to enter the files into the output queue. (QUEUE).

?ENTER FAILURE n ON DAEMON FILE
The ENTER to write the file failed; n is the disk error code.

?ENTRY BLOCK TOO LARGE PROGRAM name
The entry block of the named program is too large for the FUDGE2 entry table,
which allows for 100 entry naines. FUDGE2 can be reassembled with a larger
table. (FUDGE2).

?ERROR CLOSING OUTPUT, STATUS = n
An 110 error occurred while closing the file on disk; n is the disk error code
(DUMP).

?ERROR IN JOB 0
Usually this message indicates an error has occurred in the monitor. The message
appears on either the user's terminal or the operator's terminal and precedes a
one-line description of the error.

?ERROR IN DETACHED JOB n [prog name]
A fatal error occurred in the detached job or in the monitor while servicing the
job. This message appears only on the operator's terminal (OPR) and precedes a
one-line description of the error.

?EXCEED LOG-OUT m QUOTA BY n BLOCKS
The total number of blocks for all the user's files exceeds the maximum permitted
value (m) by the indicated amount n. The user may use PIP or the DELETE
command to remove files. Until the user is under the limit, he cannot dismount
the file structure. (DISMOUNT).

?EXECUTION DELETED
A program is prevented from being executed because of errors detected during
assembly, compilation, or loading. Loading is performed, but the loader exits to
the monitor without starting execution. (LOADER).

4-12

?EXPECTED FORMAT IS 'NNNK'

16K to 256K

The core-bank specified while processing the IT switch is not within the
acceptable range or does not terminate with the letter K; e.g., 32 is not
acceptable; 32K is. (COPY program).

file structure name FILE ERRORS EXIST
One of the files in a file structure has an error status. as flagged in the UFO of
that file structure. (LOG IN).

?FILENAME ALREADY IN USE
The specified file already exists. (COMPIL).

?FILENAME REQUIRED FOR INPUT QUEUE
A file cannot be entered into the Batch input queue without a filename.
(QUEUE).

?FILE NOT FOUND
File specified cannot be located if .LOW is not found in the same UFO as .SHR.

?FILE n NOT IN SA V FORMAT
The user indicated via the IX switch that the file is to be expanded hut the
specified file is not in compressed file format. N is either I or 2 indicating the
first file or the second file. (FILCOM).

?FILE n READ ERROR
An error has occurred on either the first or second input device. (Fl LCOM).

%FILES ARE DIFFERENT
The two input files specified in the command string are different (i.e .. the two
files are not two versions of the same file but are two different files). (FILCOM).

?FILE SWITCHES ILLEGAL IN OUTPUT FILE
File switches cannot appear on the left of the equal sign, I.e.,
specification. (QUEUE).

4-13

the output

?(3) FILE WAS BEING MODIFIED-file.ext
Another user is modifying the file. (COMPIL).

?(O) FILE WAS NOT FOUND-file.ext
The named file could not be located. (COMPIL).

?FORMAT OR READ ERROR IN AUXACC.SYS
LOGIN unexpectedly found an end-of-file or an error in AUXACC.SYS. Notify
the operator. (LOGIN).

file.ext FOUND BAD BY FAILSAFE READING MTA
The file in the file structure has an error status as flagged in the UFO of the file
structure. (LOGIN).

FROM JOB n
An informative message telling the user the job number to which the console was
attached or from which the console is detaching. (ATTACH. DETACH).

?FUDGE2 SYNTAX ERROR
An illegal command string was entered; for example, the left arrow was omitted
or a program name was specified for the output file. (FU DG E2).

?GIVING BACK TOO MUCH CORE
An internal problem in the DUMP program. Notify your system programmer or
software specialist. (DUMP).

?HALT AT USER adr
The user's program executed a HALT instruction at adr. Typing CONTINUE
resumes execution at the effective address of the HALT instruction.

file.ext HARDWARE DATA READ ERROR DETECTED
The file has a hardware data read error flagged in the UFD of the file structure.
(LOGIN).

4-14

file.ext HARDW ARE DATA WRITE ERROR DETECTED
The file has a hardware data write error flagged in the UFD of the file structure.
(LOGIN).

?HUNG DEVICE dev
If a device does not respond within a certain period after it is referenced, the
system decides that the device is not functioning and outputs this message.

?ILLEGAL BLOCK TYPE dev:file.ext
The block type used is not in the range 0-77. (FUDGE2).

?ILLEGAL BLOCK TYPE
While loading the bootstrap loader with the IL switch, an unrecognizable block
type was encountered by COPY. (COpy program).

?ILLEGAL COMMAND SYNTAX CHARACTER x
The character x is used incorrectly in the command string. (QUEUE).

?ILLEGAL DATA MODE FOR dev
The data mode specified for a device in the user's program is illegal, such as
dump mode for the terminal. (FUDGE2).

?drive ILLEGAL DRIVE NAME
The drive specified by the user is in conflict with the unit or controller type
required by the units of the file structure. (MOUNT).

?(O)ILLEGAL FILENAME
A filename of zero was specified. (FUDGE2).

?ILLEGAL IN BATCH JOB
The ATTACH, DETACH, SEND, CCONT, and CSTART monitor commands
cannot be used by a batch job.

?ILLEGAL JOB NUMBER
The job number is too large or is not defined in this configuration.

4-15

?ILLEGAL QUEUE DEVICE
The queue name specified cannot be used with the given switch. (QUEUE).

?ILLEGAL QUEUE NAME xxx
The queue is not one of the system queues, or the queue
(QUEUE).

a logical name.

?ILLEGAL SWITCH
A non-recognizable switch was used in the command string. (G LOB).

?ILLEGAL TO CREATE REQUEST FOR SOMEONE ELSE
Only the operator logged in under 1,2 can create queueing request for other users.
(QUEUE).

?ILLEGAL UUO AT USER adr
An illegal UUO was executed at user location adr.

?ILL INST. AT USER adr
An illegal operation code was encountered in the user's program.

?ILL MEM REF AT USER adr
An illegal memory reference was made by the user's program. If this message
occurred on a memory write, the error is at adr-I since the program counter has
been advanced. If it occurred on a memory read; then the illegal instruction is
probably in location adr. The user should use the E command to first examine
location adr-I and then location adr in order to determine the illegal instruction.
The index registers may also have to be examined.

?INPUT AND OUTPUT DECTAPES MAY NOT BE THE SAME DEVICE
The COPY program performs its operations on an input DECtape and an output
DECtape. These DECtapes cannot be the same. (COpy program).

?INPUT (or OUTPUT) BLOCK TOO LARGE
A DECtape block number greater than llOl(octal) was encountered. (COPY
program).

4-16

?INPUT (or OUTPUT) CHECKSUM OR PARITY ERROR
A read (or write) error has been detected. (COPY program).

?INPUT DEVICE dev CANNOT DO OUTPUT AT USER adr
Output was attempted on a device that can only do input (e.g., the card reader).

?INPUT (or OUTPUT) DEVICE ERROR
The DECtape control unit has detected the loss of data or a missed block. (COPY
program).

?INPUT DEVICE NOT A DISK
The input specifications in a QUEUE command must be disk files. (QUEUE).

?INPUT ERROR
An 110 error occurred while reading a temporary command file from the disk.
File should be rewritten. (COMPIL).

?INPUT ERROR - file.ext FILE NOT FOUND
The specified file could not be found on the input device. (FILCOM).

?INPUT ERROR ON DEVICE dev: STATUS (nnnnnn)
A data or device error occurred on input. (FUDGE2).

?INPUT ERROR, STATUS = n
An 110 error occurred while reading the file from disk; n is the disk error code.
A new INPUT command causes a new LOOKUP to be done. (DUMP,
DAEMON).

?INPUT (or OUTPUT) PREMATURE END OF FILE
When copying a DECtape, COPY encountered the end of file before it expected
it. This may happen when copying a PDP-9 DECtape to a PDP-IO DECtape.
(COPY program).

?INSUFFICIENT CORE FOR QUEUE
There is not enough core in system at the time of the KJOB command to make
an output queue entry. (QUEUE).
4-17

?INVALID ENTRY - TRY AGAIN
#
An illegal project-programmer number or password was entered and did not
match identification in system. The user is to retype his project-programmer
number and password. (LOGIN).

?110 TO UNASSIGNED CHANNEL AT USER adr
An attempt was made to do an OUTPUT, INPUT, OUT, or IN to a device that
the user's program has not initialized.

CHARACTER
?x IS AN ILLEGAL SWITCH
An illegal character or switch
(FUDGE2).

was

encountered

III

the

command

string.

?symbol IS A MULTIPLY DEFINED LOCAL
The named symbol is in more than one symbol table with different values.
(DUMP).

?symbol IS AN UNDEFINED SYMBOL
The named symbol is not in DUMP's symbol table. (DUMP).

?symbol IS AN UNDEFINED SYMBOL TABLE NAME
The named symbol table has not been loaded with an XTRACT command.
(DUMP).

?JOB CAPACITY EXCEEDED

This message is received by a user who attempts to login after the maximum
number of jobs that the system has been set to handle has been initiated. The
user should login at a later time. (LOGIN).

This message is received when a system program must create a job in order to
perform its operation and the maximum number of jobs has been initiated.
(SYSTAT, HELP, ATTACH).

This message may appear on rare occasions when an error made by the system
hardware causes a reduction in the job capacity of the system.

?JOB NOT WAITING
The job specified is not waiting to be continued. (JCONT).

4-18

JOB SAVED
The output is completed.

JOBn USER [p,p] LOGGED OFF TTY n AT hhmm dd-mm-yy
DELETED NO PROGRAM NAME SPECIFIED
The switch (/0 or IR) used in the command string requires that a program name
be given. (FUDGE2).

4-24

?NO REMOTE USERS. TRY AGAIN LATER
The operator has used the SET SCHEDULE command to prevent LOG INs from
remote terminals. The message of the day is still typed. (LOGIN).

NO ROOM IN QUEUE, TRY AGAIN LATER
There is no room in the queue for the user's request to be sent to the operator.
(MOUNT).

?(14) NO ROOM OR QUOTA EXCEEDED - file.ext
There is no room on the file structure or the user's quota on the file structure has
been exceeded.

%NO RUNNING CPUS IN SPECIFICATION
If none of the CPUs in the job's CPU specification are running, the user receives
this message every minute until the CPU is started or he types a new SET CPU
command.

?NO START ADR
Starting address or reenter address is zero, because the user failed to specify the
starting address in the END statement of the source program or in the START
command. However, an implicit starting address of 0 may be specified.

?NO SUCH DEVICE
The device name does not exist or was not assigned to this job.

?NO SUCH JOB
An attempt was made to attach to a job that has not been initialized.

?NO SUCH STR
A nonexistent file structure was specified. (KJOB).

?NO SUCH TTY
The terminal number is not part of the system configuration.

4-25

?NO SUCH UNIT
The unit does not exist or all units of this type are in use.

?NOT A JOB
The job number is not assigned to any currently running job. (A TT ACH, DSK,
JCONT). There is no job logged in at this terminal. (CONTINUE).

?NOT A SAVE FILE
The file is not a core image file.

?NOT A SPOOLING DEVICE
The device specified is not one of the spooling devices (LPT, COP, CDR, PTP,
PLT).

?NOT A STR - TRY AGAIN
The file structure specified is not recognized by the monitor.

?NOT A TTY
The device name given is not a terminal. (REATT A).

?drive NOT AVAILABLE
The drive indicated by the user is not currently available. (MOUNT).

?command NOT CODED
A command that is not in this version of DUMP was specified in the command
string. (DUMP).

?NOT ENOUGH ARGUMENTS
An insufficient number of files of one type has been specified. (FUDG E2).

?NOT ENOUGH CORE
The system cannot supply enough core to use as buffers or to read
program. (COMPIL).

4-26

III

a system

NOT ENOUGH DRIVES AVAILABLE
There are currently not enough drives of the right type to mount the file
structure. (MOUNT).

NOT ENOUGH TABLE SPACE FOR SWAPPING UNITS
There are more swapping units than DAEMON allowed for. DAEMON should
be reassembled. (DAEMON).

?dev file.ext program NOT FOUND
The file or the program was not found on the device or in the file specified. If a
program name is printed, this message may indicate that the program names in
the command string appear in a sequence different from their sequence within the
file. Therefore, the program may actually exist but was missed because of the
incorrect sequence in the command string. (FUDGE2).

?file.SA V NOT FOUND
The program file requested cannot be found on the system device or the specified
device.

drive NOT READY
The indicated drive is either off-line or physically write-locked when writeena-bled was requested. The operator will be notified. (MOUNT).

?NOT YET SUPPORTED COMMAND CODE switch
A switch has been specified that is not implemented. (QUEUE).

NO UFO CREATED
The user may access the file structure, but he cannot write in his disk area SInce
he has no UFO. (MOUNT).

?NULL DEVICE ILLEGAL
A colon has been found without a preceding device name. (QUEUE).

?NXM adr
While computing the value of an expression, a non-existent location was specified
when referencing the input file. (DUM P).

4-27

?nk OF CORE NEEDED or ?nP OF CORE NEEDED
There is insufficient free core to load the files; n is the size being requested for
the segment that failed (either high or low segment, not the sum of the high and
low segments). This message occurs when the virtual core for the system has been
exceeded or the core for this job has been exceeded. The user should type
CORE..) to determine what core has been exceeded, and whether the high or
low segment was too big. K denotes 1024 words which is the unit of core
allocation on a KAIO-based system, and P denotes 512 words (one page) which is
the unit of allocation on a KIlO-based system.

?OFFSET = 1000 TO 777600 (OCTAL)
The offset specified by the user is not within the acceptable range. (COpy
program).

?ONLY BATCH USERS MAY LOGIN. TRY AGAIN LATER
The operator has used the SET SCHEDULE command to prevent LOGINs,
except for BATCH jobs. The message of the day is still typed. (LOG IN).

?OPEN FAILURE ON DATA DEVICE dev
The OPEN on the specified device failed. (DUMP).

OPERATOR BUSY, HANG ON PLEASE.
The user must wait for the operator to become available.

OPERATOR NOTIFIED
1.

The operator is available and the user may continue typing his message.
(PLEASE).

A request is queued to the operator to perform a specified action. (MOUNT,
DISMOUNT).

OPERATOR REQUESTED TO MOUNT UNITS
A request is queued to the operator to mount and ready the packs on the proper
drives. (MOUNT).

OPERATOR REQUESTED TO READY DRIVES
One or more drives (as specified by previous messages) are not ready. A request
is queued to the operator. (MOUNT).

4-28

OPERATOR REQUESTED TO REMOVE PACKS
A request to physically remove the packs has beon queued to the operator.
(DISMOUNT).

OTHER USERS - CANNOT SINGLE ACCESS
Other users are currently using the file structure that has been specified with the
single-access switch (ISINGLE). The switch is ignored. (MOUNT).

OTHER USERS - CANT REMOVE
A DISMOUNT command requesting physical removal (/REMOV switch) of a
pack has been issued and there are other users of the pack. The switch is ignored.
(DISMOUNT).

OTHER USERS SAME PPN
A program has determined that other jobs are currently logged-in under the same
project-programmer number. (LOGIN, KJOB).

?OUT OF BOUNDS
The specified adr is not in the user's core area, or the high segment is writeprotected and the user does not have privileges to the file that initialized the high
segment. (D, E).

?OUTPUT DEVICE dev CANNOT DO INPUT AT USER adr
An attempt was made to input from an output device (e.g., the line printer).

?OUTPUT DEVICE ERROR
An error has occurred on the output device. (FILCOM).

?OUTPUT ERROR
An I/O error occurred while writing a temporary command file on disk.
(COMPIL).

?OUTPUT ERROR, STATUS = n
An I/O error occurred while writing the file on disk; n is the disk error code.
(DAEMON).

4-29

?OUTPUT INITIALIZATION ERROR
The output device cannot be initialized for one of the following reasons:
I.

The device does not exist or is assigned to another job.

The device is not an output device.

The file cannot be placed on the output device. (FILCOM).

PASSWORD:
The user must type a PASSWORD which matches that in the ACCT.SYS entry
for this project-programmer number. Echoing is suppressed to preserve
PASSWORD security. If the user is at a half-duplex (local copy) terminal, this
message is replaced by a sequence of random over-typed characters. over which
the user types his PASSWORD. (LOGIN).

PAUSE ... CC TO QUIT, CR TO CONT)
The /PAUSE switch has been specified, and an operator action is about to be
requested. 'c aborts the command before the request is queued to the operator.
Carriage return-line feed allows the command to continue. and the request is
queued to the operator. (DISMOUNT).

?PC OUT OF BOUNDS AT USER adr
An illegal transfer has been made by the user program to user location adr.

?PLEASE KJOB OR DETACH
Attempt was made to LOG IN a job when the user already has a job initialized at
that terminal. (LOG IN).

?PLEASE LOGIN AS [OPR]
The operator is the only person that can initialize DAEMON by typing R
DAEMON.

?PLEASE TYPE

FIRST

A command which would start a job has been issued after a CSTART or
CCONT.

4-30

?PPN HAS EXPIRED
The current date is greater than the expiration date of the project-programmer
number. The user may not login until expiration date is changed by the system
manager. (LOG IN).

?PROGRAM ERROR WHILE RESETTING MASTER DEVICE
FUDGE2 cannot find the master device or cannot find the program on the
master device. (FUDGE2).

?PROJECT I MAY NOT BE PTY
Project I is never allowed to login over a pseudo-TTY. (LOGIN).

?(2) PROTECTION FAILURE - file.ext
There was a protection failure or the directory on DECtape had no room for the
file. (COMPIL).

?PTR INIT FAILURE
The logical device PTR is not available or could not otherwise be initialized.
(COPY program).

QUOTA.SYS LOOKUP FAILURE
The LOOKUP to read QUOTA.SYS failed. (MOUNT).

QUOTA.SYS NOT ON STRUCTURE
QUOT A.SYS is not part of this structure. The user may still use the file structure,
but no UFO will be created. (MOUNT).

QUOT A.SYS READ ERROR
An 110 error occurred while reading QUOTA.SYS. (MOUNT).

QUOTA.SYS WRONG FORMAT VERSION
Wrong version of QUOT A.SYS is on the file structure being mounted. Consult
the operator. (MOUNT).

4-31

?file structure name RENAME FAILURE n
The RENAME to change the protection of the file failed; n is the disk error code.
(KJOB, LOGOUT).

?(4) RENAME fiLENAME ALREADY EXISTS - file.ext
The new filename on a RENAME command already exists. (COMPIL).

REQUEST STORED
n COMMAND IN QUEUE
The request typed by the user has been placed in a queue to be performed when
possib1e. n is the number of requests in the queue for all users. (FILE, MOUNT,
DISMOUNT).

?REQUIRES DEVICE NAME
The device name or file structure name
DISMOUNT commands.

required with the MOUNT and

?RIGHT BRACKET REQUIRED IN DIRECTORY
The project-programmer number must be enclosed in square brackets. (QUEUE).

%SEARCH LIST DOES NOT ALLOW CREATES
There are no file structures available to the user on which he can write. Run
MOUNT or SETSRC to modify the search list as necessary. (LOGIN).

%SEARCH LIST IS EMPTY
There are no file structures in the DSK: search list that are available to the user.
He can run the SETSRC program to modify his search list. (LOGIN).

'?SINGLE-ACCESS BY JOB n
The file structure is already single access by the indicated user. (MOUNT).

file.ext SOFTWARE CHECKSUM OR REDUNDANCY ERROR
The file has no error as flagged in the UFD of the file structure. (LOGIN).

4-32

?SOME OTHER TIME
The user is not scheduled to LOG IN at this time. He should try again when he is
allowed to login. (LOG IN).

?SORRY, CANT OPEN DSK, PLEASE CALL THE OPERATOR
This message is returned from the GRIPE program.

?SORRY, CANT WRITE IN COMPLAINT AREA, PLEASE CALL THE OPERATOR
This message is returned from the GRIPE program.

?SORRY, COMPLAINT BASKET IS FULL, PLEASE CALL THE OPERATOR
This message is returned from the GRIPE program.

?SORRY, NO UFD FOR COMPLAINT BASKET, PLEASE CALL THE OPERATOR.
This message is returned from the GRIPE program.

?SPTABO JOB ABORTED BY OPERATOR
The operator intentionally terminated the job.

?SPTAMO ASCII MODE ONLY ON NON-CDR DEVICES
The user has attempted to read a non-ASCII file on a device other than the cardreader.

%SPTBCK BINARY CHECKSUM ERROR ON CARD #n
A binary checksum error has been detected on card number n.

%SPTBDT BAD DATE-TIME SPECIFICATION ON Iswitch SWITCH - IGNORED
The specified switch will be ignored because the date-time was specified in an
invalid or unrecognizable format.

[SPTCBO JOB CONTINUED BY OPERATOR]
The operator resumed the processing of the job. This message would occur
subsequent to [SPTSBO JOB STOPPED BY OPERATOR].

4-33

?SPTCLB CAN'T LOGIN AS A BATCH JOB
The accounting system is set up so that this user is not permitted to run batch
jobs. Consult the system administrator.

?SPTDDI DOUBLE DIRECTORY ILLEGAL
Two directory names cannot appear without an intervening filename.

?SPTDDV DOUBLE DEVICE ILLEGAL
Two device names appeared in a row without an intervening filename (e.g .. LPT:
PTP:) or two colons appeared in a row (e.g., DSKA::FILEX).

?SPTDEX DOUBLE EXTENSION ILLEGAL
Two extensions cannot appear in a row without an intervening filename or
comma (,).

?SPTDFN DOUBLE FILENAME ILLEGAL
Two filenames appeared in a row (e.g., $COBOL TESTI TEST2) or two periods
appeared in a row (e.g., TEST3 .. CBL).

?SPTDNA DEVICE dev NOT AVAILABLE
Specified output device cannot be initialized because it is currently being used or
because it does not exist.

?SPTDND DEVICE dev IS NOT A DISK
The user asked to spool files onto a device that was not a disk.

?SPTENT ENTER ERROR n - xxx
Where n represents the number and xxx represents the text of one of the
messages in Table 4-1 in section 4.2.

%SPTEPF EXTRANEOUS PASSWORD CARD FOUND - IGNORED
Either the installation does not require a password, or the user included more than
one $PASSWOR D card with his job.

?SPTEWF ERROR WRITING FILE
An 110 error occurred while writing the user's file.

4-34

S£'p/£'lI1bN

/974

?SPTFSR FILESPEC REQUIRED ON $INCLUDE CARD
The user has omitted the file specification on the $INCLUDE card. It is necessary
to correct the card and start the job again.

[SPTFST FILE SUBMITTED TO dev QUEUE]
Where dev represents the line-printer, plotter, card-punch or papertape.

%SPTHOL n HOLLERITH ERRORS IN CARD #n
n Hollerith errors were detected in card number n.

%SPTIBC ILLEGAL BINARY CARD - CARD #n
Card number n is not a legal binary card.

?SPTICC ILLEGAL CONTROL CARD $card name -- CARD #n
The card name on card number n is not a name recognized by SPRINT-IO.
Consult Chapter 3 for a description of the SPRINT-lO control cards.

?SPTIDS ILLEGAL DIRECTORY SPECIFICATION
The format of the directory information enclosed within the square
(0) brackets is incorrect.

or angle

?SPTIFP ILLEGAL FORMAT FOR PPN
Refer to Chapter 3, section 3.3.13 for a description of the format of the projectprogrammer number.

?SPTIPP INCORRECT PPN OR PASSWORD
Either the project-programmer number specified on the job card is not in the
system accounting files or the password specified on the $PASSWORD card is
incorrect for the specified project -programmer number.

%SPTISV 'n' IS AN ILLEGAL VALUE FOR THE Iswitch SWITCH - VALUE IGNORED
This message warns the user that the argument he has used on the specified
switch is not valid for that switch and that the job will be processed as though no
argument had been specified. For example if the user had specified,/WIDTH:
999, SPRINT will assume IWIDTH:80. For more information, refer to Chapter 3.

4-35

September /974

%SPTISW Iswitch IS NOT LEG AL ON THE $card NAME CARD - IGNORED
The switch specified by the user is not valid on the SPRINT control card. The
switch will be ignored. Refer to the individual control card descriptions in
Chapter 3 to determine the switches that are valid for each card.

%SPTNAU NO AUXACC ENTRY
There is no entry in the system file AUXACC.SYS for the project-programmer
number specified on the $JOB card. Consult the system administrator.

?SPTNDV NULL DEVICE ILLEGAL
A colon has been found without a preceding device name.

%SPTNEF NO END-OF-FILE CARD FOUND - EOF ASSUMED
SPRINT-IO encountered a new $SEQUENCE or $10B without finding a previous
$EOJ or end-of-file card.

%SPTNFT NO FILES TO LOAD
The user has placed a $DATA or $EXECUTE card in his deck but has not
preceded it by a $-Ianguage, $INCLUDE or a $RELOCATABLE card. Refer to
Chapter 3, sections 3.3.4 and 3.3.10.

?SPTNYP SPECIFIED PPN IS NOT YOURS
The user has attempted to run SPRINT-IO himself and the project-programmer
number on the $10B card is different from the one he used to LOGIN.

[SPTPRG UNIQUE PROGRAMMER NUMBER IS nJ
This message informs the user of the unique programmer number that LOGIN
has assigned to him.

?SPTPWR PASSWORD IS REQUIRED
The user must give a password which matches the password in the ACCT.SYS for
the specified project-programmer number.

?SPTQTA QUOTA EXCEEDED ON dev WRITING USER FILE
SPRINT was unable to spool the user's input due to the lack of sufficient space
on the specified device.

4-36

[SPTSBO JOB STOPPED BY OPERATOR]
The operator temporarily stopped the job.

[SPTSFD UNIQUE SFD IS x]
The user has specified the/UNIQUE switch with a value of 2 on the $JOB card.

?SPTSND SFD NESTING TOO DEEP
The directory specification in a filespec required a directory path which contained
more than the maximum permissible number of SFD's.

?SPTTMB TOO MANY ILLEGAL BINARY CARDS
The number of illegal binary cards has exceeded the limit specified
IERROR switch on the $JOB card.

III

the

III

the

?SPTTMC TOO MANY BINARY CHECKSUM ERRORS
The number of binary checksum errors has exceeded the limit specified
IERROR switch on the $JOB card.

?SPTTMH TOO MANY HOLLERITH ERRORS
The number of Hollerith errors has exceeded the limit specified in the IERROR
switch on the $JOB card.

%SPTUCO UNEXPECTED CHARACTER(S) 'x' ON CONTROL CARD - IGNORED
While scanning for a switch, SPRINT-IO encountered character 'x'. SPRINT-JO
will ignore this unexpected character and will look for a slash (I), (indicating the
next switch) or the end of card and ignore any information between. For example,
if the user has accidently punched or typed a question mark (?) instead of a slash
(I) to indicate a switch, then that switch will be ignored.

%SPTURS Iswitch IS AN UNRECOGNIZED SWITCH - IGNORED
The switch specified is not recognized by SPRINT-IO.

?ST ATION NOT IN CONTACT
The requested station is not in contact with the central station. (LOCATE).

4-37

Sefltember 1974

?STATION NUMBER INVALID
The requested station number is not recognized by the system. (LOCATE).

STRUCTURE ALREADY MOUNTED
The requested file structure already exists and does not need to be physically
mounted. (MOUNT).

?STRUCTURE NOT IN STRLST.SYS
The file structure name does not exist in the system administrator's file SYS:
STRLST.SYS and, therefore, is not defined for the system. The operator or
administrator may be requested to define the file structure by adding it to
STRLST.SYS with the REACT program. (MOUNT).

?STRUUO FAILURE
The STRUUO
LOGOUT).

UUO gave an

error return.

Notify

the operator. (KJOB,

%SUPERSEDING EXISTING FILE
A warning message indicating that a file already exists with the specified name.
This file is being superseded. (TECO).

%SWAP READ ERROR UNIT abc STATUS

An 110 error occurred while reading the swapping space. The data is written into
the DAEMON file as read. (DCORE).

?SWITCH ERROR
An illegal switch specification was given. (COPY program).

?switch SWITCH ILLEGAL
The switch specified cannot be used with the given queue name. (QUEUE).

?SWITCH VALUE TOO LARG E x
The value given to the switch exceeds the maximum value. (QUEUE).

4-38

?SYNTAX ERROR
There is a syntax error in the command string. Check for incorrect parentheses or
two operators in a row.

?SYSSTR FAILURE
The SYSSTR UUO gave an error return. Notify the operator. (KJOB, LOGOUT).

?SYSTEM ERROR - xxxxxx
System errors designate operator or system errors and are not a direct fault of the
user. They are typed for possible diagnostic use.

?SYSTEM NOT AVAILABLE
The operator has used the SET SCHED command to prevent LOG INs from
timesharing terminals. The message of the day is still typed. (LOG IN).

?TABLE OVERFLOW - CORE UUO FAILED TRYING TO EXPAND TO xxx
The GLOB program requested additional core from the monitor, but none was
available. (G LOB).

?THIS MONITOR WAS BUILT FOR A xxx AND WILL NOT RUN PROPERLY ON A
yyy
The monitor is not running on the machine for which it was built. xxx and yyy
are PDP-6, KA 10, or KIlO.

?TIME LIMIT EXCEEDED
The time limit allocated for the job has been reached. The job is stopped and the
terminal is returned to monitor mode.

TIMESHARING WILL CEASE IN m HOURS n MINUTES
The KSYS command (OPSER) or SET KSYS UUO has been issued in order to
stop timesharing on the system at the indicated time.

?TOO FEW ARGUMENTS
A command has been typed, but necessary arguments are missing.

4-39

?TOO MANY FILENAMES OR PROGRAM NAMES
More than 40 program names or filenames were specified in the command string.
The user should separate the job into several segments. (FUDG E2).

?TOO MANY FILE STRUCTURES
The number of file structures exceeds the capacity of the monitor data base. The
current limit is l4(decimal). (ONCE ONLY).

?TOO MANY NAMES or ?TOO MANY SWITCHES
Command string complexity exceeds table space
(COMPIL).

the COMPIL program.

?TRANSMISSION ERROR
During a SAVE. GET, or RUN command, the system received parity errors from
the device, or was unable to read the user's file in some other way. This can be as
simple as trying to write on a write-locked tape.

?TRANSMISSION ERROR ON INPUT DEVICE dev
A transmission error has occurred while reading data from the specified device.
(FUDGE2).

?TRIED TO OVER WRITE DATA WORD
After writing the core image file, DAEMON backs up to overwrite a word not
known previously (e.g., the length of the category). In overwriting the word,
DAEMON encountered a deviation from the standard pattern used in originally
writing the word. (DAEMON).

?TRY LARGER ARG
The specified argument is too small for the program. This message is followed by
the standard output. (CORE).

?TTYn ALREADY ATTACHED
Job number is erroneous and
attached to the job.

attached to another console, or another user is

?TTY IN USE
The terminal requested is already controlling a job or
(REATTA).
4-40

otherwise

use.

TYPE CORE ·BANK OR OFFSET FOR OTBOOT
On a IT switch, COPY asks for a core bank or offset for the bootstrap loader.
The core bank is 16K to 256K and the offset is 1000 to 777600 (octal). (COPY
program).

TYPE H FOR HELP
An unintelligible response or command has been typed. Either the filename or the
CONFIRM: message is repeated, depending upon what was typed. (KJOB).

?UFD ENTER FAILURE n
Failure in trying to create UFO; n is the disk error code. Notify the operator.
(LOGIN).

?file structure name UFO INTERLOCK BUSY
Could not get UFO interlock when trying to set up a UFO. The UFO is not
currently set up. Notify the operator. (LOGIN).

?UFO LOOKUP FAILURE n
A failure occurred
operator. (LOGIN).

setting up a UFO; n

the disk error code. Notify the

?UFO OUTPUT FAILURE n
The output failed when trying to create the UFO (4-series); n is the software
channel status. (LOGIN).

?file structure name UFO REAO ERROR, STATUS = n
A read error occurred while reading the user's UFO on the file structure. Status n
tells which error occurred. Notify the operator. (KJOB, LOGOUT).

?UFO RENAME FAILURE n
A failure occurred
operator. (LOGIN).

setting up a UFO; n is the disk error code. Notify the

?UNOEFINEO SWITCH switch
The specified switch is either undefined or not unique. (MOUNT, DISMOUNT).

4-41

?UNEQUAL NUMBER OF MASTER AND TRANSACTION PROGRAMS
On a replace request. the number of master programs (or files) does not equal the
number of transaction programs (or files). (FUDGE2).

UNIT abc ALREADY MOUNTED ON DRIVE DPAn
The file structure is already mounted but
specified. (MOUNT).

on different drives than the .user

?UNKNOWN COMMAND
The monitor passed a command to COMPIL which COMPIL does not recognize.
(COMPIL).

?UNKNOWN DEFAULT FOR SWITCH switch
The default condition is not known for the specified switch. (DUMP. QUEUE).

?UNKNOWN SWITCH switch
The switch named has been mistyped. (DUMP, QUEUE).

?UNKNOWN SWITCH VALUE n
The argument specified with the switch has been mistyped. (DUMP. QUEUE).

?UNRECOGNIZABLE SWITCH
An ambiguous or undefined word followed a slash. (COMPIL).

?UUO AT USER adr
This message accompanies many error messages and indicates the location of the
UUO that was the last instruction the user program executed before the error
occurred.

n VERIFICATION ERRORS
On a word by word comparison requested via the IV switch. n discrepancies have
been detected between the input DECtape and output DECtape. (COPY
program).

4-42

WAITING ...
A request has been queued to the operator and the command is waiting for the
operator to complete the request. If the user does not want to wait for completion
of the operator's action, he can type control-C without aborting the command.
The operator action will still be completed. Later a DISMOUNT/CHECK or
MOUNT /CHECK can be given to check for completion. (MOUNT, DISMOUNT).

WAIT PLS
The system's primary accounting file FACT.SYS was busy. It is retried for ten
seconds before FACT.xOI is tried. This message can appear if many users are
logging in simultaneously. (LOGIN, KJOB, LOGOUT).

%WARNING - INPUT REQUEST USES ONLY TWO ENTRIES
Only two files can be specified in the input queue request, the control file and the
log file. (QUEUE).

!WARNING NO INDEX ON OUTPUT FILE-CONTINUING
The user has changed the structure of the index library file when deleting,
appending, or inserting, thereby invalidating the index. The index· has been
removed from the new file. Reindexing is required. (FUDGE2).

?dev WASNT ASSIGNED
The device is not currently assigned to the user's job and cannot be deassigned or
reassigned by the job.

?WASNT DET
The specified device is not detached.
NAME
?WILDCARD ILLEGAL IN INPUT QUEUE FILE DIRECTORY
EXTENSION
The wildcard construction cannot be used when specifying the Batch input queue.
(QUEUE).

NAME
?WILDCARD ILLEGAL IN OUTPUT DIRECTORY
EXTENSION
The wildcard construction cannot be used in the output queue specification.
(QUEUE).
4-43

?WRITE LOCK ERROR
An attempt was made to write on a write-locked DECtape. (COPY program).

?WRONG FORMAT FOR SYMBOL
A symbol was given in the format program :symbol and a symbol name did not
follow the colon; in other words, the colon must be followed by a symbol.
(DUMP).

?WRONG FORMAT VERSION NUMBER IN SYSTEM FILES
Wrong version of ACCT.SYS or AUXACC.SYS is on the system. Consult the
operator so that he can run REACT to change the accounting files. (LOG IN).

YOU ARE LOGG ED IN AS n,m
When a user logs in with a unique programmer number (project, #), this
message informs him of the project-programmer number that LOG IN assigned.
(LOGIN).

?YOU DONT HAVE PRIVILEGES TO WRITE

DAEMON
CCL

FILE

The user attempted to write in a file to which he did not have access.
(DAEMON).

?I + InK CORE
VIR. CORE LEFT = 0
The swapping space or the core allocated to timesharing is all in use (i.e., there is
no available virtual core). The user should wait a few minutes, and then attempt
to login again. If this message still appears, it should be reported to the operator.

m+n/p CORE
v

VIR. CORE LEFT
Key: m

number of hlocks in low segment.

n -

number of blocks in high segment.

maximum core per job. (Maximum physical user core unless limited
by operator, or there are jobs locked in core (refer to DECsystem- IO
Monitor Calls)).

v =

number of K blocks unassigned in core and on the swapping device.

4-44

Note that nK represents 1024-word blocks which is the unit of core allocation on
a KA lO-based system, and nP represents 512-word blocks which is the unit of
allocation on a KIlO-based system.

4.2 ERROR CODES
The following error codes are returned in AC on RUN and GETSEG UUOs, in location E
+ I on 4-word argument blocks of LOOKUP, ENTER, and RENAME UUOs, and in the
right half of location E + 3 on extended LOOKUP, ENTER, and RENAME UUOs. The
codes are defined in the S.MAC monitor file.

Table 4-1
Error Codes

Symbol

Explanation

Code

ERFNF%

File not found, illegal filename (0, *), or
names do not match (UPDATE).

ERIPP%

UFO does not exist on specified file structures.
(Incorrect project-programmer number.)

ERPRT%

Protection failure or directory full on OT A.

ERFBM%

File being modified (ENTER).

ERAEF%

Already existing filename (RENAME) or different filename (ENTER after LOOKUP).

ERISU%

Illegal sequence of UUOs (RENAME with
neither LOOKUP nor ENTER, LOOKUP after
ENTER).

ERTRN%

One of the following errors occurred:

4-45

file-

Transmission, device. or data error
(RUN, GETSEG only).

Hardware-detected device or data
error detected while reading the
UFO RIB or UFO data block.

Software-detected data inconsistency
error detected while reading the
UFO or file RIB.

Table 4-1 (Cont.)
Error Codes

Symbol

Code

Explanation

ERNSF%

Not a saved file (RUN, GETSEG only).

ERNEC%

Not enough core (RUN, GETSEG only).

ERDNA%

Device not available (RUN, GETSEG only).

ERNSD%

No such device (RUN, GETSEG only).

ERILU%

Illegal UUO (GETSEG only). No two-register
relocation capability.

ERNRM%

No room on this file structure or quota
exceeded (over-drawn quota not considered).

ERWLK%

Write-lock error. Cannot write on file structure.

ERNET%

Not enough table space in free core of monitor.

ERPOA%

Partial allocation only.

ERBNF%

Block not free on allocated position.

ERNSD%

Cannot supersede an existing directory (ENTER).

ERDNE%

Cannot delete
NAME).

ERSNF%

Sub-directory not found (some SFD
specified path was not found).

ERSLE%

Search list empty (LOOKUP or ENTER was
performed on generic device DSK and the
search list is empty).

ERLVL%

Cannot create a SFD nested deeper than the
maximum allowed level of nesting.

ERNCE%

No file structure in the job's search list has both
the no-create bit and the write-lock bit equal to
zero and has the UFD or SFD specified by the
default or explicit path (ENTER on generic
device DSK only).

ERSNS%

A GETSEG from a locked low segment is not
for a high segment that is a dormant, active, or
idle segment.
4-46

non-empty

directory

(RE-

the

APPENDIX A
STANDARD SYSTEM NAMES

A.I

FILENAME EXTENSIONS

Table A-I lists the filename extensions that have specific meanings in the DECsystem-lO.
Table A-I
Filename Extensions

Filename Extension

Type of File

Meaning

ABS

Object

Absolute (nonrelocatable) program

AID

Source

Source file in AID language

ALG

Source

Source file in ALGOL language

ALP

ASCII

Printer forms alignment

ATO

ASCII

OPSER automatic command file

AWT

Binary

Data for automatic wire tester.

BIO

Source

Source file in BLISIO

B II

Source

Source file in BLISS-II

BAC

Object

Reserved for output from the BASIC
Compiler

BAK

Source

Backup file from TECO or LINED

BAS

Source

Source file in BASIC language

BCM

ASCII

Listing file created by FILCOM (binary
compare)

BCP

Source

Source file in BCPL language

BIN

Binary

Binary file

BLB

ASCII

Blurb file

A-I

Table A-I (Cont.)
Filename Extensions

Filename Extension

Meaning

Type of File

BLI

Source

Source file in BLISS language

BUG

Object

Saved to show a program error

BWR

ASCII

Beware file listing warnings about a file
or program

CAL

Object

CAL data and program files

CBl

Source

Source file in COBOL language

CCl

ASCII

Alternate convention for command file
(@ command file construction for programs other than COMPIl)

CCO

ASCII

listing of modifications to non resident
software

COP

ASCII, Binary

Spooled output for card punch

CFC

ASCII

Compressed file compare. Group of
.SCM files combined with PIP.

CKP

Binary

Checkpoint core image file created by
COBOL operating system

CHN

Object

CHAIN file

CMD

ASCII

Command file for indirect commands
(@ construction for COMPIl)

CMP

ASCII

Complaint file by GRIPE

COR

ASCII

Correction file for SOUP

CRF

ASCII

CREF (cross-reference) input file

CTl

ASCII

MP batch control file

DAE

Binary

Default output
core dumps

OAT

ASCII, Binary

Data (FORTRAN) file

A-2

for

DAEMON-taken

Table A-I (Cant.)
Filename Extensions

Filename Extension

Type of File

Meaning

DDT

ASCII

Input file to FILDDT

OCT

ASCII

Dictionary of words

DIR

ASCII

Directory from fILE
DIRECT program

DMP

ASCII

COBOL compiler dump file

DOC

ASCII

Listing of modifications to the most
recent version of the software

DRW

Binary

Drawing for YBIOC drawing system

DSE

ASCII

Directory sorted by extension

DSF

ASCII

Directory sorted by filename

ERR

ASCII

Error message file

Source

Source file
guage

FAI

Source

Source file in FAI L language

FCL

Source

Source file in FOCAL language

FFS

ASCII

Fast FORTRAN stream

FLO

ASCII

English language flowchart

FOR

Source

Source file in FORTRAN-IO language

FRM

ASCII

Blank form for handwritten records

FTP

Source

FORTRAN test programs

FUD

ASCII

FUDGE2 listing output

GND

ASCII

List of ground
wlrewrap.

A-3

command

f40 (FORTRAN) lan-

pinS

for

automatic

Table A-I (Cont.)
Filename Extensions

Filename Extension

Type of File

Meaning

HGH

Object

Nonsharable high segment of a twosegment program (created by SAVE
command)

HLP

ASCII

Help files containing switch explanations, etc.

IDA

ASCII, Binary

COBOL ISAM data file

IDX

ASCII,SIXBIT

Index file of a COBOL ISAM file

INI

ASCII, Binary

Initialization file

LAP

ASCII

Output from the liSP compiler

LIB

ASCII

COBOL source library

LOG

ASCII

MPB or L1NK-1O log file

LOW

Object

Low segment of a two-segment program
(created by SAVE command)

LPT

ASCII

Spooled output for line printer

LSD

ASCII

Default output for DUMP program

LSP

Source

Source file in LISP language

LSQ

ASCII

Queue listing created by QUEUE program

LST

ASCII

Listing data created by assemblers and
compilers

MAC

Source

Source file in MACRO language

MAN

ASCII

Manual (documentation) file

MAP

ASCII

Loader or L1NK-1O map file

MEM

ASCII

Memorandum file

MID

Source

Source file in MIDAS (MIT Assembler)
language

A-4

Table A-I (Cont.)
Filename Extensions

Filename Extension

Type of File

Meaning

MIM

Binary

Snapshot of MIMIC simulator

MSB

Object

Music compiler binary output

MUS

Source

Music compiler input

Source

Source file in NELIAC language

NEW

All

New version of a program or file

OBJ

Object

PDP-II relocatable binary file

OLD

Source, Object

Backup source program

OPR

ASCII

Installation and assembly instructions

OVR

Object

COBOL overlay file

PAK

ASCII

Files compressed by PACK.TEC to save
disk space

PAL

Source

Source file
bler)

PII

Source

Source program in MACX II language

PLI

Source

Source file in PL 1 language

PLO

Binary

Compressed plot output

PLT

ASCII

Spooled output for plotter

PPL

Source

Source file in PPL language

PRO

Object

Program (save file)

PTP

ASCII, Binary

Spooled output for paper-tape punch

Qxx

ASCII

Edit backup file, like .BAK (all xx)

QUO

ASCII, Binary

Queued data file

QUE

Binary

Queue request file

A-5

PAL IO (PDP-8 assem-

Table A-I (Cont.)
Filename Extensions

Filename Extension

Meaning

Type of File

QUF

Binary

Master queue and request file

REL

Object

Relocatable binary file

RIM

Object

RIM loader file

RMT

Object

Read-in mode (RIM) format file (PIP)

RNC

ASCII

RUNOFF input for producing a .CCO
file

RND

ASCII

RUNOFF input for producing a .DOC
file

RNO

ASCII

Programming
NOFF input

RNP

ASCII

RUNOFF input for producing a .OPR
file

RSP

ASCII

Script response time log file

RSX

All

Files for RSX-IID

RTB

Object

Read-in
(PIP)

SAl

Source

Source file in SAIL language

SAY

Object

Low segment from a one-segment program (created by SAVE command)

SCD

ASCII

Differences in directory

SCM

ASCII

Listing file created by FILCOM (source
compare)

SCP

ASCII

SCRIPT control file

SEQ

ASCII, SIXBIT

Sequential COBOL data file, input to
ISAM program

SFD

Binary

Subfile directory (reserved usage)

A-6

specifications

RU-

mode (RIM lOB) format file

Table A-I (Cont.)
Filename Extensions

Filename Extension

Type of File

Meaning

SHR

Object

Sharable high segment file of a twosegment program (created by SAVE
command)

SMP

Source

Source file in SIMPLE language

SNO

Source

Source file in SNOBOL language

SNP

ASCII

Snapshot of disk by OSKLST

SPT

ASCII

SPRINT - created files

SRC

ASCII

Source files

SVE

Object

.SAVed file from a single user monitor

SYM

Binary

LINK-IO symbol file

SYS

Binary

Special system files

TEC

ASCII

TECO macro

TEM

ASCII, Binary

Temporary files

TMP

ASCII, Binary

Temporary files

TST

All

Test data

TXT

ASCII

Text file

UFO

Binary

User file directory (reserved usage)

UPO

ASCII

Updates flagged in margin (FILCOM)

VMX

Object

Expanded save file starting at a location
greater than zero and used as a special
support program for virtual memory.

WCH

ASCII

SCRIPT monitor (WATCH) file

WRL

ASCII

Wirelist

XOR

Binary

Module data for XOR tester

A-7

Table A-I (Cont.)
Filename Extensions

Filename Extension

XPN

Type of File

Meaning

Object

Expanded save file (FILEX and LINK10)

Zxx

A.2

ASCII

Edit original file (all xx)

RESERVED PROJECT-PROGRAMMER NUMBERS

Table A-2 itemizes the project-programmer numbers that are allocated for specific functions in
the DECsystem-1O.
Table A-2
Project-Programmer Numbers

Number

Meaning

I, I

Master File Directory (MFD)

1,2

Operator functions

1,3

Old or superseded versions of system programs (device
OLD:)

1,4

System library (device SYS:)

1,5

New or experimental versions of system programs (device
NEW:)

1,6

PUB:

2,*

Recommended for operator's use

2.5

Storage for help text files (*.HLP) (device HLP:)

3,3

System and Multiprogram Batch (MPB) queues

4*
,

Test and performance analysis systems

A-8

Table A-2 (Cant.)
Project-Programmer Numbers

Number

Meaning

4,4

FAILSAFE testing

4,5

FAILSAFE testing

5, *

Libraries

5, I

BASIC source library (device BAS:)

5,2

COBOL source library for COPY verb (device COB:)

5,3

PDP-II source library (device MXI:)

5,4

ALGOL source library (device ALG:)

5,5

BLISS source library (device BLI:)

5,6

FORTRAN source library (device FOR:)

5,7

MACRO source library (device MAC:)

5,10

Text editor library (device TED:)

5, II

Rei file library (device REL:)

5,12

RUNOFF library (device RNO:)

5,13

SNOBOL library (device SNO:)

5,14

Doc file library (device DOC:)

5,15

FAIL library (device FAI:)

5,16

MUSIC library (device MUS:)

5,17

MACRO universal files (device UNV:)

6,*

Field service and hardware diagnostics

7,7

Software acceptance

10, I

Special system programming storage region
copies of SYS:CRASH.SAV. (device XPN:)

10,6

Software distribution

10,7

Software distribution (device DEC:)

A-9

containing

A.3

RESERVED DEVICE NAMES

Table A-3 lists logical device names (ersatz devices) that are predefined in the DECsystem-lO.
To avoid confusion, it is recommended that these names not be used for private file
structures.
Table A-3
Device Names

Name

Use

UFD

Search List

ALG:

ALGOL library

[5,4]

System

User's

All currently mounted
structures

ALL:

BAS:

BASIC library

[5, I]

System

BLI:

BLISS library

[5,5]

System

COB:

COBOL library

[5,2]

System

DMP

DUMP command files

[5, II]

System

DOC:

DOC file library

[5,14]

System

User's

Job

DSK:
FAI:

FAIL library

[5,15]

System

FOR:

FORTRAN library

[5,6]

System

HLP:

HELP library

[2,5]

System

LIB:

User defined library

Set by each user

System

MAC:

MACRO library

[5,7]

System

MUS:

MUSIC library

[5,16]

System

MXI:

PDP-II library

[5,3]

System

NEW:

New system library

[1,5]

System

OLD:

Old system library

[ 1,3]

System

A-1O

Table A-3 (Cant.)
Device Names

Name

Use

UFD

Search List

REL:

Rei file library

[5,11)

System

RNO:

RUNOFF library

[5,12)

System

SNO:

SNOBOL library

[5,13)

System

SYS:

System library

[IA)

System

TED:

Text editor library

[5,10)

System

UNV:

MACRO universal
library

[5,17)

System

A-li

APPENDIX B
CARD CODES

Table B-1
ASCII Card Codes

ASCII
Character

Octal
Code

NULL
CTRL-A
CTRL-B
CTRL-C
CTRL-D
CTRL-E
CTRL-F
CTRL-G
CTRL-H
TAB
LF
VT
FF
CR
CTRL-N
CTRL-O
CTRL-P
CTRL-Q
CTRL-R
CTRL-S
CTRL-T
CTRL-U
CTRL-V
CTRL-W
CTRL-X
CTRL-Y
CTRL-Z
ESCAPE
CTRL-\
CTRL-)
CTRLCTRLSPACE

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
40

NOTE:

Card
Punches

ASCII
Character

12-0-9-8-1
12-9-1
12-9-2
12-9-3
9-7
0-9-8-5
0-9-8-6
0-9-8-7
11-9-6
12-9-5
0-9-5
12-9-8-3
12-9-8-4
12-9-8-5
12-9-8-6
12-9-8-7
12-11-9-8-1
11-9-1
11-9-2
11-9-3
9-8-4
9-8-5
9-2
0-9-6
11-9-8
11-9-8-1
9-8-7
0-9-7
11-9-8-4
11-9-8-5
11-9-8-6
11-9-8-7

@
A
B
C
0
E
F
G
H
I
J

K
L
M
N

P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[

\
)
A

Octal
Code

Card
Punches

100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
110
1 11
112
113
114
115
1 16
117
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
140

8-4
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
1 1-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
1 1- 5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
0-9
12-8-2
0-8-2
11-8-2
11-8-7
0-8-5
8-1

The ASCII character ESCAPE (octal 33) is also CTRL-[ on a terminal.

B-1

Table B-1 (Cont.)
ASCII Card Codes

ASCII
Character

!
,
#
$
%
&

(
)

*
+
,

/
0

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
,

<
=

Octal
Code
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77

Card
Punches

ASCII
Character

12-8-7
8-7
8-3
11-8-3
0-8-4
12
8-5
12-8-5
11-8-5
11-8-4
12-8-6
0-8-3
11
12-8-3
0-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8-2
11-8-6
12-8-4
8-6
0-8-6
0-8-7

a
b
c
d
e
f

g
h
i

j
k
1
m
n
0

P
q
r
s
t
u
v
w

Y
z

DEL

Octal
Code

Card
Punches

141
142
143
144
145
146
147
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177

12-0-1
12-0-2
12-0-3
12-0-4
12-0-5
12-0-6
12-0-7
12-0-8
12-0-9
12-11-1
12-11-2
12-11-3
12-11-4
12-11-5
12-11-6
12-11-7
12-11-8
12-11-9
11-0-2
11-0-3
11-0-4
11-0-5
11-0-6
11-0-7
11-0-8
11-0-9
12-0
12-11
11-0
11-0-1
12-9-7

NOTE: The ASCII characters
(octal 175 and 176) are treated by the monitor as
and
AL Tmode which is often considered to be the same as ESCAPE.

B-2

TABLE B-2
DEC-029 Card Codes

Character
SPACE

!
,
#

$
%
&
,

(
)

*
+
,

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
,

<
=
>
?
NOTE:

Octal
Code
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77

Card
Punches

Character

@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N

11-8-2
8-7
8-3
11-8-3
0-8-4
12
8-5
12-8-5
11-8-5
11-8-4
12-8-6
0-8-3
11
12-8-3
0-1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8-2
11-8-6
12-8-4
8-6
0-8-6
0-8-7

0
P

Q
R
S
T
U
V
W

X
y
Z
[

Octal codes 0-37 and 140-177 arc the same as in ASCII.

B-3

Octal
Code

Card
Punches

100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
110
III
112
113
114
115
116
117
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137

8-4
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
11-1
11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
0-9
12-8-2
11-8-7
0-8-2
12-8-7
0-8-5

Table B-3
DEC-026 Card Codes

Character

SPACE
!
,
#

%
&
,
(
)

*
+
,

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Octal
Code

40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
70
71
72

<
=
>

NOTE:

73
74
75
76
77

Card
Punches

Character
@

A
B
C
D
E

12-8-7
0-8-5
0-8-6
11-8-3
0-8-7
11-8-7
8-6
0-8-4
12-8-4
11-8-4
12
0-8-3
11
12-8-3
0-1
0

F
G
H

1
J
K
L
M

P
Q

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
11-8-2/11-0
0-8-2
12-8-6
8-3
11-8-6

S
T
U
V
W

X
y

Z
[

\
1
A

12-8-2/12-0

Octal codes 0-37 and 140-177 are the same as in ASCII.

8-4

Octal
Code

Card
Punches

100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137

8-4
12-1
12-2
12-3
12-4
12-5
12-6
12-7
12-8
12-9
II-I

11-2
11-3
11-4
11-5
11-6
11-7
11-8
11-9
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
0-7
0-8
0-9
11-8-5
8-7
12-8-5
8-5
8-2

APPENDIX C
TEMPORARY FILES

The temporary files in Table C-I are used by various programs
computing system. These files are in the following form:

the DECsystem- JO

nnn xxx.TMP
where nnn is the user's job number in decimal, with leading zeroes to make three digits. and
xxx specifies the use of the file.
TABLE C-I
Temporary Files

Name

Meaning

nnn ALG.TMP

Read by ALGOL and contains one line for each program
to be compiled. It may also contain the command NAME!
which causes ALGOL to transfer control to the named
program.

nnn ASI.TMP
nnn AS2.TMP
nnn AS3.TMP

Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains input to
the COBOL assembler.

nnn BLI.TMP

Read by BLISS and contains one line for each program to
be compiled.

nnn COB.TMP

Read by COBOL and contains one line for each program
to be compiled. It may also contain the command NAME!
which causes COBOL to transfer control to the named
program.

nnn CPY.TMP

Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains copies
of source files with library routines inserted.

nnn CRE.TMP

Read by CREF and contains commands for each file
which has produced a CREF listing on the disk. COMPIL
also reads this file each time a new CREF listing is
generated to prevent multiple requests for the same file
and to prevent discarding other requests that may not yet
have been listed.

C-I

Table C-l (Cont.)
Temporary Files

Meaning

Name

nnn DAE.TMP

Written by DAEMON to be read by DUMP.

nnn DMP.TMP

Read by DUMP as an input command file.

nnn EDS.TMP

Used by COMPIL to store the arguments of the most
recent EDIT, CREATE, TECO, or MAKE command.

nnn EDT.TMP

Written by COMPIL and read by LINED or TECO. It
contains a command for each EDIT, CREATE, TECO, or
MAKE command. For the MAKE or CREATE commands, it contains the command
S file.ext [p,p] $
For TECO or EDIT commands, it contains the command
S file.ext [p,p]

nnn ERA.TMP

Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and is the error file.

nnn FAl.TMP

Read by F AI L and contains one line for each program to
be compiled.

nnn FOR.TMP

Read by FORTRAN and contains one line for each
program to be compiled. It may also contain the command
NAME! which causes FORTRAN to transfer control to
the named program.

nnn GEN.TMP

Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains the
output of syntax processing.

nnn KJO.TMP

Read by KJOB as an input command file.

nnn LGO.TMP

Read by LOGOUT as an input command file.

nnn LHC.TMP

Created and read by LlNK-1O and contains the overflow
of the user's high segment. The file is used to produce core
images or saved files.

nnn LlN.TMP

Created by LINED and contains output file until the
rename process.

nnn LlT.TMP

Written, read, and deleted by COBOL and contains copy
of the literal pool.

C-2

Table C-I (Cont.)
Temporary Files

Meaning

Name

nnn LLCTMP

Created and read by LINK- 10 and contains the overflow
of the user's low segment. This file is used to produce core
images or saved files.

nnn LLS.TMP

Created an'd read by LINK-IO and contains the overflow
of the user's symbol file. This file is used to produce core
images or saved files.

nnn LNK.TMP

Read by LINK-IO and contains commands necessary for
loading.

nnn LOA.TMP

Read by LOADER and contains commands necessary for
loading.

nnn MACTMP

Read by MACRO and contains one line for each program
to be assembled. It may also contain the command
NAME! which causes MACRO to transfer control to the
named program.

nnn PII.TMP

Read by MACXII (the PDP-II assembler for the PDP-IO)
and contains one line for each program to be assembled,

nnn PLS.TMP

Read by PLEASE as an input command file.

nnn PIP.TMP

Read by PIP and contains commands to implement the
COM PI L-class commands that run PIP.

nnn QUE.TMP

Read by QUEUE as an input command file.

nnn RNO.TMP

Read by RUNOFF and contains commands for each file
which has produced a RUNOFF listing on the disk,

nnn SOI.TMP

Written, read and deleted by COBOL and contains the
intermediate sorted results of the data.

nnn SVCTMP

Used by COMPIL to store the arguments of the most
recent COMPILE, LOAD, EXECUTE, or DEBUG command.

nnn SNO.TMP

Read by SNOBOL and contains one line for each program
to be compiled.

nnn TECTMP

Created by TECO and contains output file until the
rename process,

C-3

Table C-l (Cant.)
Temporary Files

Meaning

Name

nnn TMP.TMP

Created by LINED during the rename process.

nnn XFO.TMP

Created by FI LEX as a result of the Q switch on the
output side.

nnn XFR.TMP

Created by FILEX as a result of the Q switch on the input
side.

C-4

APPENDIX D
SAVE AND SSAVE COMMANDS

Before writing SAVed or LOW files in response to SAVE and SSAVE commands (refer to the
individual command descriptions in Chapter 2), the monitor compresses the user's core image
by eliminating consecutive blocks of zeroes. This technique is known as zero-compression and
is used to save space on file media. Low segment files are zero-compressed on devices OTA,
MT A, and OSK, but high segment files are not because the high segment can be shared at
the time of the command.
SAVed files are ordinary binary files and can be copied using the IB switch in PIP. Files with
the LOW or SA V extension may be read in dump mode, but must be reexpanded before
being run. The monitor expands the file after input on a RUN, R, or GET command. The
FILEX program may be used to expand the file for other purposes.
The data format of a zero-compressed SAVed file consists of a series of IOWOs and data
block pairs and is terminated by a JRST A where A is the program starting address as
specified by the contents of .JBSA. Th·e format is as follows:

~X_W_D n_l _a_d_r_I_~
___

~I}

nl WORDS

---JI)

n2 WORDS

________

~X_W_D

____
n2_J_a_d_r_2_-_I______

XWD -nN, adr N-I
}

nN WORDS

~--------------------~

JRST A

Each IOWO describes the length of the following data block and the original location of the
data in core. The LH of the IOWO can be positive in which case the number of words is
taken as the number of words greater than 128K.
SA Ved files are read into the user's core area starting at location .JBSAV and then are
expanded to occupy the original relative locations. If the first word read is not an IOWO and
is positive, an old-format, noncom pressed saved file is assumed and no expansion is
performed.
.

0-1

A SAVE command issued to a magnetic tape writes
a.

a high segment (possibly null)

an EOF

a low segment (possibly null)

an EOF.

BGEJB l~ ElI~ I"6 J B
,,~------~)

....."..

LOW SEGMENT

HIGH SEGMENT

NULL HIGH SEGMENT

LOW SEGMENT

The monitor does not determine the file size of a low segment on a GET from magnetic tape;
therefore, a user must always specify a core argument or have enough core assigned to his job
for the file.
To save file space, only the high segment up through the highest nonzero location (relative 10
high segment origin) loaded, as specified in the LH of .JBHRL, will be written by the SAVE
command. If LH is zero (high segment created by CORE or REMAP UUO) or DDT is
present, the entire high segment will be written.
The LOADER indicates to the SAVE command how much data was loaded above the job
data area in the low segment by setting the LH of .JBCOR to the highest location in the low
segment that was not explicitly loaded with data (either zero or nonzero). Most programs are
written so that only the high segment contains nonzero data. In this case, SAVE and SSA VE
write only the high segments. This also saves file space and 110 time with the GET
command.
A number of locations in the job data area need to be initialized on a GET, although there is
no other data in the low segment. The SAVE command copies these locations into the first
lO(octal) locations of the high segment, provided it is not sharable. The locations are referred
to as the vestigial job data area (refer to DECsystem-1O Monitor Calls, Chapter I). Therefore.
the LOADER will load high segment programs starting at location 400010.
To prevent user confusion, SAVE and SSA VE delete a previous file with the extension .SHR
or .HGH; therefore, SAVE deletes a file with the extension .SHR, and SSA VE deletes a file
with the extension .HGH. SAVE and SSAVE commands also delete files with the extension
.LOW, if the high segment was the only segment written.

0-2

The regular access rights of the saved file indicate whether a user can perform a GET,R, or
RUN command. These commands assume that the user wants to execute (but not modify) the
high segment, independent of the access rights of the file used to initialize the segment. The
monitor always enables the hardware user-mode write protect to prevent the user program
from storing into the segment inadvertently.
To debug a reentrant system program, the user should make a private, nonsharable copy,
rather than modify the shared version and possibly cause harm to other users. To make a
private, nonsharable copy, the following commands are used:
GET prog
SAVE

Writes a file in the user directory as nonsharable.
The high segment in the user's addressing space
remains sharable.

GET

Overlays the sharable program with the nonsharable one from the user's directory. Now the user
can make patches while other users share the
version in the library.

If the user is debugging a sharable program in his UFD with the D command or the DDT
program, it is recommended that the program be nonsharable instead of sharable. The reason
for this is that the user may wish to modify the high segment during the debugging phase and
later reinitialize the original unmodified high segment from the file with a GET command.
However, since the high segment is sharable, the monitor will not do I/O into it, will not
reinitialize it from the disk file, and the user will receive the modified high segment instead.
NOTE

DDT modifies the high segment when it inserts breakpoints.
The following examples are the incorrect and correct methods of debugging a sharable
program. After the debugging phase is completed, the SSA VE command should be used to
save the program.
Example I: Incorrect Method
.DEBUG prog
EXECUTION

'C
;SA VE should
debugging

.SSAVE
.GET
JOB SETUP
.E 400010
4000101777777 777777 .D 0 0
.E
4000101 0 0
.GET
JOB SETUP
.E 400010
4000101 00

used

;not the original 777777
777777
D-3

Example 2: Correct Method
.DEBUG prog
EXECUTION

'c
.SAVE
.GET
JOB SETUP
.E 400010
4000101777777 777777.D 0 0
.E
4000101 00
.GET
JOB SETUP
.E 400010
400010/777777 777777

;the original file

Note that there are applications for a sharable data segment when the modified version of the
sharable segment is wanted rather than the original segment as initialized from the file. The
SSA VE command is then used.
A SAVE of a one-segment program and a SSA VE of a two-segment program of the same
name can coexist in the same directory, and the monitor keeps the two versions separate. This
allows for a common library, of reentrant and non-reentrant versions of the same system
programs to service both the PDP-6 and the DECsystem-lO. A sharable program may be
superseded into the directory by the SSAVE command. The monitor clears the high segment
in its table of sharable segments in use but does not remove the segment from the addressing
space of users currently using it. Only the users doing a GET,R, or RUN command or a
RUN or GETSEG UUO have the new sharable version.
When the SAVE or SSA VE command is used to save a sharable program with only a high
file, the monitor does not modify the vestigial job data area. This prohibits unauthorized users
from modifying the first 10 locations of a shared segment by executing a SAVE or SSA VE
command. This restriction does not exist if a low file is also written, because the GET
command reads the low file after the high file, so that the real job data area locations are set
from the low file. To change the version number of a sharable two-segment program with
only a high file, the following commands are used.
GET prog
SAVE
GET
D nnn mmm 137
SSAVE
The SAVE command makes the program non-sharabie so that the vestigial job data area can
be modified by the SSA VE.

D-4

APPENDIX E
SWITCHES

A switch is one or more characters preceded by a slash. Its appearance within a command
line causes a modification to be made to the meaning of the command line. There are two
classes of switches; namely, permanent switches and temporary switches.
A permanent switch applies to all filenames appearing after it within the command line.
Keyword file I Iswitch file2 file3

In this example, the permanent switch pertains to files 2 and 3. If a filename precedes the permanent switch, that filename and switch are separated by one or more commas and/or spaces.
A temporary switch applies only to that filename that directly precedes the switch.
keyword file I Iswitch file2 file3
No intervening spaces or commas are allowed between the temporary switch and its associated
filename.
Switches may be abbreviated; the letters which must be declared are those that will uniquely
specify the desired switch. For instance, if a command can use one of the following switches:
l.
2.
3.
4.

IABCD
IABC
IABBDE
IACBDE

In order to uniquely specify the switches, the user could abbreviate the switches to:
l.
2.

3.
4.

IABCD
IABC
IABB
lAC

Some examples of permanent and temporary switches arc:
COMPILE PROG,TEST.MAC,MANAGE/COBOL
Compile three files: namely, PROG (with a null extension) with
the default processor FORTRAN, TEST.MAC with MACRO. and
MANAGE with COBOL. The ICOBOL switch is a temporary
switch applying only to the filename directly preceding it.)

E-I

SepTember }974

COMPILE /COBOL,PROG,TEST.MAC,MANAGE
Compile three files; namely, PROG and MANAGE with COBOL
and TEST.MAC with MACRO. A filename written with a
recognizable processor extension (i.e.,. MAC) will always be
processed by the processor specified by the extension. A switch.
permanent or temporary, cannot override a recognizable processor
extension. The /COBOL switch is a permanent switch applying to
those filenames appearing after it.
CPUNCH ABC.MAC/PUNCH:ASCII TEST
Punch ABC.MAC in ASCII mode; and punch TEST in the data
mode of the file. The /PUNCH switch is a temporary switch
within this example.
CPUNCH /PUNCH:BINARY,ABC.MACTEST.FOO.
Punch ABC.MAC TEST and FOO in binary card code. The
/PUNCH switch is a permanent switch within this example.
The table appearing on the following pages contains a list of the switches described in this
manual. For each switch there appears a list of commands and/or programs which can
utilize the specified switch and the switch's meaning within the associated command line.

Applicable
Switch

Meaning

Commands/

Programs
/A

/ACCESS:n

FAILSA

Advance magnetic tape one physical unit.

FILCOM

Compare files in ASCII mode. This switch is used to
force a source compare on two ASCII files.

FILEX

File format is ASCII:
and PDP-15 tapes.

GLOB

Output all global symbols.

DIRECT

Update the access date to the current date for any
file of n blocks or less accessed (i.e .. listed) by the
DIRECT program. Since some installations delete
files that have not been recently accessed. this switch
allows the user to prevent such deletion by updating
the date. n is interpreted as a decimal number and
refers to the number of blocks actually written in the
file unless the / ALLOC switch IS also used. If
/ ACCESS is omitted, the date is not changed. If
/ ACCESS IS specified but :n is omitted, n = 5 is
assumed.

E-2

meaningful only for PDP-II

Switch

Applicable
Commands I
Programs

Meaning

I AFTER:tt

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
SUBMIT
TPUNCH

Process the request after the specified time. Time is
specified in the form described on page 1-12. The
resulting AFTER time must be less than the DEADLINE time. If either the switch or the value is omitted, no AFTER constraints are assumed.

IALGOL

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Compile the file with ALGOL.
with the ALG extension.

IALLOC

DIRECT

List the allocated length of the file instead of the
written length. Space on a structure is sometimes
allocated In units of more than one block for
efficiency. Therefore. the number of blocks allocated
to a file may be greater than the number of blocks
actually written. The allocated length is used by
LOGOUT In checking quotas. The total allocated
length of all files is the same as the length output by
the QUOLST program under the USED column.
Complement of IWRITTEN. (Disk and magnetic
tape only.)

FAILSA
FUDGE2

Backspace the magnetic tape one physical file.

FILCOM

Compare blank lines.
are ignored.

FILEX

Process a binary file; overrides the default extension.
Files read from a PDP-II format tape with this
switch contain four 8-bit by.tes in each 36-bit word.

CPUNCH
DIRECT
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
TPUNCH
FORTRAN

List only the files with a creation date before time t,
where t IS In the form dd-mm-yy hh:mm. If the
switch. or the value of the switch. is omitted. no
BEFORE cOllstraints are assumed.

IBEFORE:t

E-3

Assumed for files

Without this switch blank lines

September 1974

Switch

Applicable
Commands I
Programs

Meaning

IBEGIN:n

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
TPUNCH
PUNCH

Start the output on the nth page, card, or foot. If
this switch is omitted, output begins on the first unit.

IBIN

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Generate a binary file for each file compiled, The
filename of the binary file follows the standard
convention for determining the filename of the output
file, The extension IS .REL This IS the default
action, whenever a COMPILE, DEBUG, EXECUTE
or LOAD command is given.

IBLISS

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Compile this file with BLlSS-IO. Assumed for files
with the .BIO or BLI extension.

IBLOCKS

DIRECT

Output the length of the file In blocks instead of
words. Complement of IWORDS. IBLOCKS is the
default setting.

DTCOPY

Copy all blocks from the input DECtape to the
output DECtape.

FAILSA

Cause FAILSA to continue; particulars are detailed
within the description of the FAILSA program.

FILCOM

Ignore comments (all text on a line following a
semicolon) and spacing (spaces and tabs).

FILEX

Use a compressed file format; save file format. This
format is assumed for files with the extensions .SA V,
.LOW, or .SVE. The default output extension IS
.sA V unless the input extension is .LOW or .SVE, In
which case the extension remains unchanged.

QUEUE
SUBMIT
CPUNCH

Use n (decimal) as the maximum number of cards
that can be punched by this job. If the switch IS
omitted, no cards are punched. If the switch is given
with no value for n specified, 2000 cards arc
assumed.

ICARDS:n

E-4

Applicable
Switch

Commands I

Meaning

Programs
ICHARGE:a

QUEUE

Charge the run to the specified account.
implemented.)

ICHECK

DISMOUNT
MOUNT

Check and list pending requests.

/CHECKSUM

DIRECT

Compute and print an 18-bit checksum for each file.
Complement of INOCHECKSUM. (Disk and magnetic tape only.)

/COBOL

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Compile the file with COBOL.
with the .CBL extension.

/COMPILE

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Force a compilation of this file even if a binary file
exists with a newer date and time than the source
file.
This switch is used to obtain an extra
compilation (e.g .. in order to obtain a listing of the
compilation) because normally compilation is not
performed if the binary file is newer than the source
file.

ICOPIES:n

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
TPUNCH

Repeat the output the specified number of times: n
must be less than 64. If more than 63 copies are
needed. two separate requests must be made. If this
switch or its value IS not specified. the default
number of copies obtained is one.

/CORE:n

QUEUE
SUBMIT

Use n (in decimal K) as the maximum of core
memory that the job can use.
If the switch IS
omitted. the maximum of 25K is assumed: if the
switch is specified but the value of n is omitted. a
maximum of 40K is assumed.

ICREATE

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
TPUNCH
QUEUE
SUBMIT

Make a new entry into the card. plotter line printer.
paper tape. or specified outputlinput queue. This
switch is the default for the queue-operation switches.

SETSRC

Allow new files to be created on the file structure.

E-5

(Not yet

Assumed for files

Switch

Applicable
Commands/
Programs

Meaning

ICREF

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

FAILSA

Transfer control to DDT if it is loaded.

FILEX

Use dump file format. This format is assumed for
files with the .DM P extension.

lOOT

DEBUG

Load ODT regardless of the extension of the first file
in the command string. This is a permanent switch
and applies to all subsequent files.

IDEAOLlNE:tt

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
TPUNCH
QUEUE
SUBMIT

Process the request before the specified time. Time is
specified in the form described on page 1-12. The
resulting DEADLINE time must be greater than the
AFTER time. If the switch or its value is omitted no
DEADLINE constraints are assumed.

IDEFER

QUEUE

Make a new entry In the specified queue. but the
request is deferred until LOGOUT.
(Not yet
implemented.)

10ENSITY:n

DIRECT

Use the specified density when reading a magnetic
tape. n is either 200, 556, or 800 bpi. The default is
installation dependent and is modified. by the SET
DENSITY command.

10ELETE

QUEUE

Rename the file and delete name from the directory
immediately. Remove the file from the logged out
quota, and delete it after spooling.

10EPEND:n

QUEUE
SUBMIT

Specify the initial value of the dependency count in
decimal. When used with IMODlFY, this switch
changes the dependency count of another job. If n is
a signed number, that numher is added or subtracted
from the count of the current job. If n IS not a
signed number. the dependent job's dependency
count is equal to n. If this switch is omitted. no
dependency count is assumed.

E-6

September 1974

Switch

Applicable
Commandsl
Programs

IDETAIL

DIRECT

Meaning

Print all available information about a file except for
zero values. The protection and data mode are also
listed. even if thev have a value of zero. The author
IS not listed if he IS the same as the owner of the
directory. Numbers followed by a period are decimal
numbers. All others are interpreted as octal. (Disk
and magnetic tape only.)
~

IDISPOSE:
DELETE

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
SUBMIT
TPUNCH

Delete the file after it has been punched. plotted.
printed. spooled. or processed.

IDISPOSE:
PRESERVE

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
SUBMIT
TPUNCH

Do not delete the file after it has been processed.

IDISPOSE:
RENAME

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
SUBMIT
TPUNCH

Rename the file and delete current name from the
directory immediately (for QUEUE) or after it has
been processed for CPUNCH. PLOT. PRINT. SUBMIT. or TPUNCH). Remove the file from the
logged-out quota. and delete it after spooling (for
QUEUE).

FAILSA

Set the creation date and time word so that old files
can be eliminated by not being transferred III either
direction.
The format is as follows:

* IE mm/dd/yy.tttt

F1LEX

Use expanded core Image file format (used by
FILDDT). This format is assumed for files with the
extension of .XPN. The default output extension IS
.xPN.

GLOB

List only erroneous (multiply-defined and undefined)
symbols.

E-7

.Switch

Applicable
Commands/
Programs

Meaning

IEOTS

DIRECT

Stop at the logical end of the tape (two consecutive
tape marks) when reading a magnetic tape. Complement of I NO EaTS. IEOTS is the default condition.

FAILSA

Set the access date word. This switch IS used to
transfer. In either direction. only recently accessed
files or to save on tape and then delete from disk
files not recently accessed UK before IS or IU).

FILEX

Use PDP-IS DECtape format.

GLOB

List non-relocatable (fixed) symbols only.

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
PUNCH
QUEUE
SUBMIT
TPUNCH

List the entries in the specified queue. but do not upda te the queue.

IFAST

DIRECT

List the short form of the directory (i.e .. filename,
extension. structure name, and directory name).
Complement of INORMAL and ISLOW.

IFEET:n

QUEUE
SUBMIT

Use n (in decimal) as the maximum number
of feet of paper tape that the job can punch. If the
switch is omitted, no paper tape is punched. If the
value is omitted. the default is IO*B+20, where B is
the number of blocks in the request.

IFILES:n

DIRECT

Stop after n tape marks (files) when reading a
magnetic tape. If IFILES IS specified, but :n IS
omitted, n = I IS assumed. Note that the logical
EaT will also stop unless INOEOTS is specified.

IFILES:
ASCII

PRINT
QUEUE
TPUNCH

Interpret as ASCII text. This is assumed for all files
with extensions other than .DAT.

IFILES:
COBOL

PRINT
QUEUE

Interpret the file format as COBOL SIX BIT text.

E-8

Switch

Applicable
Commands I
Programs

Meaning

IFILES:
ELEVEN

QUEUE
TPUNCH

Specify that the file form is to be interpreted as four
8-bit bytes in each 36-bit word.

IFILES:
FORTRAN

PRINT
QUEUE

Interpret the file format as FORTRAN ASCII (obeys
FORTRAN control characters). This is assumed for
files with an extension of . DA T.

IFOROTS

EXECUTE
DEBUG
LOAD

Load the file with FOROTS (the new FORTRAN
object-time system).

IFORSE

EXECUTE
DEBUG
LOAD

Load the file with
object-time system).

IFORMS:a

PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE

Place the output on the specified forms.
The
argument to the switch must be six alphanumeric
characters In length. Normal forms (14 x II) are
used if this switch is omitted.

IFUDGE

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Create a disk file containing the names of the .REL
files produced as a result of the command string.
Arguments to this switch are:

FORSE (the old

FORTRAN

I FU DG E:dev:file.extlproj.prog]

IFIO

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Use the FORTRAN-IO compiler when compiling the
associated FORTRAN file. This should be used as a
permanent switch because it is not possible to load
F40 and FORTRAN-IO binary files together.

IF40

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Use the F40 compiler when compiling the associated
FORTRAN file. This IS the current default action.
This should be used as a permanent switch because it
is not possible to load F40 and FORTRAN-IO binary
files together.

DTCOPY

Do not restart the program after a parity error.
Output an error message and continue the program.

E-9

Applicable
Commands/
Programs

Switch

FAILSA

Meaning

Enahle the user to save and restore files from a user's
area other than his own. This switch sets the source
project-programmer numher to the specified numher
of the form:

* /G mmm.nn
The new value is retained until the next /G switch is
issued.
FILEX

Ignore read errors on the input device and continue
FILEX. Checks the always-had-checksum hit 111 the
S-series monitor. so this switch is not needed for files
with .RPABC ON (e.g .. CRASH.SAY).

DTCOPY
DIRECT
FAILSA
FILCOM
FILEX
GLOB
MOUNT

Print messages which will he of help to the user.

/HEADER:
o or 1

PRINT
QUEUE

If n equals I (default). do not output headers.
output hlock headers at heginning of file.

/I!ELP

QUEUE

Print a message givll1g the general format of the
command string and explain the dialogue that IS
entered if the user needs additional help.

DIRECT
QUEUE

List all switches without their explanations. An
asterisk (*) prefixes those switches which have a
single-letter ahbreviation.

FAILSA

Set the magnetic tape density to the installation
standard.

FILEX

Process an image mode file:
PDP-II and PDP-IS tapes.

F;\I LS;\

Look for the next trailer record (which marks the end
of the save set) and point to the heginning of the
next save set on the tape or to the logical end of the
tape. if there is no save set.

/HELP:

E-IO

If O.

meaningful only for

Switch

Applicable
Commandsl
Programs

FAILSA

Delete not-recently accessed files from disk and copy
them to a magnetic tape. (Used in conjunction with
IS or IU.)

FUDGE2

Advance a magnetic tape one file.

IKAIO
IKIIO

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
FORTRAN
LOAD

Designate the machine on which the program will
execute once it has been loaded.

IKILL

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
SUBMIT
TPUNCH

Remove the specified entry from the specified queue.
The IKILL switch can be used for deleting a
previously submitted request. as long as the request
has not heen started.

InL

FILCOM

Specify the lower limit for a partial binary compare
(n is an octal number). This switch when used with
InU, allows a binary file to be compared only within
specified limits.

DTCOPY

Load the bootstrap loader into a core buffer. DTCOPY
expects the loader to be on logical device PTR in the
file named RSLDR.REL. Note that DTCOPY must be
SA Ved if the loader is to be preserved with the
DTCOPY core image.

FAILSA

Type on the user's terminal. a directory of all the
user's files on the tape.
FAILSAfE checks the
current user's project-programmer number and uses it
to find the correct area of the tape. Only the
filenames and extensions are typed.

FILEX

Type the directory of an input DECtape file on the
terminal. or list the directory of the output DECtape
at the end (i.e .. after the output).

GLOB

Scan programs only if they contain globals previously
defined and not yet satisfied. (Library search mode.)

SETSRC

Set the joh's library directory to the UFD [proj.prog]
and add it to the user's DSK specification.

ILlB:
[proj.prog]

Meaning

E-il

.r:;l'p/l'lI1ber 1974

Switch

Applicable
Commandsl
Programs

Meaning

ILIBRARY

DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Load the files in library search mode.
libraries are always searched.

ILIMIT:n

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
TPUNCH

Limit the output to the specified number of cards,
pages, feet or minutes.

ILINK

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Load the file with the LINK-IO linking loader. If
used, this switch should be placed before any file
specifications since the COMPIL program may have
to generate load-control switches. Complement of
ILOADER.

ILIST

COMPILE
DEBUG
LOAD
EXECUTE

Generate a disk listing file, for each file compiled.
The (ilename for the listing file follows the standard
conventions for determining the name of the output
file. The extension is .LST. These files can later be
listed with the LIST command.

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
SUBMIT
TPUNCH

List the specified entries in the specified queue. If
the switch is omitted, all entries for all jobs of all
users are listed.

ILMAP

DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Produce a loader map during the loading process
(same action as MAP) containing the local symbols.

ILOADER

DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Load the file with the LOADER program. This is
the current default action. Complement of I LIN K.

ILOG

PRINT
QUEUE

Define the file that the spoolers will use to record
their output. The default is jobname .LOG.

E-12

The system

Applicable
Switch

Commands I

Meaning

Programs

FAILSA

Saves are taken evay
Initiate multiple saves.
SLPMIN minute, where SLPMIN is an assembly
parameter initially set to 60 (decimal) minutes.

FILEX

Use MIT project PDP-6/1O DECtape format.

GLOB

Turn off library search mode scanning resulting from
a IL switch.

IMACRO

DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Assemble the file with MACRO.
with extensions of .MAC.

IMACXII

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Assemble the file with MACX II. Assumed for files
with the .P II extension.

IMANTIS

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Compile the file with MANTIS debugging information. This switch affects FORTRAN programs only.

IMAP

DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Produce a loader map during the loading process.
This switch is an exception to the permanent switch
rule in that it causes only one map to be produced
even though it may appear as a permanent switch.

IMARKS

DIRECT

Indicate each tape mark, including the final tape
mark, and UFO when reading a magnetic tape.
Complement of INOMARKS.

IMODIFY

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
SUBMIT
TPUNCH

Alter the specified parameters in the job. This switch
requires that the user have access rights to the job.

IMULTI

MOUNT

Permit multi-access (disk only). Complement of
ISINGLE. The function of this switch is the default
condition.

E- I3

Assumed for files

Applicable
Switch

Commandsl
Programs

Meaning

DTCOPY

Suppress the directory listing.

FAILSA

Do not check the creation dates of tape and disk files
of same names when restoring from tape.
This
switch remains In effect until the line of input IS
terminated by a carriage return-line feed.

GLOB

List only the symbols which arc never referenced.

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Run the appropriate language translator from the
experimental system library (device NEW:) area [1.5).
If the translator does not exist on device NEW:. try
to obtain it from device SYS:.

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
TPUNCH

Accept the request even if the file does not yet exist.
An appropriate error message is given if the file
docs not exist by the time the request is processed by
the spooler. For the QUEUE and SUBMIT commands. this is the default setting for the log file of
the Batch input queue. When using SU BM IT. the
user could place this switch within his control file.
allowing him to submit his job and then create the
control file.

SETSRC

Add the directory [1.5 J to the user's SYS specification.
This
means that when the system directory. is
searched. the directory [1.5) will be searched before
the directory [1.4).

INOBIN

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Do not generate binary files. Unless this switch IS
given. binary files are generated. This switch. when
combined with ILiST or ICREF. IS useful when
compiling programs solely for the purpose of generating listings.

INOCHECKSUM

DIRECT

Do not compute. and print the checksum. Complement of IDETAIL. This is the default condition.

INOCOMPILE

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Complement the ICOMPILE switch by not forcing a
compilation on a source file whose date IS not as
recent as the date on the binary file. Note that this
switch IS not the same as the IREL switch. which
turns off all compilation. even if the source file is
newer than the REL file.
INOCOMPILE IS the
default condition.

INEW

E-14

Switch

Applicable
Commands/
Programs

INOCREATE

SETSRC

Do not allow new files to be created on the file
structure when DSK is specified. but allow files to be
updated. Files can be created on the file structure if
the user specifics the file structure name explicitly.

INODETAIL

DIRECT

Do not list the words In the LOO K C P
Complement of IDETAIL.
This IS the
condition.

INOEOTS

DIRECT

Do not stop at the logical end of the tape when
reading a magnetic tape. Complement of IEOTS.

INOLIB

SETSRC

Remove the library directory from the user's DSK
specification.

INOLIST

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Do not generate listing files.
condition.

INOMANTIS

COMPILE
DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Compile the program without the MANTIS debugging information. This switch affects FORTRAN files
only.

INOMARKS

DIRECT

Do not indicate each tape mark and UFD when
reading a magnetic tape. Complement of IMARKS.
This is the default condition.

INONEW

SETSRC

Remove the directory
specification.

INORMAL

DIRECT

Output the normal directory listing.
This listing
includes the filename. extension. length In blocks
written. protection. creation date. structure name.
non-zero version numbers. and directory
name.
Complement of IFAST and IS LOW. This IS the
default condition.
This switch IS also used to
override a I FAST or IS LOW in the user's option file.

Meaning

E-IS

l LS]

This

from

the

block.
default

the dcf~lUlt

user's

SYS

'Switch

Applicable
Commandsl
Programs

INOREWINDS

DIRECT

Do not rewind the tape before and after reading a
magnetic tape. Complement of IREWINDS.

INOSCAN

SETSRC

Cancel the scan switch (lSCAN) for the directory
path.

INOSEARCH

DEBUG
EXECUTE
LOAD

Load all routines of the file whether or not the
routines are referenced. Since this is the default
condition. this switch is used only to turn off library
search mode (lUBRARY). This switch IS not the
equivalent of the IP switch of the LOADER. which
does not search any libraries. The INOSEARCH
default searches the system libraries.

INOSORT

DIRECT

Do not produce a file suitable for sorting.
Complement of ISORT. This is the default condition.

INOSUMMARY

DIRECT

Do not use summary mode; i.e .. output more than
just the summary line.
Complement of ISUMMARY. This is the default condition.

INOSYS

SETSRC

Remove the SYS specification from the user's DSK
specification.

INOTE:a

PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
TPUNCH

Output the specified text (a)
page.

INOTITLE

DIRECT

Do not output page headers.
Complement of
ITITLES. This is the default condition when outputting to the terminal.

INOUNITS

DIRECT

Do not list the name of the actual disk unit; instead.
list just the structure name. Complement of IUNITS.
This is the default action.

INOWRITE

SETSRC

Do not allow writing on the file structure for this job
(i.e .. the file structure is read only).

Meaning

E-16

the output header

Switch

Applicable
Commands I
Programs

Meaning

INULL

CPUNCH
PLOT
PRINT
QUEUE
TPUNCH

Do not output an error message if there are no files
in the request and do not create a queue entry. This
is assumed at KJOB time.

FAILSA

Enable the user to save and restore files to a user's
area other than his own.
This switch sets the
destination project-programmer number to the specified number. The format is as follows:

* 10 xx.yyy construction,

1-18

= construction, 1-17
@ construction. 1-16

A Command (SETSRC), 2-246 .
/ A Switch, 2-99, 2-107.
2-120, 2-135
ABS Extension, A-I
Absolute,
date argument, 1-12
time argument, 1-12
Access a file structure, 2-166
Access codes.
Sq uare brackets in. 1-10
Access date word,
Set, 2-100
Access protection codes.
1-10,2-191
/ ACCESS Switch. 2-65
Accessing the system, 1-7, 2-162
Add a device, 2-244
ADDRESS Command. 2-81
Administrative file. 2-166
Advance a magnetic tape, 2-99, 2-129
/ AFTER Switch, 2-32, 2- 178, i-185,
2-196, 2-268, 2-285, 3-29

Index-I

ASSIGN Command, 1-7, 2-2, 2-11
Asterisk (*), 1-2, 1-3
Asterisk as wild character, I-II
ATTACH Command, 2-7, 2-13
Attach,
a job, 2-216
Terminal to job, 2-13
AUTO Command (OPSER), 2-170
AUTOFORMAT Command, 2-81
Available devices,
Print. 2-221

Binary,
Code, 3-1
Compare, 2-107
Compare output, 2-109
Processing, 2-10
Processor switch, 1-20
Read files in, 2-134
Relocatable modules. 2- 126
IBINARY Switch, 3-17. 3- 21
Bits.
Privilege, 2-48
.BLI Extension. 2-19, A-I
BLISS Program,
Compile a. 3-12
IBLISS Switch. 2-20, 2-56. 2-93
BLISIO Compiler. 2-19
$BLlSS Card. 3-12
Block format.
Simple. 2-120
Blocks.
Allocated, 2-210
Number of. 2-210
Numbering. 2-129
Blocks read.
Disk. 2-48
IBLOCKS Switch, 2-65
Blocks written.
Disk. 2-48
Blocksize,
Magnetic tape. 2-230
BLOCKSIZE Command.
SET. 2-3. 2-230
B1ocksii',e for mag tape unit. 2-3
Brackets in access codes.
Square. 1-10
BREAK Command.
SET. 2-231
Busy test, 2-228
BVERS Message Identifier. 3-48

IB Switch, 2-99, 2-107.
2-120. 2-129
.B 10 Extension. 2-19, A-I
Backspace a magnetic tape, 2-99. 2-129
BACKSPACE Command, 2-3. 2-15
.BACTO Command, 3-41
Backwards,
Move a tape, 2-3
Space a tape, 2-3
BAERR Message Indicator, 3-48
BAOPR Message Indicator, 3-48
BASUM Message Indicator, 3-48
BATCH
Command interpreter, 1- 5
Components, 3-39
Control file commands. 3-39
Controller. 1-2, 1-5. 3-\. 3-2. 3-3. 3-8
Controller messages. 3- 48
Illegal monitor commands in. 3-4
Input queue. 1-6,2-193,2-194.2-267
Interpreting monitor commands in. 3-2
Jobs. 3-1
Message identifier. 3-48
Output. 3-6
Sample jobs. 3-49
Submitting jobs to. 3-4
BA TCON. 1-5. 3- I. 3-2
BCM Extension, A-I
BCP Extension. A-I
BDATE Message Identifier. 3-48
IBEFORE Switch. 2-32. 2- 65.
2-178. 2-185. 2-196. 2- 285
IBEGIN Switch. 2-32. 2- 178.
2-185. 2-196. 2-285
IBIN Switch. 2-20, 2-56.
2-92. 2-155
Binaries.
Produce relocatable. 2- 19

C Command (SETSRC). 2-247
IC Switch. 2-76. 2-99,
2-107.2-120
Card.
$-Ianguage. 3-9
$ALGOL. 3-10
~SBLISS. 3-12
SCOBOL.3-14
$DATA, 3-9. 3-16
DECK,3-9

Index-2

$DECK,3-20
$DUMP, 3-23
End of job, 3-6
$EOD,3-23
$EOJ, 3-6, 3- 10, 3-24
$ERROR, 3-24
SEXECUTE, 3-6, 3-7, 3-25
SF40, 3-25
SFORTRAN, 3-5, 3-7,3-25
Image of the $EXECUTE, 3-7
Image of the $FORTRAN. 3-7
Image of the SJOB, 3-6
$INCLUDE, 3-27
SJOB, 3-5, 3-6, 3-28
SMACRO, 3-32
SMODE, 3-19, 3-34
SNOERROR, 3-24
$PASSWORD, 3-5. 3-28, 3-36
$RELOCATABLE. 3-9. 3-36
SSEQUENCE. 3-37
SSNOBOL. 3-37
CARD CODES.
ASCII. B-1
DEC-026. B-1
DEC-029. B-1
Card deck.
Sample. 1-3
Card input.
Terminate. 3-23
Card punch.
Output queue. 2-31
Queue. 2-193
Card-reader spooler. 2-234
Cards.
Control. 3-5
Dollar sign in control. 3-9
Execute a program from. 3-16
File. 3-9
SPRINT-IO Control. 3-9
ICARDS Switch. 2-196. 2-268. 3-29
Cards to a file.
Copy. 3-20
CATEGORY Command. 2-82
CCOf'.iT Command. 2-6. 2-7. 2-40
CCONTINUE Command. 2-40
CDP Command. 2-194
CDPSPL Command. 3-1
CDR.
Set filename for. 2-234
CDR Command.
SET 2-3. 2-234
Central processor time limit. 2-250
Central station message. 2-228

$CERR.3-40
Change,
CPUS.2-235
File specifications, 2-4, 2-219
Interpretation mode, 3-34
Logical station, 2-161
Character,
Asterisk as wild. I-II
Control-O Special, 1-4
Control-R Special. 1-5
Control-T Special, 1-5
Control-U Special. 1-4
Percent (%). 1-24
Question mark as wild. I-II
Ready. 1-3
Character-oriented editor. 2-3
Characteristics.
Terminal. 2-252
Characters.
Special. 1-2. 1-4
Charge number, 2-48
ICHARGE Switch. 2-196
Check for global sym boIs, 2-134
ICHECK Switch. 2-72. 2-166. 2-167
ICHECKSUM Switch. 2-65
.CHKPNT Command. 3-41
Clear.
A DECtape directory. 2-1 I. 2-76. 2-129. 2-214
A device directory, 2-297
A directory, 2-297
Logical device names. 2-54
User core, 2-132, 2-212. 2-223
CLOSE Command. 2-2. 2-17. 2-82
:CLOSE Command (OPSER). 2-171
Cluster count field, 2-9
Cluster size, 2-9
$COBOL Card. 3-14
COBOL Compiler. 2-19
COBOL Program.
Compile a. 3-14
ICOBOL Switch. 2-20. 2-56.
2-93, 2-156
Codes.
ASCII. 3-1
ASCII Card, B-1
Binary. 3-1
DEC -026 Cards. B-1
DEC-029 Cards. B-1
Hollerith. 3-1
Codes.
Access protection. 1-10
Redefining protection. 1- 10
Sq uare brackets in access. 1- 10

Index-3

EXIT, 2c 82
FAILSA, 2-4
FILCOM,2-4
FILE, 2-4, 2-115
FILEX, 2-4
FINISH, 2-2, 2-122
:FREE (OPSER), 2-171
FUDGE, 2-5, 2-124
FUDGE2,2-5
GET, 2-6, 2-132
GLOB,2-4
.GOTO, 3-42
GRIPE, 2-7
HALT, 2-6, 2-139
HELP, 2-82, 2-140
:HELP (OPSER), 2-171
.IF, 3-43
INITIA, 2-1, 2-144
INPUT,2-82
IRADIX, 2-82
JCONT,2-6
:JCONT (OPSER), 2-171
JCONTINUE,2-145
JUSTIFY, 2-83
KJOB, 2-7, 2-146
:KJOB (OPSER), 2-171
:KILL (OPSER), 2-171
:KSYS (OPSER), 2-171
LABEL. 2-4, 2-151
LEFTMARGIN,2-83
LINEPAGE, 2-83
LIST, 2-4, 2-153
LOAD, 2-5, 2-155
LOCATE, 2-2, 2-161
LOGIN, 2-1, 2-162
:LOGIN (OPSER), 2-171
MAKE, 2-3, 2-164
MODES, 2-83
MOUNT, 2-2, 2-166
:MSGLVL (OPSER), 2-171
.NOERROR, 3-43
.NOOPERATOR (BATCH), 3-4, 3-44
.OPERATOR (BATCH), 3-4, 3-44
OPSER, 2-7
OPTION, 2-84
ORADIX, 2-84
OUTPUT, 2-84
PJOB, 2-8, 2-174
PLEASE. 2-7, 2-175
PLOT, 2-4. 2-177
PRESERVE, 2-4, 2-183
PRINT, 2-4, 2-184
Program examination, 2-6
PROTECT, 2-4, 2-191

Colon (:) in filename, 1-10
Command,
ADDRESS, 2-81
ALCFIL,2-3
ALL. 2-81
APPEN D, 2-81
ASSIGN, 1-7,2-2,2-11
:AUTO (OPSER), 2-170
AUTOFORMAT,2-81
BACKSPACE, 2-3, 2-15
.BACKTO, 3-41
CATEGORY, 2-82
CCONT, 2-6, 2-7
CCONTINUE,2-40
.CHKPNT, 3-41
:CLOSE (OPSER), 2-171
CLOSE, 2-2, 2-17, 2-82
COMPILE, 2-5, 2-19, 3-5
CONT,2-6
:CONTINUE (OPSER), 2-171
CONTINUE, 2-26
COPY, 2-4, 2-27
CORE, 2-2, 2-29
CPUNCH, 2-4, 2-31
CREATE, 2-3, 2-37
CREF, 2-5, 2-38
CSTART, 2-6, 2-7, 2-40
:CURRENT (OPSER), 2-171
D, 2-6,2-43
:DAYTIME (OPSER), 2-171
DAYTIME, 2-8, 2-45
DCORE, 2-6, 2-46
DDT, 2-6, 2-52
DEASSIGN, 1-7,2-2,2-54
DEBUG, 2-5, 2-55
:DEFINE (OPSER), 2-171
DELETE, 2-4, 2-61
DEPOSIT, 2-6, 2-43
DETACH. 2-7, 2-63
:DEVICE (OPSER), 2-171
DIRECT, 2-4, 2-64, 2-2\0
DISMOUNT, 2-2, 2-72
DSK, 2-8. 2-74
DTCOPY, 2-76
DUMP, 2-6, 2-79
E, 2-6, 2-89
EDIT,2-3, 2-90
EJECT,2-82
EOF, 2-4, 2-91
.ERROR, 3-42
:ERROR (OPSER), 2-171
:EXIT (OPSER), 2-171
EXAMINE. 2-6, 2-89
EXECUTE, 2-5, 2-92

Index-4

PUNCH, 2-4, 2-284
QUEUE, 2-4, 2-193
:QUEUE (OPSER), 2-172
QUOLST,2-8
R, 2-6, 2-212
REASSIGN, 2-2, 2-214
REATTA,2-7
REENTER, 2-6, 2-218
RENAME, 2-4, 2-219
.REQUEUE, 3-45
RESOURCES, 2-8, 2-221
:RESOURCES (OPSER), 2-172
:RESTRICT (OPSER), 2-172
:REVIVE (OPSER), 2-172
.REVIVE, 3-46
REWIND, 2-4, 2-222
RIGHTMARGIN.2-84
RUN. 2-6. 2-85. 2-223
SAVE. 2-5. 2-225, D-I
SCHED. 2-8. 2-227
SEND. 2-7. 2-228
:SEND (OPSER). 2-172
:SET (OPSER). 2-172
SET BLOCKSIZE. 2-3. 2-230
SET BREAK. 2-231
SET CDR. 2-3. 2-234
SET CPU. 2-3. 2-235
SET DENSITY. 2-3. 2-237
SET DSKFUL 2-6. 2-238
SET DSKPRL 2-3. 2-239
SET HPQ. 2-3. 2-240
SET PHYSICAL GUIDELINE. 2-242
SET PHYSICAL LIMIT. 2-242
SET SPOOL 2-3. 2-244
SET TI M E. 2-8
SET TTY. 2-3
SET VIRTUAL LIMIT. 2-258
SET WATCH. 2-8
SETSRC 2-8
.SILENCE. 3-46
:SILENCE (OPSER). 2-172
SKIP, 2-4, 2-262
:SLOGIN (OPSER). 2-172
SSA VE, 2-5, 2-264, D-I
ST AR T. 2-6. 2-266
:STOP (OPSER), 2-172
SUBMIT. 2-4, 2-267
SUPERSEDE. 2-85
SYFILE. 2-85
SYST A T. 2-8. 2-273
:SYSTAT (OPSER). 2-172
TDUMP, 2-85
TECO, 2-3. 2-280
TIME. 2-8. 2-146. 2-282

TITLE. 2-85
:TLOG (OPSER). 2-173
TPUNCH, 2-4, 2-284
:TSILENCE (OPSER), 2-173
:TTYTST (OPSER), 2-173
TYPE. 2-5, 2-85, 2-290
UNLOAD. 2-5. 2-291
:UNRESTRICT (OPSER). 2-173
USESTAT, 1-5,2-8.2-292
VERSION. 2-8. 2-293
:WHAT (OPSER). 2-173
WHERE. 2-8. 2-296
WIDTH. 2-85
XTRACT. 2-86
ZERO. 2-5. 2-297
Commands.
Arguments to. 1-17
Batch Control File. 3-39
COM PI L-Class. 1-15
Continuing. 1-6
ControL 1-2
Facility allocation. 2- L 2-2
File manipulation. 2-3
Formats of. 1-6
Indirect. 1-16
Interpreting Batch Monitor. 1-5. 8-2
Job information. 2-8
Job initialization. 2-1
Job termination. 2-7
Language interpreter of. 1-2. 1-3
Multiple job controL 2-7
Processing. 1-3
Program controL 2-5
Program preparation. 2-5
Source file pre para tion. 2-3
Spaces in. 1-6
Svstem information. 2-8
TABS in. 1-6
Terminating. 1-6
Unique names of. 1-6
Commands to DU M P. 2-81. 2-82.
2-84. 2-85. 2-86
Commands to stacker.
ControL 1-6
Comments. 1-6. 3-9
Communicating with system jobs. I-I
Communication.
Interconsole. 2-7. 2-175. 2-228
Compare.
Binary. 2-107. 2-109
File versions. 2-4. 2-106
Source. 2-107. 2-109
Two DECtapes. 2-76
COM PI L Program. 2-124

I ndex-5

· CO M PI L-cJass Commands, 1-15
Compilation listings, 2-19
Compile,
A BLISS Program, 3-12
A COBOL Program, 3-14
A MACRO Program, 3-32
A SNOBOL Program, 3-37
An ALGOL Program, 3-10
COMPILE Command. 2-5, 2-19, 3-5
ICOMPILE Switch. 2-20, 2-56,
2-93, 2-156
COMPILE Switches, 2-20. 1-18
Compiler,
ALGOL,2-19
BLISIO,2-19
COBOL,2-19
FORTRAN,2-19
SNOBOL. 2-19
Components,
BATCH,3-1
Configuration table, 2-46
Configuring the system, I-I
CONFIRM Dialogue, 2-146
Construction,
+, 1-\7
1-18
=, 1-17
@, 1-16
Wildcard, I-II
CONT Command, 2-6
Contents operators, 2-86
Continue.
A line. 1-6
A program. 2-26, 2-40, 2-6, 2-7
A job. 2-145, 2-6
command lines, 1-6
CONTINUE Command, 2-26
:CONTINUE Command (OPSER). 2-171
ControL
Multiple job, 2-170
Transfer, 3-42
Control bits,
Spooling, 2-48
Control Cards,
Description of. 3-5
Dollar sign in, 3-9
SPRINT-10. 3-9
Control commands. 1-2
Control commands.
Multiple job. 2-7
Program. 2-5
To stacker, 1-6
Control file,
Create a. 3-28

Description, 1-6
Interrupt, 3-39
Interrupt sequential reading of. 3-41
Control File,
Commands to Batch, 3-39
S pecifica tions, 2-194
Submitting a job with a, 3-8
User, 3-2
Control over devices,
Operator, 2-166
Control-C, 1-2, 2-26
Control-O Special Character, 1-4
Control-R Special Character, 1-5
Control-T Special Character, 1-5
Control-U Special Character, 1-4
Controller,
Batch, 1-2, 1-5, 3-1, 3-8, 3-2. 3-3
Controller Messages,
Batch, 3-48
Conversational mode, 3-3
ICOPI ES Switch, 2-32, 2-178.
2-185. 2-197, 2-285
Copy,
Cards to a file, 3-20
DECtapes, 2-76
COpy Command, 2-4. 2-27
Core,
Arguments, 2-224
Clear user, 2-132, 2-212. 2-223
Examine a location in. 2-89
Lock job in, 2-103
Modify amount of. 2-29
Return allocated, 2-146
Type amount of. 2-29
User's area of. 2-46
CORE Command. 2-2, 2-29
Core image file,
Load a, 2-132. 2-212, 2-223
Write a. 2-5, 2-46, 2-79
Write to a device, 2-225
ICORE Switch. 2-197. 2-268, 3-29
Count,
Dependency. 3-8
Count field,
Cluster, 2-9
Counter,
Program. 1-5
Response, 2-48
CP Command (SETSRC), 2-247
CPPL. 2-242
CPU Command.
SET. 2-3, 2-235
CPUNCH Command. 2-4. 2-31
ICPUNCH, Switch, 3-21

<>,

Index-6

Day,
Type the time of, 2-45
Day time,
Incremental, 1-5
DAYTIME Command, 2-8, 2-45
:DAYTIME Command (OPSER). 2-171
DCORE Command. 2-6, 2-46
DDBs.2-46
DDT Command. 2-6. 2-52
IDDT Switch, 2-56
IDEADLINE Switch, 2-33, 2-179,2-186.2-197
2- 268, 2-286. 3-29
DEASSIGN Command. 1-7.2-2.2-54
DEBUG Command. 2-5, 2-55
DEC-026 CARD CODES. B-1
DEC-029 CARD CODES. B-1
Deck.
Sample card. 1-3
Deck Card. 3-9
$DECK Card. 3-20
DECsystem-IO.
Functions of, I-I
DECtape .
Rewind a. 2-222, 2-291
Unload a, 2-291
Default switches.
Override system. 1-14
I DEFER Switch. 2-198
:DEFINE Command (OPSER). 2-171
Delete.
a device. 2-244
a file from DEClape, 2-61
A file from disk, 2-61, 2-101
All files. 2-146
unprotected files. 2-146
DELETE Command. 2-4. 2-61
DENSIT.Y Command.
SET. 2-3. 2-237
Density.
For mag tape unit. 2-3. 2-237
Set ta pe. 2-100. 2-103
IDENSITY Switch. 2-65
IDEPEND Switch, 2-198. 2-269. 3-30
Dependency.
Interjob. 3-8
Dependency count. 3-8
DEPOSIT Command. 2-6. 2-43
Deassociate a device from job. 2-122
Descri ptOf,
DUMP. 2-86
DETACH Command, 2-7. 2-63
Detach current job. 2-7. 2-13
IDETAIL Switch, 2-65

CPUs,
Change, 2-235
Create,
A control file, 3-28
A library file, 2-124
A new file, 2-164
CREATE Command, 2-3, 2-37
ICREATE Switch. 2-33, 2-178. 2-185.
2-197,2-247,2-268,2-286
Creation,
Open a file for, 2-37
Set date of, 2-100
UFD.2-166
CREF Command, 2-5, 2-38
ICREF Switch, 2-21, 2-56,
2-93, 2-156, 3-27, 3-33
Cross-referenced,
Listings, 2-38
Symbols list, 2-134
CS Command (SETSRC). 2-247
('START Command. 2-6. 2-7. 2-40
.CfL, 2-194
.CTt Extension, 3-28
:('URRENT Command (OPSER). 2-171
Current job.
Detach. 2-7
Current.
Virtual page limit. 2-258
Physical page limit. 2-242
CVPL, 2-258

D Command. 2-6. 2-43
10 Switch. 2-100. 2-120

DAEMON Program. 2-46. 2-79
DAEMON-written File. 2-47
$DATA Card. 3-9. 3-16
~DAT A Card Restrictions. 3-20
Data.
File. 1-6
Mode. 1-2
User file. 3-1
Date.
Set creation. 2-100
Type current. 2-8
Type the current. 2-45
Date argument.
Absolute. 1-12
Relative. 1-12
Date arguments. 1-12
Date word.
Set access. 2-100

Seplemher /974

I ndex-7

Determine,
Progress of job, 1-5
Station number, 2-296
Device,
Add a, 2-244
Allocates a, 2-11, 2-2
Assign a, 2-166
Clear directory of a, 2-297
Data blocks, 2-46
Directory oriented, 1-10
Delete a, 2-244
Disassociate a job from, 2-122
List of, 1-10
Names, 1-7
Stop a, 2-146
Structure name, 2-48
Write a core image to, 2-225
:DEVICE Command (OPSER), 2-171
Device names,
Clear logical, 2-54
Generic physical, 1-8
Logical, 1-7
PhysicaL 1-7
Device pool,
Return devices to, 2-54
Device pools,
Monitor, 2-72, 2-54, 2-146
Device to monitor pooL
Return, 2-54, 2-146
Devices,
Operator control over, 2-166
Pass, 2-214
Print available, 2-8, 2-221
Restricted, 2-2, 2-214
Spooling, 2-244
Unrestricted, 2-2, 2-214
Dialogue,
CONfIRM, 2-146
Dialogue mode,
Enter, 3-4, 3-44
Leave, 3-4, 3-44
DI R ECT Command, 2-4, 2-64, 2-210
Directories,
Clear, 2-5
Clear DEClape, 2-11, 2-76, 2-129, 2-214
Clear device, 2-297
Entries, 2-64
List, 2-146
Names, 1-10
Of files on tape, 2-101
Of LST, 2-102
sub-file, 1-10
User file (UFO), 1-10,2-166

Directory-orien ted devices, 1-10
Disconnect a terminal, 2-7
Disconnect job's terminal, 2-63
Disk,
blocks read, 2-48
blocks written, 2-48
delete file from, 2-61, 2-101
incremental reads, 1-5
incremental writes, 1-5
performance statistics, 2-277
restore files on, 2-4
save files on, 2-4, 2-99, 2-102
space used, 2-210
transfer to/from tape, 2-115
usage for a job, 2-74
DISMOUNT Command, 2-2, 2-72
/DISPOSE Switch, 2-33, 2-179, 2-186,
2-198, 2-269, 2:286
Dollar sign ($)
in BATCH, 3-6
in control cards, 3-9
use of, 1-6
DSK Command, 2-8, 2-74
DSKFUL Command,
SET, 2-6, 2-238
DSKPRI Command,
SET, 2-3, 2-239
DTCOPY Command, 2-76
DUMP,
Command, 2-6, 2-89
Commands to, 2-81, 2-82,
2-84, 2-85, 2-86
Descriptor, 2-86
Expressions to, 2-86
Program, 2-81
Symbols, 2-86
Dump a file, 2-81
$DUMP Card, 3-23

E Command, 2-6, 2-89
/ E Switch, 2-100, 2-120, 2-135
EDIT Command, 2-3, 2-90
Editing,
Open a file for, 2-90
Open file for, 2-280
Editor, 2-280
Editor,
Character-oriented, 2-3
Line-oriented, 2-3, 2-37, 2-90
Text, 2-164

Index-8

Extensions. 2-19. A-I
Extensions.
Filename. 1-10. 2-19. A-I

EJECT Command, 2-82
Eliminate files, 2-100
End of job, 3-10
End of job card, 3-6
End-of-file, 3-10
End-of-file mark,
Write an, 2-91
Enter dialogue mode, 3-4, 3-44
Entries,
List directory, 2-64
Entry point.
Alternate, 2-218
SEOD Card, 3-23
EOF Command, 2-4, 2-91
$EOJ Card. 3-6. 3-10. 3-24
EaT. 2-132
IEOTS Switch. 2-66
Equal sign (=), 1-2. 2-27
(}fERR. 3-40
Erroneous symbols,
List. 2-135
Error analysis.
Tape, 2-166
SERROR Card. 3-24
.ERROR Command. 3-42
:ERROR Command (OPSER). 2-171
Error messages. Cha pter 4
Error.
Recovery aid. 3-41
Recovery routines. 3-40
Reporting. 2-166
Error Reporting.
SPRINT-IO.3-48
/ ERROR Switch. 3-30
Errors.
Process. 3-43
Examination Command.
Program. 2-6
Examin~ a core location, 2-89
EXAMINE Command. 2-6. 2-89
Exclamation point (BATCH). 3-7
SEXECUTE Card. 3-6. 3-7. 3-25
EXECUTE Command. 2-5. 2-92
Execute.
a program from cards. 3-16
a program. 2-92
Execution.
Continue job. 2-6
Continue program. 2-6. 2-7
program. 2-266
EXIT Command. 2-82
:EXIT Command (OPSER). 2-171
Expressions to DUMP. 2-86

IF Switch. 2-33. 2- 100.
2-119.2-135.2-179.
2-186. 2-199. 2-269. 2-286
IflO Switch. 2-21. 2-57.
2-93. 2-157
.F4 Extension. 2-19
Sf40 Card. 3-25
IF40 Switch. 2-22. 2-57
2-93.2-157
Facilities.
Allocating system. 2-2
Facility allocation
Commands. 2-1. 2-2
FAILSA Command. 2-4
FAILSAFE Program. 2-99
IFAST Switch. 2-66
Feature tahle. 2-46
I FEET Switch. 2-199. 2-269. 3-31
Field.
Cluster count. 2-9
'FILCOM Command. 2-4
FI LCO M Program. 2-106
File (fUDGE2).
Master. 2-126
output. 2-126
transaction. 2-126
File cards. 3-9
FI I.E Command. 2-4. 2-115
File Commands.
Batch Control. 3-39
File director\'.
User. l-lO
hie Directory. (l;FD).
User. 2-166
File for creation.
open a. 2-37
File for editing.
open. 2-2RO
open a. 2-90
File from decta pc.
Delete a. 2-61
File from disk.
delete. 2-101
delete a. 2-61
File manipulatiom commands. 2-3
File preparation commands.
source. 2-3

Index-9

restore a, 2-100 to 2-102
save, 2-4, 2-99 to 2-102, 2-146
specification, 1-10, 2-4, 2-194. 2-219
structure, 1-10, 2-48, 2-72,
2-166, 2-221
temporary, C-I
transfer, 2-4, 2-27, 2-115, 2-119
type a, 2-290
update a. 2-5
version, 2-4, 2-106
write a core image, 2-46
Files (BATCH).
submitting a job with, 3-6
Files on tape.
directory of. 2-10 I
IFILES Switch. 2-66
FI LEX Command. 2-4
FI LEX Program, 2-119
%FIN.3-40
FINISH Command. 2-2.2-122
Fixed symbols.
list. 2-135
.FOR Extension. 2-19
Format.
simple block, 2-120
Format specifiers,
DECtape. 2-119
Format specifiers.
file, 2-120
Formats,
command. 1-6
IFORMS Switch. 2-33. 2-187. 2-200
IFOROTS Switch. 2-56. 2-93. 2-156
IFORSE Switch. 2-56. 2-93. 2-156
$FORTRAN Card. 3-5. 3-7. 3-25
$FORTRAN Card.
image of the. 3-7
FORTRAN Compiler, 2-19
IFORTRAN Switch. 2-2 I. 2-56.
2-93, 2-156
Forward.
move a tape. 2-4
Free a terminal. 2-63
:FREE Command (OPSER). 2-171
Free system space, 2-210
FUDGE Command. 2-5. 2-124
IFUDGE Switch. 2-2 I. 2-57.
2-93. 2-124. 2-156
FUDGE2 Command. 2-5
FUDGE2 Program. 2-126
Functions.
ofDECsystem-lO. I-I
of monitor. I-I
to file. 2-115

File specification,
Change, 2-4, 2-219
control, 2-194
listing, 2-194
log, 2-194
File structure,
access a, 2-166
remove a, 2-72
File structures,
print, 2-221
IFILE Switch, 2-186, 2-199, 2-286
File transfer program, 2-119
Filename,
Colon (:) in, 1-10
Octal representation of. 1-12
Period (.) in, 1-10
Filename extensions, 1-10
Filename for CDR,
set, 2-234
Files.
administrative, 2-166
allocate space for, 2-9
analyze. a, 2-79
control, 1-6
copy cards to. 3-20
create.
control, 3-28
library. 2-124
new. 2-164
DAEMON-written. 2-47
data. 1-6
delete all 2-146
delete unprotected. 2-146
dump a, 2-81
eliminate. 2-100
format specifiers. 2-120
functions to. 2-115
indexed library. 2-129
interrupt controL 3-39
interrupt sequential reading of. 3-41
job log. 3- L 3-2. 3-47
line-numbered. 2-90
load. 2-155
load .REL 2-92
log. 1-6
names. 1-10
option. 1-14
output source. 2-153
place output in log. 3-46
print a. 2-5. 2-90
prod uce source. 2-5
protect. 2-146
read binary. 2-134
rename a. 2-4. 2-183
Index-IO

DECtape, 2-4, 2-151
STOAT Message, 3-47
STERR Message. 3-47
STMSG Message. 3-47
STOPR Me",agc, 3-47
STSUM Message, 3-47
IF Command, 3-43
Illegal monitor commands in
BATCH. 3-4
Image,
Load a core, 2-132. 2-212,
2-223
Write a core, 2-5, 2-79
Image of the SEXECUTE Card,
3-7
Image of the $FORTRAN Card.
3-7
Image of the S.lOB Card. 3-6
Image processing, 2-120
II MAG E Switch, 3-18
Image to device.
Write a core, 2-225
$INCLUDE Card, 3-27
I ncremen ta I.
day time, 1-5
disk reads. 1-5
disk writes. 1-5
run time, 1-5
Indexed lihrary files.
2-219
Indicator.
BAERR Message. 3-48
BAOPR Message, 3-48
BASUM Message, 3-48
MONTR Message, 3-48
USER Message, 3-48
Indirect commands, 1-16
Information.
Joh status, 2-8
Print status. 1-5
Status. 2-273, 2-292
Information commands.
Joh. 2-8
System, 2-8
IN ITIA Commands. 2-\' 2-144
Initialize
ajoh.I-1
, terminal. 2-144
('ommands to. 2-1
I]\;P:, 2-194. 2-267
Input.
Specifications. 2-194
Spooler. 1-5. 3-1

IG Switch, 2-76, 2-100, 2-120
Gain access to system, 2-162
Generic physical device names, 1-8
GET Command, 2-6, 2-132
GLOB Command, 2-4
GLOB Program, 2-134
Global symbols,
check for, 2-134
output. 2-135
,GOTO Command, 3-42
GRIPE Command, 2-7
GRIPE Program, 2-138
.GTCNF, 2-46
.GTFET, 2-46
GUIDELINE Command,
SET PHYSICAL 2-242

H Command (SETSRC), 2-247
IH Switch. 2-76, 2-100,
2-107.2-108.2-119.2-135
HALT,
start after a. 2-26
HALT Command. 2-6. 2-139
Header.
Listing. 2-136
IHEADER Switch. 2-187. 2-200
HELP Command. 2-82. 2-140
:HELP Command (OPSER). 2-171
IHELP Switch. 2-66. 2-72.
2-167.2-200
High segmen t.
sharahle. 2-264
High-priority scheduler run yueue. 2-240
Hollerith Code. 3-1
!HOLLERITII Switch. 3-31
HPQ Command.
SET. 2-3. 2-240
Hyphen (-). 1-6, 3-9

II Switch. 2-100. 2-120
Identification.
Reel. 2-167
Terminal. 2-228
Identifier.
BATCH Message. 3-48
BDATE Message. 3-48
BVERS Message, 3-48

Index-II

Spooler Mode. 1-2
Ter:minate. 2-122
Terminate card. 3-23
INPUT Command. 2-82
Input line.
Retype. 1-5
Rescanning. 2-26
Input queue.
Batch. 1-6.2-193.2-194.2-267
Input/output.
Terminate. 2-2. 2-17
Interconsole communication.
2-7. 2-175. 2-228
Interjoh dependency. 3-8
Intermediate mode. 3-3
Internal symhols tahle. 2-134
Interpretation mooe.
Change. 3-34
Interpreter.
Batch command. 1-5. 3-2
Commano language. 1-2
Monitor command language. 1-3
Interpreting processor switches. 1-20
Interrupt control file. 3-39
I nterru pt seq uential reading of control file. 3-41
IRADIX Command. 2-82

Log file. 3-1. 3-2. 3-47
Multiple control of. 2-170
Numher. 2-146
Output. 3-46
Priorities. 2-239
Requeue a. 3-45
Run time. 2-8
Search list. 2-8. 2-246
Scheduling. 3-2. 3-8
Size. 1-5
State. 1-5. 2-292. 2-259
Status information. 2-8. 2-48
Stop a. 2-6. 2-139
Suppress all output from. 3-46
Terminal number. 2-174
Terminate a. 3-24
Time limit for. 2-8
Transfer a. 2-7.
JOB CAPACITY EXCEEDED Message. 1-2
SJOB Card. 3-5. 3-6. 3-28
Joh card.
End of. 3-6
SJOB Card.
Image of the. 3-6
Jobs to BATCH.
Suhmitting. 3-4
JUSTIFY Command. 2-83

1.1 Switch. 2-100
.JBOPC. 2-52. 2-218
.JBrc. 2-26. 2-52. 2-139. 2-218
JCONT Command. 2-6. 2-145
:JCO~T Command (OrSER). 2-171
JCONTINUE Command. 2-145
Jiffies.
Time limit in. 2-48
Joh.
Attach a. 2-216
Attach terminal to. 2-13
BATCH. 3-1. 3-4
Communicating with system. I-I
Continue a. 2-145
Control commands a. 2-7
Disassociate a device from. 2-63. 2-122
Detach current. 2-7. 2-13
Determine progress of. 1-5
Disk usage for a. 2-74
End of a. 3-10
Information commands. 2-8
Initiating a. I-I. 2-1
Lock in core. 2-103

IK Switch. 2-101. 2-129
IKA 10 Switch. 2-22. 2-57 .

2-93. 2-157
Key.
RETURN. 1-6
RLJBOUT. 1-4
IKIIO Switch. 2-57. 2-93. 2-157
:KILL Command (OPSER). 2-171
IKILL Switch. 2-33. 2-179.
2-187. 2-200. 2-270. 2-286
Kilo-core-ticks. 2-48
KJOB Command. 2-7. 2-146
:KJOB Command (OPSER). 2-171
:KSYS Command (OPSER). 2-172

II. Switch. 2-76. 2-101.
2-120.2-135
InL Switch. 2-107. 2-108
LABEL Command. 2-4. 2-151

Index-12

fixed symbols. 2-135
Job search, 2-8. 2-246
Manipulate search, 2-246
Nonrelocatable symbols, 2-135
of Processor switches. 1-20
of Quotas. 2-166
of symbols. 2-134
Relocatable symbols. 2-135
source files. 2-153
System search, 2-8. 2-246
LIST Command. 2-4. 2-153
I LIST Switch. 2-22. 2-34,
2-58.2-66.2-93.2-157.2-180.
2-187. 2-20 I. 2-270. 2-287
Listing file specification. 2-194
Listing header. 2-136
Listings.
Compilation. 2-19
Cross-reference. 2-38
ILMAP Switch. 2-58. 2-95. 2-157
Load
a core image. 2-132. 2-212. 2-223
files. 2-155
.REL tiles. 2-92
LOA D Command. 2-5. 2-155
Loader program. 1-24
ILOADER Switch. 2-58. 2-95. 2-157
LOADER Switches.
Passing. 1-24
Loading the system. I-I
LOCATE Command. 2-2. 2-161
ILOCATE Switch. 3-31
Location.
Examine a core. 2-89
Lock a job in core. 2-103
.LOG Extension. 3-28 '
Log file.
Job. 1-6. 3-1. 3-2. 3-47
Place output in. 3-46
specification. 2-194
ILOG Switch. 2-187. 2-201
Logged-input quota. 2-8
Logging on the system. 1-7
Logical device names. 1-7
Logical device names.
Clear. 2-54
Logical station. Change. 2-161
LOG IN Command. 2-1. 2-162
:LOGIN Command (OPSER). 2-172
'?LOGIN PLEASE message. 1-4
Logout. 2-146
Look for trailer record. 2-100
.LPT.2-194

Language interpreter.
Command, 1-2
Monitor command, 1-3
Leave dialogue mode, 3-4, 3-44
LEFTMARGIN Command, 2-83
Library file.
Crea te a. 2-124
Library files.
Indexed. 2-129
ILIBRARY Switch. 2-57, 2-93. 2-157
Limit.
Central processor time. 2-250
Current physical page. 2-242
Current virtual page. 2-258
LIMIT Command.
SET VIRTUAL 2-258
SET PHYSICAL 2-242
Limit for job.
Time. 2-8
Limit in jiffies.
Time. 2-48
ILIMIT Switch. 2-34. 2-180,
2-187.2-201. 2-287
Line.
continuation. 1-6
Rescanning input. 2-26
Retype input. 1-5
Terminating a command. 1-6
Line printer.
Write to. 2-4
Line printer output queue.
2-184. 2-193. 3-4
Line-numbered file. 2-90
Line-oriented editor. 2-3
2-37. 2-90
LINED.
Run, 2-3. 2-37. 2-90
L1NEPAGE Command. 2-83
ILINK Switch, 2-57. 2-93, 2-157
LINK-IO.
Switch specification in, 1-25
L1NK-IO program, 1-24
LINK-IO Switches.
Passing. 1-25
Linking-loaders,
Switches to the. 1-24
List.
Alter a search. 2-246
Cross-referenced symbols, 2-134
Devices, 1-8
Directories. 2-146
Directory entries. 2-64
Erroneous symbols. 2-135

Index-13

BVERS, 3-48
STOAT, 3-47
STERR, 3-47
STMSG,3-47
STOPR, 3-47
STSUM,3-47
Message Indicator,
BAERR,3-48
BAOPR,3-48
BASUM,3-48
MONTR,3-48
USER,3-48
Messages,
Batch Controller, 3-48
Error, Chapter 4
Sending, 2-7
SPRINT-IO,3-47
Mode,
Change interpretation, 3-34
Conversational. 3-3
Data, 1-2
Dialogue, 3-4
Enter dialogue, 3-4, 3-44
Input spooler, 1-2
Intermediate, 3-3
Leave dialogue. 3-4, 3-44
Monitor, 1-2
Terminal. 1-2
User, 1-2
$MODE Card, 3-19, 3-34
MODES Command, 2-83
Modify amount of core. 2-29
IMODIFY Switch. 2-34, 2-180
2-187,2-201. 2-270, 2-287
Modules,
RelocatabIe binary, 2-126
Monitor.
Batch Commands, 3-2
Command language interpreter, 1-3
Device pools, 2-72
Functions of. I-I
Mode, 1-2
MONTR Message Indicator, 3-48
MOUNT Command, 2-2, 2-166
Move
a mag tape backwards, 2-15
a magnetic tape, 2-262
a tape backwards, 2-3
:MSGLVL Command (OPSER), 2-172
IMULTI Switch, 2-167
Multiple
job control. 2-170
job control commands, 2-7
Multiprogramming, I-I

LPT:, 2-194
LPTSPL, 3-1, 3-4
LST,
directory of, 2-102

M Command (SETSRC), 2-247
1M Switch, 2-101, 2-119, 2-135
.MAC Extension, 2-19
MACRO Assembler, 2-19
$MACRO Card, 3-32
Macro program,
Compile a, 3-32
IMACRO Switch, 2-22, 2-58
2-95, 2-157
MACX II Assembler, 2-19
IMACXII Switch, 2-58, 2-95, 2-158
Magnetic tape,
Advance a, 2-99, 2-129
Backspace a, 2-99. 2-129
Density for, 2-237
Move a, 2-262
Rewind,2-103
Rewind a, 2-222, 2-291
Unload a, 2-291
Magnetic tape blocksize, 2-230
Maintain system queues, 3-2,
MAKE Command. 2-3, 2-164
Manager,
Queue, 3-1, 3-2
Manipulate search list, 2-246
Manipulation commands.
File, 2-3
IMANTIS Switch, 2-22, 2-58
2-95, 2-158
IMAP Switch, 2-58, 2-95
2-158, 3-8
IMARKS Switch, 2-66
Masks,
Password, 2-7
Master File (pUDGE2), 2-126
Media error reporting, 2-166
Message,
Central station, 2-228
job capacity exceeded. 1-2
Message,
?LOGIN PLEASE, 1-4
?NO CORE ASSIGNED, 1-4
?TIME LIMIT EXCEEDED, 3-44
Message Identifier.
BATCH,3-48
BDATE,3-48
Index-14

IN Switch, 2-76. 2-101, 2-13S
INAME Switch, 3-31
Names.
Clear logical device, 2-S4
Command, 1-6
Device, 1-7
Device Structure. 2-48
Directory. 1-10
File structure, 1-10. 2-48
Generic physical device, 1-8
Logical device. 1-7
Obtain program, I-S
Physical device, 1-7
Queue. 2-194
Unique command, 1-6
User program. 2-48
INEW Switch. 2-22. 2-34,
2-S8. 2-9S, 2-IS8.
2-180,2-187. 2-201
2-248. 2-270. 2-287
'?NO CORE ASSIGNED message. 1-4
INOBIN Switch. 2-23. 2-S8. 2-96. 2-IS8
INOCHECKSUM Switch, 2-66
INOCOMPILE Switch. 2-23. 2-S9. 2-96, 2-IS8
INOCREATE Switch. 2-247
INODETAIL Switch. 2-66
INOEOTS Switch. 2-66
$NOERROR Card. 3-24
.NOERROR Command. 3-43
INOLIB Switch, 2-248 .
INOLIST Switch. 2-23. 2-S9
2-96. 2-IS8. 3-11. 3-13
3-27. 3-33
INOMANTIS Switch. 2-23. 2-S9. 2-96, 2-IS8
INOMARKS Switch. 2-66
INONEW Switch. 2-248
Nonrelocatable. symbols.
List. 2-13S
. NOOPERATOR Command (BATCH). 3-4, 3-44
INORESTART Switch. 3-31
INOREWINDS Switch. 2-66
INORMAL Switch. 2-66
INOSC AN Switch. 2-248
INOSEARCH Switch. 2-S9, 2-96, 2-IS8
INOSORT Switch, 2-66
INOSUMMARY Switch. 2-67
INOSU PPRESS Switch. 3-11.
3-13. 3-16. 3-18. 3-22
3-27, 3-34. 3-3S. 3-39
INOSYS Switch. 2-248
INOTE Switch. 2-180. 2-187. 2-201. 2-287
INOTITLE Switch. 2-67
INOUNITS Switch. 2-67
INOWRITE Switch. 2-248

Index-IS

Null
Extension, 2-19
Output record, 2-132
Saved segments, 2-132
INULL Switch. 2-34, 2-180,
2-187. 2-201. 2-287
Number.
Charge. 2-48
Determine station, 2-296
Job terminal. 2-174
Logical station. 2-161
of blocks. 2-210, 2-129
Physical station. 2-161
Print station. 2-8
Program version. 2-\, 2-293
Project-Programmer, 2-48, 2-162, 3-36, 1-7.
3-28
Sequence. 3-37
Number sign. 1-12
Number to pool,
Return job. 2-146

10 Switch, 2-101. 2-119
Object programs.
Prepare. 2-S
Obtain job size. I-S
Obtain job state. I-S
Obtain program name. I-S
Octal representation of
filename. 1-12
10K BINARY Switch. 2-187,
2-202
10KNONE SWITCH. 2-1
10KNONE Switch, 2-67. 2-180.
2-188. 2-202. 2-287
10LD Switch, 2-23. 2-S9 .
2-96. 2-IS9
OMOUNT Program. 2-72, 2-166
Open a file.
for creation, 2-37
for editing, 2-90, 2-280
.OPERATOR Command (BATCH),
3-4. 3-44
Operator control over
devices. 2-166
Operators.
Contents, 2-86
OPSER Command, 2-7
OPSER Program, 2-170
OPTION Command. 2-84
Option files. 1-14

/OPTION Switch. 2-67
ORADIX Command. 2-84
Output.
BATCH. 3-6
Binary compare. 2-109
global symbols. 2-135
Job. 3-46
Log File. 3-46
Null record. 2-132
Source tiles. 2-153
Source compare. 2-109
Suppress. 1-4. 3-46
Terminate. 2-122
OUTPUT Command. 2-84
Output File (FUDGE2). 2-126
Output ljueue.
Card punch. 2-31
Line printer. 2-184.
2-193
Plotter. 2-177
Output spoolers. 3-\. 3-4
/OUTPLT Switch. 2-202.
2-270
Override system default
switches. 1-14

/ P Switch. 2-102. 2-120
2-135
. P II Extension. 2-19
Page limit.
Cur'rent physical. 2-242
Current virtual. 2-258
/PAGE Switch. 2-203. 2-270
/PAGES Switch. 3-31
/PAPER Switch. 2-203
Paper-tape punch ljueuc.
2-193. 2-284
Parameters.
Swapping. 2-48
/PARITY Switch. 2-67
PARTIAL ALLOCATION Message.
2-9
Partial reinitialization
2-281
Pass devices. 2-214
Passing I.IN K-IO switches.
1-25
Passing LOADER Switches.
1-24
SPASSWORD Card. 3-5. 3-28
3-36

Password masks. 1-7
Passwords. 1-7. 2-162
/PAUSE Switch. 2-72. 2-167
Percent (<;;,) character. 1-24
Performance statistics.
Disk. 2-277
Period (.). 1-3
Period (.) in tilename.
1-10
Permanent switch. 1-18
PJO B Command. 2-8. 2-174
Place entries in entries.
2-4
Place output in log tile. 3-46
PLEASE Command. 2-7. 2-175
PLOT Command. 2-4. 2-177
/PLOT Switch. 2-180. 2-203
3-22
Plotter output ljueue. 2-177
Plotter lj ueue. 2-193
.PIT 2-194
PLT:.2-194
PLTSPL. 3-1
Point.
Alternate entrv. 2-218
Pointers.
TMPCOR. 2-48
Pool.
Return device to monitor.
2-146
Return job number to .
2-146
Pools.
Monitor device. 2-72
Preparation CllIllmands.
Program. 2-5
Source tile. 2-3
Prepare object programs.
2-5
PRESERVE Command. 2-4. 2-183
Print
a file. 2-5. 2-290
available devices. 2-8. 2-221
file structures. 2-221
station number. 2-8
status information. 1-5
system information. 2-8
PRINT COl11mand. 2-4. 2-184
/PRINT Switch. 2-188. 2-204. 3-22
Printer.
Write to line. 2-4
Printer output ljueue.
Line. 2-184. 2-193

Index-16

FILEX, 2-119
FUDGE2,2-126
GLOB,2-134
GRIPE. 2-138
L1NK-IO, 1-24
Loader, 1-24
name, 2-48. 1-5
OMOUNT, 2-72, 2-166
OPSER.2-170
preparation commands. 2-5
prepare object. 2-5
QUOLST. 2-210
REATTA. 2-216
Restart a. 2-218
Save a. 2-225
SETSRC 2-246
Start a. 2-6. 2-7. 2-40
2-212.2-223
Stop a user. 1-2
UMOUNT. 2-72. 2-166
version number. 2-1. 2-293
Program counter. 1-5
Program from cards.
Execu te a. 3-16
Program name.
Ohtain. 1-5
User. 2-48
Programmer numhers.
Wildcard. 3-28
Progress of joh.
Determine. 1-5
Project- progra mmer n lim hers.
1-7.2-48.2-162.3-36
Properties.
Terminal. 2-252
PROTECT Command. 2-4. 2-191
Protect files. 2-146
IPROTECT Switch. 2-34
2-181. 2-188. 2-204.
2-271. 2-287
Protection.
standard. 2-183. 2-191
Protection codes.
Access. 1-10. 2-191
Redefining. 1-10
IPROTECTION Switch. 2-67
Pseudo-TTY s. 2-170
.PTP.2-194
PTP:. 2-194. 2-284
PTPSPL. 3-1
PUNCH Command. 2-4. 2-284
Punch output queue.
Card. 2-31

Printer queue,
Line, 3-4
Priorities,
Job, 3-2, 3-8
Priority,
Job, 2-239
Standard. 2-239
IPRIORITY Switch, 2-34. 2-181.
2-188. 2-204. 2-27 I. 2-287. 3-31
Privilege bits. 2-48
Process errors. 3-43
Processing.
ASCI I. 2-120
Binary. 2-120
Image. 2-120
Processing
Commands. 1-3
Jobs. 3-1
DEClape specifiers
Processor.
The standard. 1-19
Processor status. 2-48
Processor switch.
Binary. 1-20
List. 1-20
Source. 1-20
Processor switches. 1-19
Processor switches.
Interpreting. 1-20
List of, 1-20
Processor time limit.
Central. 2-250
Produce relocatable
binaries. 2-19
Produce source files. 2-5
Program,
ALCFIL. 2-9
COMPIL. 2-124
Compile a COBOL, 3-14
Compile a MACRO. 3-32
Compile a SNOBOL. 3-37
Compile an ALGOL 3-10
2-6. 2-7. 2-26. 2-40
control commands. 2-5
DAEMON. 2-46, 2-79
DUMP. 2-81
examination command. 2-6
execution. 2-266
Execute. 2-92
FAILSAFE. 2-99
FILCOM. 2-106
File transfer. 2-119

Index-17

REA TT A Command, 2-7
REATTA Program, 2-216
Record,
Output null, 2-132
Trailer, 2-100
Recovery aid,
Error, 3-41
Recovery routines,
Error, 3-40
Redefining protection codes,
1-10
Reel identification, 2-167
REELlD, 2-260
REENTER Command, 2-6. 2-218
Reinitialization,
Partial, 2-218
.REL files,
Load. 2-92
IREL Switch, 2-59. 2-96, 2-159
Relative date argument,
1-12
Relative time argument, 1-12
Relocatable binaries,
Prod uce. 2-19
Relocatable binary modules. 2-126
$RELOCATABLE Card. 3-9, 3-36
Reloca ta ble sym bois.
List. 2-135
Remove a file structure, 2-72
IREMOVE Switch. 2-35. 2-73. 2-181
2-188. 2-205. 2-288
Rename a file. 2-4. 2-183
RENAME Command. 2-4. 2-219
IREPORT Switch. 2-188. 2-205
Reporting,
Media error. 2-166
SPRINT-IO Error. 3-48
Representation of filename.
Octal, 1-12
Requeue a job, 3-45
.REQUEUE Command. 3-45
Rescanning input lines, 2-26
RESOURCES Command. 2-8, 2-221
:RESOURCES Command (OPSER). 2-172
Response counter. 2-48
Responsi bili ties.
SPRINT-IO,3-1
Restart a program, 2-218
IRESTART Switch. 2-206. 2-271
Restore disk files. 2-4
Restore files. 2-100, 2-10 I, 2-102
:RESTRICT Command (OPSER). 2-172
Restricted devices. 2-2, 2-214

Punch queue,
Card, 2-193
Paper-tape, 2-193, 2-7.84
IPUNCH Switch, 2-34, 2-204,
3-22

IQ Switch, 2-102, 2-107, 2-108,
2-120,2-135
QMANGR, 3-1, 3-2
Question mark as wild
character, I-II
Queue,
BATCH Input, 1-6, 2-193,2-194,2-267
Card punch, 2-193
Card punch output, 2-31
High-priority scheduler run, 2-240
Line printer, 3-4
Line printer output, 2-184, 2-193
Maintain system, 3-2
Manager, 3-1, 3-2
Paper-tape punch, 2-193, 2-284
Plotter, 2-193
Plotter output, 2-177
QUEUE Command, 2-4, 2-193
:QUEUE Command (OPSER). 2-172
QUOLST Command. 2-8
QUOLST Program, 2-210
Quota,
List is. 2-166
Logged-input. 2-8
QUOTA.SYS.2-166

R Command. 2-6. 2-212
R Command (SETSRC). 2-247
IR Switch, 2-102, 2-120, 2-135
Read binary files, 2-134
Reading of control file,
Interrupt sequential, 3-41
Reads,
Disk blocks. 2-48
Incremental disk. 1-5
Ready character. 1-3
Real-time status word. 2-48
Reallocate space, 2-9
REASSIGN Command, 2-2
2-214

Index-18

Restrictions,
$DA T A Card, 3-20
Return allocated core, 2-146
Return device to monitor pool, 2-146
Return devices to device pool, 2-54
Return job number to pool, 2-146
RETURN Key, 1-6
Retype input line, 1-5
. REV[VE Command, 3-46
:REV[VE Command (OPSER). 2-[72
Rewind a DECtape. 2-222. 2-291
Rewind a magnetic tape. 2-4.
2-222, 2-29 [
Rewind a tape, 2-4. 2-129.
2-222. 2-291
REW[ND Command. 2-4, 2-222
IREW[NDS Switch, 2-67
R[GHTMARG[N Command, 2-84
IRONLY Switch. 2-167
Routines.
Error recovery. 3-40
RUBOUT Key. 1-4
RUN Command. 2-6. 2-85. 2-223
Run LINED, 2-37
IRUN Switch. 2-67
Run time. 2-282
Run time.
[ncremental. 1-5
Job. 2-8
Running SPR[NT-IO. 3-7
IRUNOrFSET Switch. 2-67

Scheduler run queue.
High-priority. 2-240
Search files, 2-134
Search list.
Alter a, 2-246
Job. 2-8, 2-246
Manipulate. 2-246
System, 2-8. 2-246
ISEARCH Switch. 2-59. 2-96 .
2-159.3-28
Segment.
Sharahle high. 2-264
Saved null. 2-132
ISELr Switch. 2-23. 2-59.
2-96. 2-159
Semicolon (:). 1-6. 3-9
SEND Command. 2-7. 2-228
:SEND Command (OPSER). 2-172
Sending messages. 2-7
ISEQ Switch. 2-35. 2-181.
2-188. 2-206. 2-271. 2-288
$SEQUENCE Card. 3-37
Sequence number. 3-37
ISEQUENCE Switch. 3-31
Set access date word. 2-100
SET BLOCKS[ZE Command, 2-3. 2-230
SET BREAK Command. 2-231
SET CDR Command, 2-3. 2-234
:SET Command (OPSER). 2-172
SET CPU Command. 2-3. 2-235
Set creation date. 2-100
SET DENS[TY Command. 2-3. 2-237
SET DSKrUL Command. 2-6. 2-238
SET DSKPR[ Command. 2-3. 2-239
Set filename for CDR. 2-234
SET HPQ Command. 2-3, 2-240
SET PHYSICAL GUIDELINE Command, 2-242
SET PHYSICAL LIMIT Command, 2-242
SET SPOOL Command. 2-3. 2-244
Set tape density. 2-100. 2-103
SET T[ME Command. 2-8. 2-250
Set time word. 2-100
SET TTY Command. 2-3, 2-252
SET V[RTUAL L1M[T Command. 2-258
SET WATCH Command. 2-8. 2-259
SETSRC Command. 2-8
SETSRC Program. 2-246
Sharable high segment. 2-264
Sign,
Number. 1-12
Sign, (£).
Dollar, 1-6

IS Switch. 2-102. 2-108, 2-135
Sample card deck. [-3
Sample jobs.
Batch. 3-49
Save a program. 2-225
SAVE Command. 2-5. 2-225. 0-1
Save disk files. 2-4. 2-99. 2-102
Save files. 2-100. 2-101. 2-146
Saved null segments. 2-132
Saves.
Multiple. 2-101
SBLK.2-120
ISC AN Switch. 2-248
SCHED Command. 2-8. 2-227
Schedule bits.
Type out. 2-227
Schedule jobs. 3-2. 3-8

[ndcx-19

Sign (=),
EquaL 1-2
.SI LENCE Command. 3-46
:SILENCE Command (OPSER). 2-172
Simple block format. 2-120
/SINCE Switch, 2-35. 2-67,
2-181. 2-189. 2-206. 2-288
/SINGLE Switch. 2-167
Size.
Cluster, 2-9
Obtain. 1-5
SKIP Command. 2-4. 2-262
Slash. (BATCH). 3-7
:SLOGAN Command (OPSER). 2-172
/SLOW Switch. 2-68
.SN 0 Extension. 2-19
$SNOBOL Card. 3-37
SNOBOL Compiler. 2-19
SNOBOL Program.
Compile a. 3-37
/SNOBOL Switch. 2-23. 2-59.
2-97.2-159
/SORT Switch. 2-68
Source compare. 2-107. 2-109
Source files.
List. 2-153
Output. 2-153
Processor Switch. 1-20
Preparation commands. 2-3
Produce. 2-5
Translate. 2-155. 2-92
Translates. 2-55
Space.
Allocate. 2-3
Free svstem. 2-210
Realloca teo 2-9
Space.
a tape backwards. 2-15. 2-3
Space for new file.
Allocate. 2-9
Space used.
Disk. 2-210
Spaces in commands. 1-6
/SPACING Switch. 2-189. 2-206
Special character.
Control-O. 1-4
Special Character.
Control-R. 1-5
Special Character.
Control-T, 1-5
Control-U. 1-4
Special characters. 1-2. 1-4
Specification.
Change file. 2-4. 2-219

Control file. 2-194
File. 1-10
Input. 2-194
Listing file. 2-194
Log tile. 2-194
Specification in L1NK-IO.
Switch. 1-25
Specifiers.
DECtape Format. 2-119
DECtape Processing. 2-120
File format. 2-120
SPOOL Command.
SET. 2-3. 2-244
Spooler.
Card-reader. 2-234
Input. 1-5.3-1
Input mode. 1-2
Output. 3-1. 3-4
Spooling control bits. 2-48
Spooling devices. 2-244
SPRINT-IO. 1-2. 1-5.3-1
SPRINT-IO.
Running. 3-7
SPRINT- 10 Control Cards. 3-9
SPRINT-IO Error Reporting. 3-48
SPRINT-IO Files. 3-1
SPRINT-IO Messages. 3-47
SPRINT-IO Responsibilities. 3-1
Sq uare brackets in access codes. 1-10
SSA VE Command. 2-5. 2-264. D-I
Stacker.
Control commands to. 1-6
Standard priority. 2-239
Standard processor. 1-19
Standard protection. 2-183. 2-191
Standard translator. 2-19
Start a program. 2-6. 2-7.
2-40. 2-212. 2-223
Start after a HALT. 2-26
Start after Control-C. 2-26
START Command. 2-6. 2-266
/START Switch. 2-35. 2-189.
2-206. 2-271. 2-288
State.
.lob. 2-292
Obtain job. 1-5
Station.
Change logicaL 2-161
Station message.
Central. 2-228
Station number.
Determine. 2-296
Logical. 2-161

Index-20

15,2-103,2-120
16, 2-77
18, 2-103
I A, 2-99, 2- 107, 2-120, 2-135
I ACCESS, 2-65
IAFTER. 2-32, 2-178, 2-185, 2-196,
2-268, 2-285. 3-29
IALGOL. 2-20, 2-56, 2-92, 2-155
I ALLOC 2-65
IASCII. 3-11. 3-13, 3-15. 3-17,
3-20, 3-33, 3-35, 3-38
lB. 2-99, 2-107, 2-120, 2-129
IBEFORE. 2-32. 2-65. 2-178,
2-185, 2-196. 2-285
I BEG IN, 2-32. 2-178,
2-185, 2-196. 2-285
IBIN, 2-20, 2-56. 2-92, 2-155
IBINARY. 3-17, 3-21
Binary processor. I-20
IBLISS. 2-56, 2-93. 2-20
IBLOCKS. 2-65
Ie. 2-76. 2-99. 2-107, 2-120
ICARDS. 2-196, 2-268. 3-29
ICHARGE.2-196
ICHECK. 2-72, 2-166. 2-167
ICHECKSUM.2-65
ICOBOL. 2-20. 2-56. 2-93. 2-156
ICOM PI LE. 2-20. 2-56. 2-93. 2-156
ICOPIES. 2-32. 2-178.
2-185. 2-197. 2-285
ICORE. 2-197. 2-268. 3-29
ICPL1':CH. 3-21
ICR EA TE. 2-33. 2-178. 2-185.
2-197. 2-247. 2-268, 2-286
ICREF. 2-21. 2-56. 2-93.
2-156. 3-27, 3-33
ID. 2-100. 2-120
IDDT. 2-56
IDEADLINE. 2-33. 2-179. 2-186.
2-197. 2-269. 2-286. 3-29
IDEFER.2-198
IDENSITY. 2-65
IOEPEN D. 2-198, 2-269, 3-30
IDETAIL. 2-65
IDISPOSE. 2-33, 2-179. 2-186.
2-198. 2-269. 2-286
IE. 2-100. 2-120. 2-135
IEOTS. 2-66
IERROR. 3-30
IF. 2-33. 2-100. 2-119.
2-135.2-179.2-186.
2-199. 2-269. 2-286
IFIO. 2-21. 2-57, 2-93. 2-157
I F40. 2-22, 2-57. 2-93. 2-157

Physical. 2-161
Print, 2-8
Statistics,
Disk performance, 2-277
Job, 2-8, 2-259
Status,
Processor, 2-48
System, 2-273
Status information, 2-273. 2-292
Status information,
Job. 2-8
Print. 1-5
Status \vord.
Job, 2-48
Real-time, 2-48
STDA T Message Identifier, 3-47
STERR Message Identifier. 3-47
STMSG Message Identifier, 3-47
Stop.
a device, 2-146
a job. 2-6. 2-139
a user program. 1-2
:STOP Command (OPSER). 2-172
STOPR Message Identifier. 3-47
ISTRS Switch. 2-35, 2-181. 2-289.
2-206. 2-288
Structure.
Access a tile. 2-166
Remove a file. 2-72
Structure name.
Device. 2-48
File. 2-48. 1-10
Structures.
Print tile. 2-221
STSUM Message Identifier. 3-47
Suh-tile directorv. 1-10
Suhjohs. 2-170
SUBMIT Command. 2-4. 2-267
Suhmitting a Joh with a Control file. 3-8
Suhmitting a Joh with Files (BATCH). 3-6
Suhmitting johs to BATCH. 3-4
ISUMMARY Switch. 2-68
SUPERSEDE Command, 2-85
Suppress all output from joh. 3-46
Suppress output. 1-4
ISUPPRESS Switch. 3-11. 3-13. 3-16.
3-19, 3-22. 3-27, 3-34. 3-35. 3-39
Swapping parameters. 2-48
Switch.
InL. 2-107. 2-108
InU.2-107
1026.3-12.3-14.3-16.3-19.
3-23. 3-27, 3-34, 3-35. 3-39
12. 2-103

Indcx-21

INOCREA TE, 2-247
INODETAIL, 2-66
INOEOTS, 2-66
INOLIB, 2-248
INOLIST, 2-23, 2-59, 2-96, 2-158.
3-11, 3- \3, 3-27, 3-33
INOMANTIS, 2-23, 2-59, 2-96, 2-158
INOMARKS, 2-66
INONEW, 2-248
INORESTART,3-31
INOREWINDS, 2-66
INORMAL, 2-66
INOSCAN, 2-248
INOSEARCH, 2-59, 2-96, 2-158
INOSORT, 2-66
INOSUMMARY, 2-67
INOSUPPRESS, 3-11, 3-\3, 3-16,
3-18,3-22,3-27,3-34,
3-35, 3-39
INOSYS, 2-248
INOTE, 2-180, 2-187. 2-201, 2-287
INOTITLE, 2-67
INOUNITS, 2-67
INOWRITE, 2-248
INULL, 2-34, 2-180, 2-187,
2-20 I. 2-287
10,2-101,2-119
10K BINARY, 2-187, 2-202
10KNONE, 2-1. 2-67. 2-180, 2-188,
2-202, 2-287
10LD, 2-23. 2-59, 2-96. 2-159
10PTION, 2-67
10UTPUT, 2-202, 2-270
IP. 2-102, 2-120, 2-135
IPAGE, 2-203. 2-270
IPAGES, 3-31
IPAPER, 2-203
IPARITY, 2-67
IPAUSE 2-72, 2-167
IPcrmanent, 1-18
IPHYSICAL, 2-34, 2-67, 2-180, 2-188,
2-203, 2-270, 2-287
I PLOT, 2-180, 2-203, 3-22
IPRINT, 2-188. 2-204, 3-22
IPRIORITY, 2-34, 2-181. 2-188,
2-204, 2-271, 2-287, 3-31
I PROTECT, 2-34, 2-181, 2-188,
2-204, 2-271, 2-287
IPROTECTION. 2-67
IPUNCH, 2-34, 2-204. 3-22
IQ. 2-102, 2-107, 2-108,
2-120, 2-135
IR, 2-102, 2-120, 2-135
IREL, 2-59, 2-96, 2-159

IFAST, 2-66
IFEET, 2-199, 2-269, 3-31
IFILE, 2-186, 2-199, 2-286
IFILES, 2-66
IFORMS, 2-33, 2-187, 2-200
IFOROTS, 2-56, 2-93, 2-156
I FO RSE, 2-56, 2-93, 2-156
IFORTRAN, 2-21, 2-56, 2-93, 2-156
IFUDGE, 2-21, 2-57, 2-93,
2-124,2-156
IG, 2-76, 2-100, 2-120
IH, 2-76, 2-100, 2-107,
2-108,2-119,2-135
IHEADER, 2-187, 2-200
IHELP, 2-66, 2-72, 2-167,2-200
IHOLLERITH, 3-31
/1, 2-100, 2-120
IIMAGE, 3-18

IJ,2-100
IK, 2-101, 2-129
IKA 10, 2-22, 2-57, 2-93, 2-157
IKllO, 2-57, 2-93, 2-157
IKILL, 2-33, 2-179, 2-187,
2-200, 2-270, 2-286
IL, 2-76, 2-101, 2-120, 2-135
ILIBRARY, 2-57, 2-93, 2-157
ILIMIT, 2-34, 2-179, 2-187,
2-20 I, 2-287
ILINK, 2-57,2-93, 2-157
lUST, 2-22, 2-34, 2-58,
2-66, 2-93, 2-157. 2-180,
2-187. 2-201, 2-270, 2-287
List processor, 1-20
ILMAP, 2-58. 2-95, 2-157
ILOADER, 2-58, 2-95, 2-157
ILOCATE, 3-31
ILOG, 2-187, 2-201
1M, 2-101, 2-119, 2-135
IMACRO, 2-22, 2-58, 2-95, 2-157
I MACX II, 2-58. 2-95, 2-158
IMANTIS, 2-22, 2-58, 2-95, 2-158
IMAP, 2-58, 2-95. 2-158, 3-18
IMARKS, 2-66
IMODlfY, 2-34. 2-180, 2-187
2-20 I, 2-270. 2-287
IMUL TI, 2-167
IN. 2-76, 2-101, 2-135
INAME,3-31
INEW, 2-22, 2-34, 2-58, 2-95,
2-158,2-180,2-187,2-201,
2-248. 2-270, 2-287
INOBIN, 2-23, 2-58, 2-96. 2-158
INOCHECKSUM. 2-66
INOCOMPILE, 2-23, 2-59, 2-96, 2-158

Index-22

IREMOVE, 2-35, 2-73, 2-181,
2-188, 2-205, 2-288
IREPORT, 2-188, 2-205
IRESTART, 2-106, 2-271
IREWINDS, 2-67
IRONLY, 2-167
IRUN,2-67

IRUNOFFSET,2-67
IS, 2-102, 2-108, 2-135
ISCAN, 2-248

ISEARCH. 2-59, 2-96, 2-159, 3-28
ISELF. 2-23, 2-59, 2-96, 2-159
ISEQ. 2-35. 2-181. 2-188,
2-206. 2-271. 2-288
ISEQUENCE. 3-31
ISIN CEo 2-35. 2-67. 2-181.
2-189. 2-206. 2-288
ISINGLE.2-167
IS LOW. 2-68
ISNOBOL 2-23. 2-59. 2-97. 2-159
ISORT.2-68

ISource processor. 1-20
ISPACIN G. 2-189. 2-206
1ST ART. 2-35. 2-189. 2-206.
2-271. 2-288
ISTRS. 2-35. 2-181. 2-189.
2-206. 2-288
ISUMMARY. 2-68
ISL'PPRESS. 3-11. 3-13. 3-16. 3-19.
3-22. 3-27. 3-34. 3-35. 3-39
ISYS. 2-23. 2-59. 2-97.
2-159. 2-248
IT. 2-76. 2-102. 2-119. 2-129
ITAG. 2-207. 2-271
ITAPE. 2-207. 2-288
ITemporary. 1-18
IT! M E. 2-207. 2-271. 3-32
ITITLES. 2-68
ITPLOT. 2-208. 2-271. 3-32
ITPUNCH. 3-22
IU. 2-102. 2-108
IUNPRESERVED. 2-288
IUNIQUE. 2-208. 2-271. 3-32
IUNITS. 2-68
IUNPRESERVED. 2-35. 2-181. 2-189. 2-208
IV. 2-76. 2-103. 2-119
IVID.2-167
IW. 2-103. 2-107. 2-129
IWENABL. 2-168
IWIDTH. 2-68. 3-11. 3-14. 3-16.
3-19.3-22.3-27.3-34
3-35. 3-39
IWLOCK.2-168
IWORDS. 2-68

IWRITE. 2-248
IWRITTEN.2-68
IX, 2-103. 2-107, 2-136
IY,2-103
IZ, 2-77, 2-103, 2-120. 2-129
IZDEFER. 2-208
Switch specifiction in
L1NK-IO. 1-25
SWITCH.lNI, 1-14
Switches.
Compile. 1-18. 2-20
Interpreting processor. 1-20
List of processor. 1-20
Override system default. 1-14
Passing L1NK-IO. 1-25
passing LOADER. 1-24
Processor. 1-19
Switches to the
linking-loaders. 1-24
SYFILE Command. 2-85
Symbols.
Check for global. 2-134
DUMP. 2-86
List erroneous. 2-135
List fixed. 2-135
List nonrelocatable. 2-135
List of. 2-134
List relocatable. 2-135
Output global, 2-135
Symbols list.
Cross-referenced. 2-134
Symbols table.
Internal. 2-134
ISYS Switch. 2-23. 2-59. 2-97.
2-159. 2-248
SYS:ACT.SYS. 2-162
SYST AT Command. 2-8. 2-273
:SYSTAT Command (OPSER). 2-172
System.
Accessing the. 1-7
Configuring the. I-I
Gain access to. 2-162
Loading the. I-I
Logging on the. 1-7
System default switches.
Override. 1-14
System facilities.
Allocating. 2-2
System information.
Print. 2-8
System information commands. 2-8
System jobs.
Communicating with. I-I

Index-23

System queues,
Maintain, 3-2
System search list 2-8. 2-246
System space,
Free. 2-210
System status. 2-273

Disconnect a. 2-7
Disconnect job's. 2-63
Free a, 2-63
Identification, 2-228
Initialization. 2-144
Job number, 2-174
Modes, 1-2
Properties 2-252
Terminate.
a job. 3-24
card input 3 ·23
input 2-llL
output 2-122
a command line. 1-6
Termination commands.
Job. 2-7
Test
Busy. 2-228
Text Editor, 2-164
Time.
Incremental day. 1-5
Incremental run. 1-5
Job run. 2-8
Time argument
Ahsolute, 1-12
Relative. 1-12
Time arguments. 1-12
TIME Command. 2-8, 2-146. 2-282
TIME Command,
SET. 2-250. 2-8
Time limit
Central processor, 2-250
?TIME LIMIT EXCEEDED
Message. 3-44
Time limit for joh. 2-8
Time limit in jiffies, 2-48
Time of day.
Type the. 2-45
ITIME Switch. 2-207. 2-27 L 3-32
Time used.
Total. 2-48
Time word.
Set 2-100
TITLE Command. 2-85
ITiTLES Switch, 2-68
:TLOCj Command (OPSER), 2-173
TMPCOR Pointers. 2-48
Total time used, 2-48
TP Command (SETSRC), 2-247
!TPLOT Switch. 2-208. 2-27 L 3-32
TPUNCH Command, 2-4. 2-284
ITPUNCH Switch, 3-22
Trailer record. 2- 100

T Command (SETSRC), 2-247
IT Switch. 2-76, 2-102. 2-119. 2-129
Table.
Configuration. 2-46
feature. 2-46
Internal symbols, 2-134
TABS in Commands, 1-6
!TAG Switch. 2-207. 2-271
Tape.
Advance a magnetic, 2-99, 2-129
Backspace a magnetic. 2-99. 2-129
Density for magnetic, 2-237
Directory of files on, 2-101
Move a magnetic. 2-262
Rewind a, 2-4. 2-129
Rewind a magnetic. 2-222. 2-291
Rewind magnetic. 2-103
Unload a magnetic. 2-291
Tape backwards.
Move a, 2-3
Space a. 2-3
Tape blocksi/.e.
Magnetic. 2-230
Tape density,
Set 2-100. 2-103
Tape error analysis. 2-166
Tape forward.
Move a. 2-4
IT APE Switch. 2-207. 2-288
Tape to disk transfer, 2-115
Tape transfer,
Disk to. 2-115
TAPEID. 2-121
TDUMP Command. 2-85
Technique,
type-ahead. 1-3
TECO,2-164
TECO Command. 2-3. 2-280
Temporary files, C-I
Temporary switch, 1-18
Terminal.
Attach to a job. 2-13
Characteristics. 2-252

Index-24

User core,
Clear, 2-132, 2-212, 2-223
User data file, 3-1
User file directory, 1-10
User File Directory (UFO), 2-166
USER Message Indicator, 3-48
User mode. 1-2
User program,
Stop a. 1-2
User program name. 2-48
User's core area. 2-46
USESTAT Command, 1-5,2-8.2-292

Transaction File (FUDGE2), 2-126
Transfer,
a job, 2-7, 2-216
control, 3-42
Disk to tape, 2-115
File, 2-115, 2-4, 2-27
Program (FILE), 2-119
Tape to disk, 2-115
Translate a source file, 2-92
Translate source files, 2-155
Translates source files, 2-55
Translator,
Standard, 2-19
TS Command (SETSRC). 2-247
:TSILENCE Command (OPSER). 2-173
TTY Command.
SET. 2-252. 2-3
:TTYTST Command (OPSER), 2-173
Type a file. 2-290
Type amount of core. 2-29
TYPE Command. 2-5. 2-85. 2-290
Type current date, 2-8
Type out schedule bits. 2-227
Type the current date. 2-45
Type the time of day. 2-45
Type-ahead technique. 1-3

IV Switch. 2-76. 2-103, 2-119
VERSION Command, 2-8, 2-293
Version number.
Program, 2-1, 2-293
Versions,
Compare file. 2-4. 2- 106
IVID Switch. 2-167
VIRTUAL LIMIT Command.
SET. 2-258
Virtual page limit
Current 2-258

I U Switch, 2- 102. 2- 108

IW Switch. 2-103, 2-107. 2-129
WATCH bits. 2-48
WATCH Command.
SET. 2-259. 2-8
IWENABL Switch. 2-168
:WHAT Command (OPSER). 2-173
WHERE Command. 2-8, 2-296
WIDTH Command, 2-85
IWIDTH Switch. 2-68. 3-11. 3-14, 3-16.
3-19. 3-22. 3-27. 3-34. 3-35. 3-39
Wild character.
Asterisk as. I-I I
Question mark as. I-II
Wildcard construction. I-II
Wildcard programmer numbers. 3-28
IWLOCK Switch. 2-168
Word.
Job status. 2-48
IWORDS Switch, 2-68
Write a core image. 2-5. 2-79
Write a core image file, 2-46
Write a core image to
device. 2-225

In U Swi tch. 2- 107
IUNPRESERVED Switch, 2-288
UFO Creation, 2-166
UMOUNT Program. 2-72. 2-166
Unique command names. 1-6
IUNIQUE Switch. 2-208. 2-271. 3-32
IUNITS Switch, 2-68
Unload a DEClape, 2-291
Unload a magnetic tape, 2-291
UNLOAD Command. 2-5, 2-291
/UNPRESERVED Switch. 2-35. 2-181.
2-189. 2-208
Unprotected files,
Delete, 2-146
:UNRESTRICT Command (OPSER). 2-173
Unrestricted devices, 2-2, 2-214
Update a file, 2-5, 2-126
Used,
Disk space, 2-210
Total time, 2-48
User control file, 3-2

Index-25

IY Switch, 2- 103

Write an end-of-file mark, 2-91
IWRITE Switch, 2-248
Write to line printer, 2-4
Writes,
Incremental disk, 1-5
Written,
Disk blocks, 2-48
IWRITTEN Switch, 2-68

IZ Switch, 2-77, 2- 103, 2-120, 2-129
IZOEFER Switch, 2-208
ZERO Command. 2-5, 2-297
Zero-compression. 0-1

IX Switch, 2-103, 2-107, 2-136
XTRACT Command, 2-86

Index-26

HOW TO OBTAIN SOFTWARE INFORMATION
SOFTWARE NEWSLETTERS, MAILING LIST
The Software Communications Group, located at corporate headquarters in
Maynard, publishes newsletters and Software Performance Summaries (SPS)
for the various Digital products. N€wsletters are published monthly,
and contain announcements of new and revised software, programming
notes, software problems and solutions, and documentation corrections.
Software Performance Summaries are a collection of existing problems
and solutions for a given software system, and are published periodically. For information on the distribution of these documents and how
to get on the software newsletter mailing list, write to:
Software Communications
P. O. Box F
Maynard, Massachusetts 01754
SOFTWARE PROBLEMS
Questions or problems relating to Digital's software should be reported
to a Software Support Specialist. A specialist is located in each
Digital Sales Office in the united States.
In Europe, software problem
reporting centers are in the following cities.
Reading, England
Paris, France
The Hague, Holland
Tel Aviv, Israel

Milan, Italy
Solna, Sweden
Geneva, Switzerland
Munich, West Germany

Software Problem Report (SPR) forms are available from the specialists
or from the Software Distribution Centers cited below.
PROGRAMS AND MANUALS
Software and manuals should be ordered by title and order number.
In
the United States, send orders to the nearest distribution center.
Digital Equipment Corporation
Software Distribution Center
146 Main Street
Maynard, Massachusetts 01754

Digital Equipment Corporation
Software Distribution Center
1400 Terra Bella
Mountain View, California 94043

Outside of the United States, orders should be directed to the nearest
Digital Field Sales Office or representative.
USERS SOCIETY
DECUS, Digital Equipment Computer Users Society, maintains a user exchange center for user-written programs and technical application information.
A catalog of existing programs is available. The society
publishes a periodical, DECUSCOPE, and holds technical seminars in the
United States, Canada, Europe, and Australia. For information on the
society and membership application forms, write to:
DECUS
Digital Equipment Corporation
146 Main Street
Maynard, Massachusetts 01754

DECUS
Digital Equipment, S.A.
81 Route de l'Aire
1211 Geneva 26
Switzerland

DECsystem-10 Operating System
Commands Manual
DEC-10-OSCMA-A-D

READER'S COMMENTS
NOTE:

This form is for document COIT~ents only. Problems
with software should be reported on a Software
Problem Repcrt (SPR) form (see the HOW TO OBTAIN
SOFTWARE INFO~~TION page).

Did you find errors in this manual?

If so, specify by page.

Did you find this manual understandable, usable, and well-organized?
Please make suggestions for improvement.

Is there sufficient documentation on associated system programs
required for use of the software described in this manual? If not,
what material is missing and where should it be placed?

Please indicate the type of user/reader that you most nearly represent.

o
o
o
o
o
o

Name

Assembly language programmer
Higher-level language programmer
Occasional programmer (experienced)
User with little programming experience
Student programmer
Non-programmer interested in computer concepts and capabilities
Date __________________________

Organization _______________________________________________________________
Street ______________________________________________________________________
City ___________________________ State _____________ Zip Code ______________
or
Country
If you do not require a written reply, please check here.

-------------------------------------------------------------Fold lIere------------------------------------------------------------

----------------------------------------------.- Do Not Tear - Fold lIere and Staple -----------------------------------------------

FIRST CLASS
PERMIT NO. 33
MA YNARD, MASS.
BUSINESS REPLY MAIL
NO POSTAGE STAMP NECESSARY IF MAILED IN THE UNITED STATES

Postage will be paid by:

Software Communications
P. O. Box F
Maynard, Massachusetts 01754

DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION, Maynard, Massachusetts, Telephone: (617) 897-5111 • ARIZON A, Phoenix . CALIFOR NIA,
Sunnyvale, Santa Ana, Los Angeles, San Diego and San Francisco (Mountain View) • COLORADO, Engelwood • CON NECTICUT,
Meriden. DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA, Washington (Riverdale, Md.) • FLORI DA, Orlando. GEORGIA, Atlanta • ILLINOIS, Northbrook
• INDIANA, Indianapolis. LOUISIANA, Metair ie. MARYLAND, Riverdale. MASSACHUSETTS, Cambridge and Waltham. MICHIGAN,
Ann Arbor and Detroit (Southfield) • MINNESOTA, Minneapolis . MISSOURI , Kansas City and Maryland Heights. NEW JERSEY,
Fairfield, Metuchen and Princeton. NEW MEXICO, Albuquerque • N EW YORK, Huntington Station, Manhattan, New York, Syracuse
and Rochester • NORTH CAROLINA, Durham/ Chapel Hill • OHIO, Cl eveland, Dayton and Euclid . OKLAHOMA, Tulsa · OREGON ,
Portland • PE NNSYLVANIA, Bluebell, Paoli and Pittsburgh • TENNESSEE, Knoxville • TEXAS, Dallas and Houston . UTAH , Salt Lake
City • WASHINGTON , Bellevue • WISCONSIN, Milwaukee • ARGENTI NA, Buenos Aires • AUSTRALIA, Adelaide, Brisbane, Crows
Nest, Melbourne, Norwood, Perth and Sydney • AUSTRIA, Vienna • BELGI UM, Brussels . BRAZIL, Rio de Janeiro, Sao Paulo
and Porto Alegre
•
CANADA, Alberta , Vancou ve r , Britis h Columb ia ; Hamilton , Mi ss issau ga anti Ottawa , On tar io; and
Quebec • CHILE , Santiago • DENMARK, Copenhagen and Hellerup • FINLAND, Helsinki • FRANCE, Grenoble and Rungis •
GERMANY, Cologne, Hannover, Frankfurt, Munich and Stuttgart • INDIA, Bombay • ISRAEL, Tel Avi v . ITALY, Milano. JAPAN ,
Osaka and Tokyo. MEXICO , Mexico City. NETHERLANDS , The Hag ue . NEW ZEALAND, Auckland. NORWAY, Oslo.
PHILIPPINES, Manila •
PUERTO RICO, Miramar and Santurce
• REPUBLIC OF CHINA, Taiwan • SCOTLAND, West Lothian •
SPAIN , Barcelona and Madrid
•
SWEDEN , Solna and Stockholm
• SWITZERLAND , Geneva and Zurich • UNITED
KINGDOM , Birmingham , BristOl , Edinburgh, London, Manchester , Reading and Warwickshire
•
VENEZUELA , Caracas

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c041 52.342996, 2008/05/07-21:37:19
Modify Date                     : 2017:08:04 05:48:21-07:00
Create Date                     : 2007:08:02 07:46:27+10:00
Metadata Date                   : 2017:08:04 05:48:21-07:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe Acrobat 7.08
Format                          : application/pdf
Document ID                     : uuid:64dbcef2-b5de-413c-be1e-dbf983305fbe
Instance ID                     : uuid:11d7e35c-2f81-1b48-a2b8-884e75fee255
Producer                        : Adobe Acrobat 9.0 Paper Capture Plug-in
Page Layout                     : SinglePage
Page Count                      : 520
Creator                         : Adobe Acrobat 7.08

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

DEC 10 OSCMA A D Decsystem10 Operating System Commands Manual

DEC-10-OSCMA-A-D decsystem10 Operating System Commands Manual DEC-10-OSCMA-A-D decsystem10 Operating System Commands Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation